user™s manual · hotline: +49 5251 688865-99 . user™s manual grandma version 3.0 5 contents /...

User�User�User�User�User�s Manuals Manuals Manuals Manuals ManualVVVVVersion 3.0ersion 3.0ersion 3.0ersion 3.0ersion 3.0

44444 MA Lighting Technology GmbH . Dachdeckerstr. 16 . D-97297 Waldbüttelbrunn . www.malighting.de eMail: [email protected]

Contents

ContentsContentsContentsContentsContents11111 IntroductionIntroductionIntroductionIntroductionIntroduction ............................................................................................................................................................................. 6

1.1 General Information ........................................................................................................................................................... 61.2 General Comments ............................................................................................................................................................. 61.3 Specifications ...................................................................................................................................................................... 71.4 Installation ............................................................................................................................................................................ 71.5 Safety Requirements (Important, read carefully!) ..................................................................................................... 81.6 General Safety Instructions ............................................................................................................................................. 91.7 Layout and Controls .......................................................................................................................................................... 101.8 Quick Reference ................................................................................................................................................................ 16

22222 SetupSetupSetupSetupSetup ........................................................................................................................................................................................ 192.1 Selecting, patching, creating and editing of fixtures and dimmers (Edit Show) ............................................... 192.2 Selecting Type and Number of Fixtures ....................................................................................................................... 202.3 Selecting the Number of Dimmer Channels ............................................................................................................... 222.4 Selecting DMX Addresses for Fixtures .......................................................................................................................... 242.5 Setting DMX Addresses for Dimmers ........................................................................................... .................................. 262.6 DMX Output Window ........................................................................................................................................................ 282.7 DMX Output and Ethernet Configuration .................................................................................................................... 302.8 Single Channel-specific Adjustments for the Current Show ................................................................................. 322.9 Creating, Assigning and Deleting Profiles .................................................................................................................... 342.10 Creating presets, effects and group buttons automatically ................................................................................... 362.11 EDITING FIXTURES (modify) ............................................................................................................................................. 382.12 EDITING FIXTURES (create new) ..................................................................................................................................... 402.13 Settings in the Setup Menu ............................................................................................................................................ 422.14 Settings in the DEFAULTS Menu .................................................................................................................................... 442.15 Setting Sound Signals ....................................................................................................................................................... 462.16 Adjustments in the ATTRIBUTE GROUPING menu ..................................................................................................... 472.17 TIME & DATE Menu ............................................................................................................................................................ 512.18 User Management .............................................................................................................................................................. 52

33333 Creating a ShowCreating a ShowCreating a ShowCreating a ShowCreating a Show ................................................................................................................................................................... 563.1 CREATING A WINDOW ...................................................................................................................................................... 563.3 Creating and calling up Fixtures and Dimmer GROUPS ........................................................................................... 603.4 Accessing Fixtures directly (in the FIXTURE SHEET) ................................................................................................. 623.5 Accessing Dimmer Channels directly (in the CHANNEL SHEET) ............................................................................ 703.6 Colours used in the FIXTURE, CHANNEL and FADER window ................................................................................. 773.7 Creating and calling up Presets ...................................................................................................................................... 783.8 Deleting Groups, Sequences, Views etc. ...................................................................................................................... 81

44444 Cues and SequencesCues and SequencesCues and SequencesCues and SequencesCues and Sequences .......................................................................................................................................................... 824.1 Creating Cues (separate memories) .............................................................................................................................. 824.2 Programming Sequences ................................................................................................................................................. 844.3 Editing Sequences ............................................................................................................................................................. 884.4. Editing Chasers ..................................................................................................................................................................... 944.5 Update Cue .......................................................................................................................................................................... 974.6 Update Preset ...................................................................................................................................................................... 98

55555 Executing Cues, Sequences and ChasersExecuting Cues, Sequences and ChasersExecuting Cues, Sequences and ChasersExecuting Cues, Sequences and ChasersExecuting Cues, Sequences and Chasers ..................................................................................................... 995.1 ASSIGN menu (Assignment to EXECUTOR) ................................................................................................................. 995.2 Small EXECUTOR Window ................................................................................................................................................ 1065.3 EXECUTOR Window ............................................................................................................................................................ 1075.4 TRACKING Window ............................................................................................................................................................ 1085.5 Page Administration ......................................................................................................... .................................................. 1105.6 OFF menu (RUNNING PROGRAMS) ................................................................................................................................ 112

55555Phone: + 49 9 31 49 79 4- 0 Fax: -29 . Hotline: +49 5251 688865-99Hotline: +49 5251 688865-99Hotline: +49 5251 688865-99Hotline: +49 5251 688865-99Hotline: +49 5251 688865-99 . User�s Manual grandMA Version 3.0

Contents / Explanations

ExplanationsExplanationsExplanationsExplanationsExplanationsààààà see

Important!Important!Important!Important!Important!Attention!Attention!Attention!Attention!Attention!

InformationNote

66666 EffectsEffectsEffectsEffectsEffects .................................................................................................................................................................................... 1136.1 Effect Pool ............................................................................................................................................................................. 1136.3 Executing an Effect Group ............................................................................................................................................... 1186.4 Customizing an Effect Group ........................................................................................................................................... 1196.5 Effect Groups in Cues ....................................................................................................................................................... 1206.6 View ALL RUNNING EFFECTS menu ............................................................................................................................... 1216.7 Creating and Saving Virtual Forms (EDIT FORMS) ..................................................................................................... 122

77777 Remote ControlRemote ControlRemote ControlRemote ControlRemote Control ...................................................................................................................................................................... 1257.1 Timecode 1257.2 Remote Control via Touchboard ..................................................................................................................................... 1347.3 Remote Control by DMX IN .................................................................................................... .......................................... 1367.4 Remote Control by MIDI ................................................................................................................................................... 138

88888 Macros und QUIKEYSMacros und QUIKEYSMacros und QUIKEYSMacros und QUIKEYSMacros und QUIKEYS ...................................................................................................................................................... 1408.1 Creating Macros ................................................................................................................................................................. 1408.2 Assigning and Activating QUIKEYS ............................................................................................ ................................... 1438.3 Agenda Menu ..................................................................................................................................................................... 144

99999 Command lineCommand lineCommand lineCommand lineCommand line .......................................................................................................................................................................... 1469.1 Introduction ........................................................................................................................................................................ 1469.2 Command Overview .......................................................................................................................................................... 1489.3 Command Reference ........................................................................................................................................................ 150

111110 Saving and Loading a Show0 Saving and Loading a Show0 Saving and Loading a Show0 Saving and Loading a Show0 Saving and Loading a Show ..................................................................................................................................... 18010.1 Saving the Current Show on the internal harddisk .................................................................................................. 18010.2 Loading a Show from the internal harddisk ................................................................................................................ 18010.3 Loading an Empty Show ................................................................................................................................................... 18110.4 Deleting the Current Show .............................................................................................................................................. 18110.5 Deleting a Show from the internal harddisk ............................................................................................................... 18110.6 Saving the Current Show on floppy disk ...................................................................................................................... 18110.7 Loading a Show from floppy disk ................................................................................................................................... 181

1111111111 Software UpdateSoftware UpdateSoftware UpdateSoftware UpdateSoftware Update .................................................................................................................................................................. 182

1212121212 Utility MenuUtility MenuUtility MenuUtility MenuUtility Menu183

1313131313 Layout and Controls Layout and Controls Layout and Controls Layout and Controls Layout and Controls grandMAgrandMAgrandMAgrandMAgrandMA replay unit replay unit replay unit replay unit replay unit ............................................................................................. 18413.1 Introduction ......................................................................................................................................................................... 18413.2 General Instructions .......................................................................................................................................................... 18613.3 Specification and Technical Data ................................................................................................................................... 187

14 True Tracking Backup and Playback on 14 True Tracking Backup and Playback on 14 True Tracking Backup and Playback on 14 True Tracking Backup and Playback on 14 True Tracking Backup and Playback on grandMAgrandMAgrandMAgrandMAgrandMA consoles consoles consoles consoles consoles .................................................. 19014.1 Why using a backup system? ......................................................................................................................................... 19014.2 grandMA with show backup .............................................................................................................. ............................. 19014.3 Setting up a True Tracking Backup system ................................................................................................................. 19114.4 Connecting consoles for a True Tracking Backup system ....................................................................................... 19214.5 Console configuration for True Tracking Backup or Playback ................................................................................ 195

15 Fixture Library15 Fixture Library15 Fixture Library15 Fixture Library15 Fixture Library ....................................................................................................................................................................... 200

IndexIndexIndexIndexIndex ..................................................................................................................................................................................................... 203


1 Introduction1 Introduction1 Introduction1 Introduction1 Introduction

1 .11 .11 .11 .11 .1 General InformationGeneral InformationGeneral InformationGeneral InformationGeneral InformationCombining an approved concept of operation, an outstanding product design and first-class quality with a bundle ofnew ideas and top technology, this new board opens the door to a fascinating world of new dimensions, offering theopportunity to gain perfect control on extended lighting shows involving lots of channels and intelligent fixtures.

MA users will feel very familiar with grandMA from the very beginning. The basic operation modes, well known fromthe Scancommander, proved to be the perfect tools to control intelligent fixtures and are now the leading standardof the industry. Of course, there have been quite a few improvements as controlling hundreds of channels asks forintelligent solutions on time consuming operations, but essentially, the grandMA is still an MA console � easy tooperate, yet very powerful.

1.1.11.1.11.1.11.1.11.1.1 DisplaysDisplaysDisplaysDisplaysDisplaysThe first remarkable features of the grandMA are the contrast-rich, full color TFT touch screens integrated into apanel with adjustable viewing angle. Optionally supported by two external monitors they allow for perfect controland multiple visualisation of group and preset operations, interactive output displays and different ways of cuelisting.Colors and gobos can directly be selected by labeled preset buttons and allow for a fast and accurate control, whilethe encoders can be used anytime for the fine tuning. By way of presets, stored positions can quickly be adjusted tochanged arrangements.

1.1.21.1.21.1.21.1.21.1.2 MotorfadersMotorfadersMotorfadersMotorfadersMotorfadersHow can a console like the grandMA with just 20 faders (10 on the grandMA light) possibly claim to control 4000channels? It�s not a trick, it�s motorised faders. They automatically capture the actual values as soon as you switchover from one program library to another. Further special features are explained in the respective chapters following.

1.1.31.1.31.1.31.1.31.1.3 Programming features and data inputProgramming features and data inputProgramming features and data inputProgramming features and data inputProgramming features and data inputAt first, the flexibility of the grandMA may surprise, but you have always the choice to do it �the old fashion way�.Dealing with huge amounts of data will make you want to use improved ways of programming and even anautomatic effect synthesizer.

1.1.41.1.41.1.41.1.41.1.4 Flexible Setup configurationFlexible Setup configurationFlexible Setup configurationFlexible Setup configurationFlexible Setup configurationDespite the grandMA�s high flexibility, you will never lose direct access and control. View Macro buttons allow tovisualise current information at anytime. Standard displays for typical Live Event, Theatre, synchronised playback orDiscotheque applications are some of the settings you can start from.

1.1.51.1.51.1.51.1.51.1.5 Hardware and InterfacesHardware and InterfacesHardware and InterfacesHardware and InterfacesHardware and InterfacesThe built-in Hard Disk Drive offers virtually unlimited storage capacity. The built-in flashdisk (not on the ultra-light,on which the software is on the HDD) contains the board�s software and makes the grandMA independent from anyexternal PC.

1 .21 .21 .21 .21 .2 General CommentsGeneral CommentsGeneral CommentsGeneral CommentsGeneral CommentsThis manual describes the complex possibilities that the grandMA has in store for you. Step by step, you will beguided through the logical aspects of working with this console.You will soon find out, that operating the grandMA is relatively simple in view of the vast variety of features andoptions available. Once you are familiar with the basics, you will realise that you can easily go ahead and try outnew possibilities, as all procedures and operation modes are clearly structured.

Consequently, this manual starts with a general introduction, followed by basic settings within the Setup menu,such as selecting fixtures and dimmer channels with DMX address, modifications, etc.

Chapter 3 is dedicated to the practical aspects of setting up a Show, while Chapter 4 will show you how to create andedit Cues and Sequences. Moving on to Chapter 5, you will learn how to execute Cues, Sequences and Chasers. InChapter 6, you will learn how to create, save and execute effects. Chapter 7 is dedicated to the Remote Control(abbreviated as �Remote�) and Timecode, while Chapter 8 explains the function of Macros and the Quikey. Chapter9 deals with the Command Line. Saving and loading your show is described in chapter 10. Chapter 11 explains theupdating of the operational software as well as the fixture library, while chapter 13 is dedicated to the operation ofthe grandMA replay unit. Chapter 14 deals with True Tracking Backup and Playback Functions and chapter 15provides a listing of all fixtures currently available in the library.

We are convinced that you will enjoy working with the grandMA and we wish you every success for your Shows!

1.1 General Information / 1.2 General Comments


1 .31 .31 .31 .31 .3 SpecificationsSpecificationsSpecificationsSpecificationsSpecifications

1.3.11.3.11.3.11.3.11.3.1 CapacitiesCapacitiesCapacitiesCapacitiesCapacities● 2048 control channels (HTP or LTP) with 8 or 16 bit resolution, (optional) also available with 4096 channels (on

the ultra-light, only 1024 channels are possible)● Virtually unlimited number of presets, memories, cue lists and effects

1.3.21.3.21.3.21.3.21.3.2 ErgonomicsErgonomicsErgonomicsErgonomicsErgonomics● full colour TFT touch screens with a wide angle of view and 2 external (one on the ultra-light) monitors (optional)● encoders for display setting, 5 master encoders for data entry● 20 (10) motor faders and extra silent GO+ and GO� Buttons (10 non-motorized Faders on the ultra-light)● Numeric keypad plus standard keyboard and mouse (only with grandMA)● Trackball

1 .3 .31 .3 .31 .3 .31 .3 .31 .3 .3 General user functionsGeneral user functionsGeneral user functionsGeneral user functionsGeneral user functions● Permanent access to single units or groups● Fixture library with update option via Internet● Selective programming for free combination of memories and effects● Free switching between stage-orientated movements and DMX control (not in version 3.0)

1.3.41.3.41.3.41.3.41.3.4 HardwareHardwareHardwareHardwareHardware● Notebook Hard Disk Drive and 3,5� Floppy Drive● 12 MB flash memory for self-contained operating system (not on the ultra-light)● Protection against radio interference (CE-Norm)● Inputs: MIDI, Sound, Remote Go, SMPTE, Analogue (+10 V), DMX 512● Output: 4 Times DMX 512 (2 on the ultra-light), MIDI, Printer, Ethernet● Full tracking backup and sync mode with second unit

1.3.51.3.51.3.51.3.51.3.5 Dimensions and WeightDimensions and WeightDimensions and WeightDimensions and WeightDimensions and WeightgrandMAgrandMAgrandMAgrandMAgrandMA :::::● Width 48�, height 6�, depth 26� (1200 x 150 x 670 mm)● Weight 104 lb. (47 kg) without flightcase

grandMA lightgrandMA lightgrandMA lightgrandMA lightgrandMA light :::::● Width 29�, height 5�, depth 20� (730 x 120 x 510 mm)● Weight 46 lb. (21 kg) without flightcase

grandMA grandMA grandMA grandMA grandMA ultra-light:ultra-light:ultra-light:ultra-light:ultra-light:

● Width 635mm, Height 157mm, Depth 490mm● Weight 12.8 kg without flightcase

grandMA grandMA grandMA grandMA grandMA replay unit replay unit replay unit replay unit replay unit ààààà 1313131313 Layout and Controls grandMA replay unit

1 .41 .41 .41 .41 .4 InstallationInstallationInstallationInstallationInstallation90�230 Volt, 40�60 Hz via Euro plug. No switching of voltage necessary.

DMX output: Complies with USITT DMX 512 (1990) protocol. The output is opto-insulated and exceeding RS 485 orRS 422. The pins in the 5 pin XLR plug are: Pin 1: ground, Pin 2: Data�, Pin 3: Data+ (pins 4 and 5: not used)

1.3 Specifications / 1.4 Installation


1.51.51.51.51.5 Safety Requirements (Important, read carefully!)Safety Requirements (Important, read carefully!)Safety Requirements (Important, read carefully!)Safety Requirements (Important, read carefully!)Safety Requirements (Important, read carefully!)

1.5.11.5.11.5.11.5.11.5.1 TouchscreenTouchscreenTouchscreenTouchscreenTouchscreenNever use any sharp items when operating the touchscreens! Deep scratches will damage the screen. Duringoperation it might happen that due to temperature fluctuations the calibration of the touchscreens will change, sothat a new adjustment will be necessary. ààààà 2.132.132.132.132.13 Settings in the Setup Menu (point 1)

1.5.21.5.21.5.21.5.21.5.2 Sockets for keyboard and mouseSockets for keyboard and mouseSockets for keyboard and mouseSockets for keyboard and mouseSockets for keyboard and mouseThese sockets are located on the back side of the unit and are very delicate; especially during transport, take carethat these parts are not exposed to mechanic stress.

1 . 5 . 31 . 5 . 31 . 5 . 31 . 5 . 31 . 5 . 3Transportation/CaseTransportation/CaseTransportation/CaseTransportation/CaseTransportation/CaseDuring transport, take care that the touchscreens are not exposed to mechanical stress. Flightcases not provided byMA Lighting have to be designed in a way that under no circumstancesunder no circumstancesunder no circumstancesunder no circumstancesunder no circumstances pressure can be exerted on the TFTdisplays.

1.5.41.5.41.5.41.5.41.5.4 PPPPPanel anel anel anel anel (grandMA only)If the mechanical parts of the display panel have not been moved for a while (about one day), it might occur thatyou will feel a stronger resistance when starting to change the angle. This is just normal and related to themechanics.

1 . 5 . 51 . 5 . 51 . 5 . 51 . 5 . 51 . 5 . 5Battery Battery Battery Battery Battery (not on the ultra-light)In case of power failure, the console offers (with fully charged battery) an emergency backup of at least 10 minutes.In case of a longer power failure, the console will automatically switch off after approximately another 3 minutesor another 12 minutes when pressing CONTINUE. If this case occurs this case occurs this case occurs this case occurs this case occurs, the console will automatically save automatically save automatically save automatically save automatically saveall dataall dataall dataall dataall data.

When switching off the unit via built-in power switchbuilt-in power switchbuilt-in power switchbuilt-in power switchbuilt-in power switch, all data of the current show are saved automatically.

In case of an automatic switch-off after power failure (described above), the unit must be running again for atatatatatleastleastleastleastleast 10 minutes, in order to guarantee a proper SAVE procedure the next time the unit is switched off. ByByByByByignoring this advice the harddisk will be damaged.ignoring this advice the harddisk will be damaged.ignoring this advice the harddisk will be damaged.ignoring this advice the harddisk will be damaged.ignoring this advice the harddisk will be damaged.

The battery needs approximately 4�8 hours for a full recharge. Only then the battery is able again to bridge anotherpower failure of up to 10 minutes.

According to manufacturer provisions, the battery has to be changed after 5 years at latest after 5 years at latest after 5 years at latest after 5 years at latest after 5 years at latest. Please attach alabel on the unit, indicating the date of purchase, preferably update data etc. (choose a location, where thisinformation can easily be seen). (This manual was printed in the year 2001.)

1.5.61.5.61.5.61.5.61.5.6 HarddiskHarddiskHarddiskHarddiskHarddiskDuring operation, do not push or knock the unit.

Although the built-in notebook harddisk is secured by a rubber-upholstery, mechanical stress can still damage theunit and lead to e.g. a complete loss of data.

1.5.71.5.71.5.71.5.71.5.7 HousingHousingHousingHousingHousing� Do not block or cover the ventilation. On hot summer days, the lid (grandMA only) should be at least 5 cm open

to ensure sufficient ventilation.� Do not place any drinks on the unit.� Do not use force when adjusting the viewing angle of the display panel (grandMA only).

1.5 Safety Requirements


1 .61 .61 .61 .61 .6 General Safety InstructionsGeneral Safety InstructionsGeneral Safety InstructionsGeneral Safety InstructionsGeneral Safety Instructions1. Read all the instructions in the user�s manual, especially the safety requirements ààààà 1.5 Safety requirements

2. Follow all instructions. Keep the user�s manual for later use.

3. Follow all cautions and warnings indicated on the unit.

4. Pull the mains plug before cleaning the unit; don�t use any liquid or spray cleanser. Clean with a dry cloth.

5. Do not use the unit near water. Do not expose it to a humid environment. Do not spill any liquid over the unit.

6. Unplug this apparatus during lightning storms or when unused for long periods of time.

7. Do not block or cover any ventilation slots in the housing - they guarantee the reliable functioning of the unitand protect it against overheating. Do not install the unit into a frame unless sufficient ventilation is guaranteed.Install in accordance with the manufacturer�s instructions.

8. Do not insert any objects through the slots of the unit, as these could get in contact with live parts or couldcause short circuits. This may cause fires and electric shocks.

9. Do not place the unit on unstable surfaces. It might fall down and get damaged.

10. The unit is provided with a safety plug. This plug can only be used with safety sockets. These precautions shouldby all means be followed. If the plug should not fit into a given socket (e.g. the case with old sockets), the socketshould be replaced by an electrician.

11. Do not ignore the safety purpose of the grounding-type plug. A grounding type plug has two blades and a thirdgrounding prong. The third prong is provided for your safety. If the provided plug does not fit into your outlet,consult an electrician for replacement of the obsolete outlet.

12. Do not place any objects on the power cord. Protect it from being walked on or pinched particularly at plugs andthe point where they exit from the apparatus.

13. If using an extension cord, make sure the rated output of all units connected in aggregate does not exceed themaximum rated output of the extension cord. The rated output of the units plugged into the socket should inaggregate not exceed 10 amperes.

14. If the power cord or the mains plug is damaged, let a qualified technician replace it immediately.

15. Only use power cords which are marked as safety-proof.

16. Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel. Servicing is required when the apparatus has been damagedin any way, such as power-supply cord or plug is damaged, liquid has been spilled or objects have fallen into theapparatus, the apparatus has been exposed to rain or moisture, does not operate normally, or has been dropped.Besides others, you run the risk of suffering an electric shock.

17. All service work should be exclusively performed by qualified service technicians.

18. Do not use any high-power walkie-talkies or cellular phones near the unit.

19. If one of the following conditions occurs, please pull the mains plug and call the customerplease pull the mains plug and call the customerplease pull the mains plug and call the customerplease pull the mains plug and call the customerplease pull the mains plug and call the customerservice!service!service!service!service!� Power cord or mains plug is damaged or worn.� Liquid penetrated into the unit.� The unit was exposed to rain or high ambient humidity.� The unit does not function properly, even when following all the instructions in the manual. Do only manipulate

the controls mentioned in the instructions, as wrong settings on other controls may damage the unit; all toooften, it is very time-consuming to have damaged parts repaired by a service technician.

� The unit fell down and the housing was damaged.

Please note that this console is based on complex software and as you probably know from computerexperience, software crashes can occur on occasion. But be assured, that we will do our best to keep themrare exceptions.

1.6 General Safety Instructions

Electric shock warningElectric shock warningElectric shock warningElectric shock warningElectric shock warning on the backside of the on the backside of the on the backside of the on the backside of the on the backside of the grandMA grandMA grandMA grandMA grandMA

The unit should be serviced by qualified personnel only, as live parts may be exposed when opening and/or removingcoverings; besides others, you run the risk of suffering an electric shock.


1 TFT-DisplayTFT-DisplayTFT-DisplayTFT-DisplayTFT-Display with Touchscreen

2 VieVieVieVieView /w /w /w /w / Macro buttonsMacro buttonsMacro buttonsMacro buttonsMacro buttons

3 EncodersEncodersEncodersEncodersEncoders � To move/scroll the respectivewindow contents

4 EncodersEncodersEncodersEncodersEncoders � To set the attribute values such asGobo, Pan/Tilt, times etc.

5 Manual Time SettingManual Time SettingManual Time SettingManual Time SettingManual Time Setting for Presets

6 Yellow KnobYellow KnobYellow KnobYellow KnobYellow Knob - To adjust the TouchscreenPanel

7 Playback buttons Playback buttons Playback buttons Playback buttons Playback buttons � Can be defined e.g. asGo+, Go�, Pause, Flash etc.

8 Executor fadersExecutor fadersExecutor fadersExecutor fadersExecutor faders � Can be defined e.g. asMaster, Swap Master, X-Fader etc.

9 Go+, Go�, Pause buttons Go+, Go�, Pause buttons Go+, Go�, Pause buttons Go+, Go�, Pause buttons Go+, Go�, Pause buttons � Only effectivefor the default sequences. Default sequences canbe assigned to the buttons using the SelectSelectSelectSelectSelectbuttonbuttonbuttonbuttonbutton (recognisable by the green title bar ofthe small EXECUTOR window above it).

10 Select buttonSelect buttonSelect buttonSelect buttonSelect button

11 Buttons Buttons Buttons Buttons Buttons � To directly process Go+, Go� etc. forany Executor, or to lock Executors

12 Page change-overPage change-overPage change-overPage change-overPage change-over � For Channel faders,Executor faders and Executor buttons

13 Executor buttons Executor buttons Executor buttons Executor buttons Executor buttons (see also à à à à à Executor-Executor-Executor-Executor-Executor-Fader Fader Fader Fader Fader (8))

15 Select � Select � Select � Select � Select � Cues, Groups, Executors etc. incombination with numeric keypad

14 Manual TimingManual TimingManual TimingManual TimingManual Timing � Setting for Executor-Buttons

16 Blind, Freeze, Clear buttonsBlind, Freeze, Clear buttonsBlind, Freeze, Clear buttonsBlind, Freeze, Clear buttonsBlind, Freeze, Clear buttons17 Blackout button Blackout button Blackout button Blackout button Blackout button for dimmer channels

18 Grand MasterGrand MasterGrand MasterGrand MasterGrand Master for Dimmers channels

19 Numeric keypadNumeric keypadNumeric keypadNumeric keypadNumeric keypad20 Intensity wheelIntensity wheelIntensity wheelIntensity wheelIntensity wheel

21 Cursor buttons Cursor buttons Cursor buttons Cursor buttons Cursor buttons NEXT, PREV. ChoosingFixtures or Channels one by one within Groups.

22 TrackballTrackballTrackballTrackballTrackball for Pan / Tilt

1.7 Layout and Controls

1.7 Layout and Controls1.7 Layout and Controls1.7 Layout and Controls1.7 Layout and Controls1.7 Layout and Controls

1.7.11.7.11.7.11.7.11.7.1 Layout and Controls Layout and Controls Layout and Controls Layout and Controls Layout and Controls grandMAgrandMAgrandMAgrandMAgrandMA

9999977777

77777

33333

222221111111111 22222

33333

88888

77777

77777

88888



2222222222

2121212121

1111188888

16161616161111177777

20202020201111199999

55555

66666

1111100000

22222

1111111111

1111122222

1111144444 1111155555

44444

11111

1313131313

16161616161111166666

33333


1

2

3

45

6

7

8

9

1026

11

12

13 14

14

15

16

17 18 21

2422

25

2320

19

1.7.21.7.21.7.21.7.21.7.2 Layout and Controls Layout and Controls Layout and Controls Layout and Controls Layout and Controls grandMA lightgrandMA lightgrandMA lightgrandMA lightgrandMA light


1 . 7 . 41 . 7 . 41 . 7 . 41 . 7 . 41 . 7 . 4Layout and Controls Layout and Controls Layout and Controls Layout and Controls Layout and Controls grandMA grandMA grandMA grandMA grandMA replay unitreplay unitreplay unitreplay unitreplay unitààààà Chapter Chapter Chapter Chapter Chapter 1313131313

1 . 7 . 31 . 7 . 31 . 7 . 31 . 7 . 31 . 7 . 3Layout and Controls Layout and Controls Layout and Controls Layout and Controls Layout and Controls grandMAgrandMAgrandMAgrandMAgrandMA ultra-light ultra-light ultra-light ultra-light ultra-light (similar to grandMA light picture)Items 77777 and 1717171717 do not apply (buttons inexistent).Item 22 (Wheel) does not apply, can be controlled by Trackball (item 25) and Wheel button (item 24).


1 . 7 . 51 . 7 . 51 . 7 . 51 . 7 . 51 . 7 . 5grandMA grandMA grandMA grandMA grandMA light and ultra-lightlight and ultra-lightlight and ultra-lightlight and ultra-lightlight and ultra-light::::: Differences to the Differences to the Differences to the Differences to the Differences to the grandMAgrandMAgrandMAgrandMAgrandMAThe software for the grandMA light and ultra-light and the grandMA is nearly identical.

The product will not be delivered with a hardware keyboard and an external mouse. An additional external keyboardand a mouse, however, can be connected on the rear of the unit.Using the KEYBOARD button on the TFT display, a Soft Keyboard can be brought up that can be operated via thetouch screen. The Soft Keyboard will only appear, if entries are possible.

If the trackball is switched to mouse function (LED in the PAN / TILT button is off), you can perform mouse functionsusing the trackball or the LEFT-MIDDLE-RIGHT buttons.

1 Power switchPower switchPower switchPower switchPower switch2 Blackout button Blackout button Blackout button Blackout button Blackout button for Dimmer channels

3 Grand MasterGrand MasterGrand MasterGrand MasterGrand Master for Dimmer channels

4 TFT DisplayTFT DisplayTFT DisplayTFT DisplayTFT Display with touch screen

5 VieVieVieVieView /w /w /w /w / Macro buttonsMacro buttonsMacro buttonsMacro buttonsMacro buttons

6 EncoderEncoderEncoderEncoderEncoder for moving / scrolling the respectivewindow contents

7 Viewpool buttonViewpool buttonViewpool buttonViewpool buttonViewpool button for opening a selection withall created VIEWS on the display. These can be calledup directly by selecting the respective ones.

8 Background button Background button Background button Background button Background button - If on the TFT display,Views are being overlayed by a menu (ASSIGN, EDIT,�.), you can use this button to bring up or hide themenu.

9 Keyboard button Keyboard button Keyboard button Keyboard button Keyboard button to bring up the Soft Keyboardon the TFT display.

10 Manual setting of times Manual setting of times Manual setting of times Manual setting of times Manual setting of times for Presets

11 EncoderEncoderEncoderEncoderEncoder for setting the attribute values (e.g. Gobo,Pan/Tilt, times, etc.)

12 ButtonsButtonsButtonsButtonsButtons to directly execute functions like Go+,Go-, etc. for arbitrary executors, locking executors,SELECT button

13 PPPPPage flippingage flippingage flippingage flippingage flipping for Channel fader, Executor faderand Executor buttons

14 Playback buttonsPlayback buttonsPlayback buttonsPlayback buttonsPlayback buttons can also be defined as e.g.Go, Go-, Pause, Flash, etc..

15 Executor fadersExecutor fadersExecutor fadersExecutor fadersExecutor faders can also be defined e.g. asMaster, Swap Master, X-Fader, etc..

16 List buttonsList buttonsList buttonsList buttonsList buttonsFaders:Faders:Faders:Faders:Faders: will bring up small Executor windows

for the EXECUTOR FADERS.Buttons:Buttons:Buttons:Buttons:Buttons: will bring up small Executor windows

for the EXECUTOR BUTTONS.

17 Go+, Go�, Pause button Go+, Go�, Pause button Go+, Go�, Pause button Go+, Go�, Pause button Go+, Go�, Pause button � Will only take effectfor the default sequences. A default sequence canbe assigned to buttons by using the Select buttonSelect buttonSelect buttonSelect buttonSelect button(indicated by the green title bar in the smallEXECUTOR window displayed above.).

18 Executor buttonsExecutor buttonsExecutor buttonsExecutor buttonsExecutor buttons can also be defined as e.g.Go, Go-, Pause, Flash, etc..

19 Manual setting of times Manual setting of times Manual setting of times Manual setting of times Manual setting of times for Executor buttons

20 Choosing Choosing Choosing Choosing Choosing Groups, Executors, etc. in combinationusing the numeric keypad

21 Numeric keypadNumeric keypadNumeric keypadNumeric keypadNumeric keypad

22 Intensity wheelIntensity wheelIntensity wheelIntensity wheelIntensity wheel

23 Cursor buttonsCursor buttonsCursor buttonsCursor buttonsCursor buttons NEXT, PREV. Groupwise Callingup of scanner or dimmer channels one after theother.

24 PAN / TILT button, PAN / TILT button, PAN / TILT button, PAN / TILT button, PAN / TILT button, switching over of thetrackball function for mouse function (LED off) orPan / Tilt function (LED on)

Left / Middle / Right button Left / Middle / Right button Left / Middle / Right button Left / Middle / Right button Left / Middle / Right button for Mousefunction

25 TrackballTrackballTrackballTrackballTrackball for Mouse or Pan / Tilt function

26 Socket for console lamp Socket for console lamp Socket for console lamp Socket for console lamp Socket for console lamp 12V/5W



1.7.61.7.61.7.61.7.61.7.6 General Operation General Operation General Operation General Operation General Operation

Touch screenTouch screenTouch screenTouch screenTouch screen� Buttons can directly be selected.� In charts, individual cells can be selected. By using the Lasso function on the touch screen, you can also

select several cells.� You can simultaneously select individual, but also several Fixtures or Channels by dragging the mouse on

the touch screen.� Directly activating title bars of windows or options for the individual window.

Encoder on the right of the DisplayEncoder on the right of the DisplayEncoder on the right of the DisplayEncoder on the right of the DisplayEncoder on the right of the Display� In the active window, the focus (blue frame) or a highlighted cell (red background) can be moved upwards

or downwards. If pressing the Encoder when turning it, you can move the focus to the left or to the rightside.

� If a pulldown menu is opened, you can use the Encoder to scroll through the list. When you reach thedesired value, you can select it by shortly pressing the Encoder.

� If in a chart, a cell is selected with a value or a time, you can open an entry window by shortly pressing theEncoder. In this window, you can also use the Encoder to adjust the value, pressing the Encoder again willaccept the new value.

� If a Fixture or a Channel is selected (blue frame), you can open the options by shortly pressing the Encoder.

Encoder below the TFT DisplayEncoder below the TFT DisplayEncoder below the TFT DisplayEncoder below the TFT DisplayEncoder below the TFT Display� To set the selected function (PAN/TILT, DIMMER, GOBO, etc.). If pressing the Encoder while turning it, you

can change the Encoder�s sensitivity.

� If more than one function is displayed above the encoder, you can switch between the various functionsby short push on the encoder.

grandMA grandMA grandMA grandMA grandMA Hardware keyboard or Hardware keyboard or Hardware keyboard or Hardware keyboard or Hardware keyboard or grandMA grandMA grandMA grandMA grandMA light and ultra-light light and ultra-light light and ultra-light light and ultra-light light and ultra-light SoftSoftSoftSoftSoft(TOUCH) Keyboard(TOUCH) Keyboard(TOUCH) Keyboard(TOUCH) Keyboard(TOUCH) Keyboard

� Views, Groups, Presets, Sequences, Effect groups, Forms or even Macros can directly be named within therespective pool.

� Cue names can be adjusted in the EDIT menu, in the Tracking or EXECUTOR Sheet.

If the �Scroll Lock� function is activated, commands can only be entered directly into theIf the �Scroll Lock� function is activated, commands can only be entered directly into theIf the �Scroll Lock� function is activated, commands can only be entered directly into theIf the �Scroll Lock� function is activated, commands can only be entered directly into theIf the �Scroll Lock� function is activated, commands can only be entered directly into theCommandline (Scroll Lock LED on keyboard is lit). By pushing this button brieflyCommandline (Scroll Lock LED on keyboard is lit). By pushing this button brieflyCommandline (Scroll Lock LED on keyboard is lit). By pushing this button brieflyCommandline (Scroll Lock LED on keyboard is lit). By pushing this button brieflyCommandline (Scroll Lock LED on keyboard is lit). By pushing this button briefly, you can, you can, you can, you can, you canswitch this function either ON or OFFswitch this function either ON or OFFswitch this function either ON or OFFswitch this function either ON or OFFswitch this function either ON or OFF.....

grandMAgrandMAgrandMAgrandMAgrandMA Mouse or Mouse or Mouse or Mouse or Mouse or grandMA grandMA grandMA grandMA grandMA light and ultra-light-light and ultra-light-light and ultra-light-light and ultra-light-light and ultra-light-TrackballTrackballTrackballTrackballTrackballThe most effective way of working with the grandMA is to use the touchscreen and the encoders which arelocated next to the respective displays. The only means to change the size of windows, work within theTracking Sheet or edit forms (6.7.26.7.26.7.26.7.26.7.2 Modifying Forms), though, is the mouse.

With the left button:With the left button:With the left button:With the left button:With the left button:� Buttons can directly be selected,� Individual cells in charts can be selected,� Several cells in charts can be selected simultaneously by clicking, holding and dragging them,� Fixtures or Channels can be selected,� Title bars of windows can be activated or options for the individual window can directly be called up.

With the middle button:With the middle button:With the middle button:With the middle button:With the middle button:� The values of selected Fixtures or Channels can be adjusted.

With the right button:With the right button:With the right button:With the right button:With the right button:� The options for this window can be opened by clicking on the title bar,� The options can be opened by clicking on an individual Fixture or Channel.

OOPS FunctionOOPS FunctionOOPS FunctionOOPS FunctionOOPS Function

By pressing the OOPS button, you can cancel (go back) up to 10 steps.

Holding the OOPS button opens a window showing the 10 last entries on the right TFT-display. Pressing theUNDO button will cancel the first entry on top of the list. ààààà 2.13.12.13.12.13.12.13.12.13.1 Optionen der OOPS-Funktion



Entry window/CalculatorEntry window/CalculatorEntry window/CalculatorEntry window/CalculatorEntry window/CalculatorIn this window, you can enter values or times and recalculate them.Presets can be called up for the selected Fixtures or Channels.

If in the Executor Sheet or in the EDIT menu, a trigger call or time is selected, you can open this window by pressingthe Encoder on the right side of the Display.

If Fixtures or Channels are selected, this window can be opened by pressing the respective buttons for this functionabove the Encoder.

The title bar of this window will display the selected function.

In the upper cell, the current value will be displayed.

Using the touch screen, the number pad or turning the encoderon the right of the display you can enter a different value ortime, and accept it by pressing the OK button.

Left of the numbers, the following buttons are displayed: H (forhours), M (for minutes), S (for seconds) and F (for frames).With these buttons, you can directly enter times, if necessary.

o r :o r :o r :o r :o r :

If a function is selected, buttons for Clear, Deactivate and theindividual presets are displayed in the lower part. If you pressCLEAR, the values of the selected Fixtures or Channels will bedeleted. If you press DEACTIVATE, the active values of the selectedFixtures or Channels will be deleted.

If you select a Preset, it will be displayed in the upper bar, andyou can select it pressing the OK button.Entries can be deleted using the OOPS-button.

SOFT (TOUCH) KeyboardSOFT (TOUCH) KeyboardSOFT (TOUCH) KeyboardSOFT (TOUCH) KeyboardSOFT (TOUCH) KeyboardOn the grandMA light and ultra-light, you can call it up by pressing the KEYBOARD button.

In the upper right cell, the entered text willbe displayed.

Using the touch screen, you can selectindividual buttons.

Pressing RETURN will accept your entry.



1 .81 .81 .81 .81 .8 Quick ReferenceQuick ReferenceQuick ReferenceQuick ReferenceQuick ReferenceAfter some years of experience we have lost our illusions about any user to be willing to read a complete manualbefore playing with a new toy. But there are some tips which may help you to find your way around.

1.8.11.8.11.8.11.8.11.8.1 BasicsBasicsBasicsBasicsBasicsThe grandMA is a highly specialised computer with up to 6 monitors, and many functions will work as you may beused to from your PC or MAC.

Main supply: Main supply: Main supply: Main supply: Main supply: 90�230V

The mouseThe mouseThe mouseThe mouseThe mouse in its drawer (grandMA only) or track ball on the grandMA light:� Left click selects a field for keyboard or encoder input, etc.� Right click goes to Modify (opens windows with options, sorting columns by clicking on the headline...)� Pressing and holding the middle mouse button changes output values (Hold and Move)

The displaysThe displaysThe displaysThe displaysThe displays (select one by a click into empty space)The grandMA offers different windows: Menus with information and control buttons, spreadsheets, button groups,dimmer channel listings and fader symbols� Left mouse click on the headline moves a window, the size is set on the left and lower boarders� Right mouse click on the headline opens a window with different options

SpreadsheetsSpreadsheetsSpreadsheetsSpreadsheetsSpreadsheets (comparable to those used in Excel or Access):� Holding left mouse button and moving the mouse, you can select a set of cells (not on all screens possible)� Left click on a column headline will resize or move the column� Right click on a column headline will sort by this column

Emergency help:Emergency help:Emergency help:Emergency help:Emergency help: Like any computer, the grandMA may crash. If nothing helps:1. Perform a reset (by pressing CTRL-ALT-DEL or the RESET button on the backside of the unit).Only if this doesn�t help:2. During the booting of the unit, use the red �Utility menu� to delete the current Show. ààààà 12 12 12 12 12 Utility MenuIn case of any further problem, please feel free to contact our HOTLINE +49-5251-688865-99.

1.8.21.8.21.8.21.8.21.8.2 Setup and startSetup and startSetup and startSetup and startSetup and startThe easiest way is to use the BACKUP button and load a demo-show or start-setup. Otherwise:

1. SETUP button: Will select and patch the number of dimmers and scanners, possibly create presets, group andeffect buttons.

T IPT IPT IPT IPT IP By YES in the BTN column of the Fixture Schedule, the grandMA automatically generates a button for each fixturein the group window.

2. Right click into any empty display:� creates, moves and resizes a FADER or CHANNEL window for dimmer control and� FIXTURE, GROUP and different Preset windows (PAN/TILT, GOBO...) for scanners.

1 . 8 . 31 . 8 . 31 . 8 . 31 . 8 . 31 . 8 . 3Direct accessDirect accessDirect accessDirect accessDirect accessThe grandMA offers different ways of controlling dimmer values and scanner attributes. For a quick start, we giveyou only one example for each of them.

Setting values for dimmers:Setting values for dimmers:Setting values for dimmers:Setting values for dimmers:Setting values for dimmers:

CHANNEL FADER �� or �+� button switches the motor fader to control single dimmer channels.� �+� and �� scrolls in blocks of 20 (10) dimmers.� The set fader parameters are shown in the dimmer display.

T IPT IPT IPT IPT IP Channels can also be selected and modified by mouse, wheel, encoder ...

T IPT IPT IPT IPT IP With the LINK function (right on top of display), the window will automatically scroll to show the channels set forthe faders.

Controlling Fixture attributes:Controlling Fixture attributes:Controlling Fixture attributes:Controlling Fixture attributes:Controlling Fixture attributes:

GROUP windowGROUP windowGROUP windowGROUP windowGROUP windowSelect a fixture by its button (or click on the name of a fixture in the output window).

GOBO, COLOUR ... windowGOBO, COLOUR ... windowGOBO, COLOUR ... windowGOBO, COLOUR ... windowGOBO, COLOUR ... windowOpen a preset for the selected unit (if no presets are displayed, run the selected function via an encoder).

T I P 1T I P 1T I P 1T I P 1T I P 1 Pressing and turning the encoder allows for the fine tuning.

TIP2TIP2TIP2TIP2TIP2 If more than one function per encoder is displayed, push the encoder to switch over.

1.8 Quick Reference


1.8.41.8.41.8.41.8.41.8.4 Saving SettingsSaving SettingsSaving SettingsSaving SettingsSaving SettingsThe STORE button of the grandMA is very flexible and direct.

T IPT IPT IPT IPT IP Attention: If the STORE button is flashing, switch off with a second press or use ESCAPE.

Example:Example:Example:Example:Example: Selecting some fixtures and setting the color wheel

� STORE + button of an EXECUTOR (make sure you switched back from CHANNEL to EXECUTOR): Saves the colorsetting as a cue for the selected Executor.

� STORE + button of an EXECUTOR, where a cue was already saved, offers the option to overwrite, add informationor create a list. à à à à à 1.8.71.8.71.8.71.8.71.8.7 CREATE LIST

� STORE + a cell in the GROUP window: Saves the chosen scanners as a new group (enter name via keyboard)

� STORE + any cell in the preset COLOUR window: Saves the adjusted values as a color preset (enter name viakeyboard)

� STORE + one of the VIEW buttons on the right hand side of the displays: Saves the layout of the screen, the mouseposition, etc. as a view (enter a name ...)

T IPT IPT IPT IPT IP With STORE + VIEW button you can save screens individually or all at once.

T IPT IPT IPT IPT IP In the ASSIGN menu, you can enter names for the programs.

1.8.51.8.51.8.51.8.51.8.5 Selecting and activating channels, fixtures and functionsSelecting and activating channels, fixtures and functionsSelecting and activating channels, fixtures and functionsSelecting and activating channels, fixtures and functionsSelecting and activating channels, fixtures and functionsThe concepts of Selecting and Activating have different meanings and are important terms for working with thegrandMA.

Selected fixtures or channels (name in status window turns yellow) are automatically cleared if a setting wasaltered and new fixtures selected (a click on the CLEAR button will do the same).

The Active values(red) determine, which channels are ready to be saved to the next cue, and will be controlled bythis cue later on. Channels not selected will never be affected by any playback of this cue (LTP rule = Latest TakesPrecedence).

Changing the selection:

� Any channel or function, being controlled in Direct Access mode, is automatically marked as selected.� Pressing the CLEAR button several times, deletes the whole selection.

1st CLEAR: selects � 2nd CLEAR: activates� 3rd CLEAR: deletes all values set by direct access.� Selecting a channel, fixture or function two or more times can be used to modify an activation

1st selects � 2nd activates� 3rd deactivatesT IPT IPT IPT IPT IP By holding the STORE button and selecting ALL, the activation will be ignored and the complete output saved as a

cue.

1 . 8 . 61 . 8 . 61 . 8 . 61 . 8 . 61 . 8 . 6Timing � Fade times (FADE) and Delays (DELATiming � Fade times (FADE) and Delays (DELATiming � Fade times (FADE) and Delays (DELATiming � Fade times (FADE) and Delays (DELATiming � Fade times (FADE) and Delays (DELAY)Y)Y)Y)Y)The grandMA offers two different ways of storing time settings for a cue:

1. BASIC X-FADE and SNAP DELAYWith STORE, a basic fade time can be set for all typical fader channels, whereas SNAP DELAY will only work forchannels marked as snap channels in the Patch menu.

2. TIME button for individual durations per channelWith TIME, the status windows can be switched to the FADE or DELAY layer, where individual durations can be setfor each channel. These durations will be stored to the cues and will overrule any basic duration.

1.8.71.8.71.8.71.8.71.8.7 CREATE LISTCREATE LISTCREATE LISTCREATE LISTCREATE LISTWhen saving a cue to an Executor already containing a cue, the grandMA offers the option to start a cue list, whichmay be called up as a Chaser or sequence later on.

In the ASSIGN menu, you can preset the Cue list as for tracking or non-tracking, respectively.

TRACKING CUELISTTRACKING CUELISTTRACKING CUELISTTRACKING CUELISTTRACKING CUELIST (typically for scanner control or theatre applications):For this, it would make sense only to include changed values. On playback, the grandMA will hold a value until anew one is given by any following step (TRACKING = the grandMA will keep track of this value within the next steps).

NON-TRACKING CUELISTNON-TRACKING CUELISTNON-TRACKING CUELISTNON-TRACKING CUELISTNON-TRACKING CUELISTHere, all values to be used have to be saved to the respective step, as all values not selectively stored within a step,will be switched off (�0� or default).

2.1 Selecting, patching, creating and editing of fixtures and dimmers (Edit Show)


1.8 Quick Reference

1.8.81.8.81.8.81.8.81.8.8 Playback buttons and fadersPlayback buttons and fadersPlayback buttons and fadersPlayback buttons and fadersPlayback buttons and faders� The motor faders allow to work on different pages simultaneously. With OFF, the playback can be stopped.� With the ASSIGN + EXECUTOR buttons, you can define, which program and which functions are on the Playback.� The 12 function keys can be used for any Playback (OFF - EXECUTOR1).

T IPT IPT IPT IPT IP To call up a cue with a fader, it has to be activated via GO+, TOP or ON.

T IPT IPT IPT IPT IP Take care for the GRANDMASTER - or simply switch it off in the Setup menu.


11111

22222

33333

22222 SetupSetupSetupSetupSetup

2 .12 .12 .12 .12 .1 Selecting, patching, creating and editing of fixtures andSelecting, patching, creating and editing of fixtures andSelecting, patching, creating and editing of fixtures andSelecting, patching, creating and editing of fixtures andSelecting, patching, creating and editing of fixtures anddimmers (Edit Show)dimmers (Edit Show)dimmers (Edit Show)dimmers (Edit Show)dimmers (Edit Show)

You will reach the SETUP menu by pressing the SETUP button.

11111 FIXTURE SCHEDULEFIXTURE SCHEDULEFIXTURE SCHEDULEFIXTURE SCHEDULEFIXTURE SCHEDULEIn this menu, you can create, modify and set the number of fixture types and normal dimmer channels. ààààà2.2 /2.2 /2.2 /2.2 /2.2 /2.3 2.3 2.3 2.3 2.3 Setting up Fixtures and Dimmer Channels

Accessing this menu will take a few seconds, as all Fixtures (approx. 250) will be loaded from the hard disk.

22222 DMX PATCHDMX PATCHDMX PATCHDMX PATCHDMX PATCHIn this menu, you can choose DMX addresses for all fixtures and Dimmer channels and make lamp-type specificadjustments for the respectiverespectiverespectiverespectiverespective show. ààààà 2.4 / 2.52.4 / 2.52.4 / 2.52.4 / 2.52.4 / 2.5 Setting DMX addresses

33333 CREATE PRESETSCREATE PRESETSCREATE PRESETSCREATE PRESETSCREATE PRESETSIn this menu, you can have so-called presets automatically created for all registered fixtures and dimmers, if thosepresets are already contained in the internal library. Furthermore, prepared Effect Groups and buttons for eachFixture or Dimmer channel can be created from the GROUP window. ààààà 2.9 2.9 2.9 2.9 2.9 Creating presets, effects and groupsautomatically

2.1 Selecting, patching, creating and editing of fixtures and dimmers (Edit Show)


22222

77777

88888

99999

1010101010

1111111111

1111133333

1111144444

1111122222

4444455555

66666

11111 33333

2 .22 .22 .22 .22 .2 Selecting Type and Number of FixturesSelecting Type and Number of FixturesSelecting Type and Number of FixturesSelecting Type and Number of FixturesSelecting Type and Number of Fixtures

Click on FIXTURE SCHEDULE in the Setup menu (might take a few seconds).

1 Make a right mouse click in the cell below the QTY title.2 In the NUMBER window, enter the quantity of Fixtures of one type, using the keyboard. Confirm by pressing ENTER.

Or:Or:Or:Or:Or:Move the red bar using the left mouse button, until the desired number of Fixtures appears. Now, make a left mouseclick on the number; the selected number will be accepted.

3 Make a right mouse click on NEW ENTRY. Move the blue bar within the SELECT A FIXTURE window by holding the leftmouse button until the desired Fixture appears in the left column. Select the Fixture with left mouse click. Theselected Fixture will be added to the list.

T IPT IPT IPT IPT IP The list can be sorted by name, manufacturer or date for an easy and fast retrieval of fixtures.For example: Sort by names: Right mouse click on NAME. With first mouse click, Fixture will be sorted A�Z, withsecond click they will be sorted Z�A.For further Fixtures, start again with step 11111 and use NEW ENTRY, one line below the new Fixture.

2.2 Selecting Type and Numbers of Fixtures


RECOMMENDATIONRECOMMENDATIONRECOMMENDATIONRECOMMENDATIONRECOMMENDATION

After changes in the FIXTURES SCHEDULE Menu � especially the deleting of Fixtures from the Show - a RESET of thegrandMA should be executed, for safety reasons, after leaving this menu (point 14) (Control-Alternate-Delete).This will set up and sort the internal structure again.

4 If the MANUFACTURER LIBRARY button (dark background) is pressed, all Fixtures stored in the library are available.

5 If the USER LIBRARY button (dark background) is pressed, all self-created Fixtures stored in the library are available.

6 If the ACTUAL SHOW button (dark background) is pressed, only Fixtures to be used in this show are available.

7 Will add a new line above the marked position.

8 Will erase the marked line.

9 Accessing the EDIT FIXTURES menu.In this menu, the selected Fixture can be changed. If NEW ENTRY is activated, a new Fixture can be defined.ààààà 2.12.12.12.12.11 1 1 1 1 EDITING FIXTURES (modify) and 2.12 2.12 2.12 2.12 2.12 EDITING FIXTURES (create new)

If in the �Start� column the number of a Fixture is followed by an asterix, this is a Fixture that was modifiedor selfmade.

10 Shifting between the Fixture library on the hard disk or floppy disk. ààààà 2.12.12.12.12.11 1 1 1 1 EDITING FIXTURES (modify)

After switching to Floppy disk, it may take a few seconds for the Floppy to react.HARDDISK LIBRARY: Uses Fixtures from internal hard disk.FLOPPY DISK: Uses Fixtures from floppy disk.

11 Calling up the MANAGE menu.By clicking on the Fixtures/Dimmers in this menu and selecting and pressing the DELETE ENTRY button, you candelete the self-created Fixtures and Dimmers stored in the library. Fixtures in the manufacturer library can not bedeleted.

12 With UPDATE LIBRARY, you can save newly created or modified Fixtures to the hard disk drive (library) or to a floppydisk. By that, a new or modified Fixture will be available for a new show. When Fixtures are modified and stored, theyare registered with the appropriate date.

To store a Fixture, please change its name as otherwise this Fixture will appear twice in the library and canonly be discerned by its date.

13 All settings will be stored with the SAVE button.

14 To leave this menu, bringing you back to SETUP.

The next step will be the patching of fixtures. ààààà 2.4 2.4 2.4 2.4 2.4 Selecting DMX addresses for Fixtures

2.2 Selecting Type and Numbers of Fixtures

If you exchange existing fixtures (same ID-number), all presets and cues of previous fixtures will not bedeleted and can still be used for newly assigned fixtures. The names and DMX values for presets will be takenover. If necessary, you might have to check and correct the presets.


1010101010

1111111111

44444

55555

66666

77777

88888

99999

11111 33333

aaaaabbbbb

ccccc

22222

2.3 Selecting the Number of Dimmer Channels

2 .32 .32 .32 .32 .3 Selecting the Number of Dimmer ChannelsSelecting the Number of Dimmer ChannelsSelecting the Number of Dimmer ChannelsSelecting the Number of Dimmer ChannelsSelecting the Number of Dimmer Channels

1 Activate by right mouse click on the cell below QTY. The NUMBER window will open.

2 Using the keyboard, enter the number of dimmer channels into the NUMBER window. Confirm by pressing ENTER.

Or:Or:Or:Or:Or:

Move the red bar by holding the left mouse button until the desired number of dimmer channels appears on the left.Activate number with left mouse click.The selected number will be stored.

3 Right mouse click on NEW ENTRY. The SELECT A FIXTURE window will open. The sheet shows all DIMMER typescreated. With a left mouse click on a Dimmer type, it will be selected.

a If the MANUFACTURER LIBRARY button (dark background) is pressed, all Dimmer types stored in the manufacturerlibrary are available.

b If the USER LIBRARY button (dark background) is pressed, all self-created Dimmer types stored in the library areavailable.

c If the ACTUAL SHOW button (dark background) is pressed, only Dimmer types to be used in this show are available.


2.3 Selecting the Number of Dimmer Channels

4 To add a new line in front of the marked position.

5 To erase the marked line.

6 Calling up the EDIT FIXTURE menu.In this menu, the selected Dimmer can be modified. If NEW ENTRY is selected, you can create a new Dimmer.ààààà 2.12.12.12.12.11 1 1 1 1 Modifying Fixtures and Dimmers (EDIT FIXTURE) and ààààà 2.12 2.12 2.12 2.12 2.12 Creating Fixtures and Dimmers (EDITFIXTURE)

If in the �Start� column, the number of a Fixture is followed by an asterix, this is a fixture that was modifiedor self-created.

7 Switching between library on the hard disk to library on the floppy disk, or vice versa.

After switching to the floppy disk, it can take some seconds until the floppy reacts.HARDDISK LIBRARY: Uses Fixtures/Dimmers from the internal hard disk.FLOPPY DISK: Uses Fixtures/Dimmers from the floppy (if any).

8 Calling up the MANAGE menu.By clicking on the Fixtures/Dimmers in this menu and selecting and pressing the DELETE ENTRY button, you candelete the self-created Fixtures and Dimmers stored in the library. Fixtures in the manufacturer library can not bedeleted.

9 With UPDATE LIBRARY, you can save newly created or modified Fixtures/Dimmers to the hard disk drive (library) orto a floppy disk. By that, a new or modified Fixture/Dimmer will be available for a new show. When Fixtures/Dimmersare modified and stored, they are registered with a new date.

To store a Dimmer, please change its name as otherwise this Dimmer will appear twice in the library and canonly be discerned by its date.

10 To save all settings with SAVE button.

11 To leave the FIXTURE SCHEDULE menu.

Proceed by �patching� the dimmer channels. ààààà 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 Setting DMX Addresses for Dimmers

RECOMMENDATIONRECOMMENDATIONRECOMMENDATIONRECOMMENDATIONRECOMMENDATION

After changes in the FIXTURES SCHEDULE Menu � especially the deleting of Dimmers from the Show, a RESET of thegrandMA should be executed after leaving this menu (item 8) (Control-Alt-Delete).


10101010101111111111

1111133333

1111144444

1111122222

44444 55555 66666 77777 11111 8888899999

22222

22222

333331111155555

2 .42 .42 .42 .42 .4 Selecting DMX Addresses for FixturesSelecting DMX Addresses for FixturesSelecting DMX Addresses for FixturesSelecting DMX Addresses for FixturesSelecting DMX Addresses for FixturesActivate PATCH in the Setup menu.

1 Select the respective fixture in the DMX 1 column by a right mouse click. The PATCH FIXTURES window will appear.

T IPT IPT IPT IPT IP If several fixtures are addressed one by one, these can be selected in one by clicking and holding the left mousebutton (draw loop) in the DMX 1 column. Once the fixtures have been selected (red background), a right mouseclick in the marked column will open the window PATCH FIXTURES.

2 Set the DMX output A to H via keyboard. Enter the DMX channel via the keyboard and confirm with ENTER.

Or:Or:Or:Or:Or:

Set the DMX output A to H by a left mouse click. Move the red bar by holding the left mouse button until the desiredaddress appears on the left. Activate by a left mouse click and data will be stored. Repeat these three steps for eachfixture.

Assigning the DMX sockets ààààà 2.7 2.7 2.7 2.7 2.7 DMX output configuration

Output E to H is only possible with an optional channel expansion to 4096 channels. For the expansion, anupgrade is necessary. As of serial number 156, a dongle (hardware protection) has to be installed within thegrandMA; for serial numbers under SN 156, a plug-in card has to be exchanged. For this operation, theFor this operation, theFor this operation, theFor this operation, theFor this operation, theunit has to be opened by a qualified technician. CAUTION: unplug the mains plugunit has to be opened by a qualified technician. CAUTION: unplug the mains plugunit has to be opened by a qualified technician. CAUTION: unplug the mains plugunit has to be opened by a qualified technician. CAUTION: unplug the mains plugunit has to be opened by a qualified technician. CAUTION: unplug the mains plugfirst!first!first!first!first!

3 To erase the DMX address of a selected fixture.

4 Selecting a name with a left mouse click, you can overwrite this name, using the keyboard, and set a new name forthe respective Fixture; confirm the new name with ENTER. This name will be displayed in the FIXTURE SHEETwindow.

5 With a right mouse click you can invert PAN or TILT on the respective fixture. An inverted function will be indicatedby an INV in the cell.

2.4 Selecting DMX Addresses for Fixtures


6 The PAN and TILT functions can be swapped within the SWAP column. To swap PAN or TILT on one of the Fixtures, usethe right mouse button. When PAN and TILT have been swapped, this will be indicated by a YES in the respective cell.

T IPT IPT IPT IPT IP Here you can set the most useful �PAN/TILT-Trackball-Orientation� (why not try immediately?). Select the Fixture,press HIGHLIGHT and �surf� with the trackball. Modifications will only take effect after storing. For this, theHIGHLIGHT button is of great help.)

7 In the NOMASTER column, the operation of the GRANDMASTER FADER for a specific Fixture can be switched off. Bya right mouse click on a cell in the NOMASTER column, the GRANDMASTER FADER for this Fixture can be switchedoff. A YES in the respective cell indicates that the GRANDMASTER FADER is switched off.

8 Within the DMX column, the information on a DMX address is followed by the function of the first DMX channel.This serves a better orientation.

9 With some fixtures, you will have to address a second DMX channel (for example: The dimmer of the VL 5, Scrollerwith dimmer). With these Fixtures, a second DMX channel has to be addressed in this column. ààààà 2.12.12.12.12.11 1 1 1 1 EDITINGFIXTURES (modify) and 2.12 2.12 2.12 2.12 2.12 EDITING FIXTURES (create new)

10 This button will open the DIMMER PATCH menu (patching of dimmer channels).

11 Calling up the DMX LIST menu.In this menu, you can modify Fixture and Channel-specific settings. ààààà 2.82.82.82.82.8 Single Channel-specific Adjustmentsfor the Current Show

12 If this button is on �Enumerate Names�, additional numbers will be generated for those Fixtures whose names arechanged simultaneously. Switching the button by pressing it briefly.

13 By pressing the PRINT button the DMX sheet will be printed (default printer).

14 By pressing the UNDO Button, all changes made since this menu has been called up, will be canceled.

15 To leave the FIXTURE PATCH menu.

2.4 Selecting DMX Addresses for Fixtures


55555 11111

22222

22222

33333 44444

66666

77777

88888

99999

1010101010

2 .52 .52 .52 .52 .5 Setting DMX Addresses for DimmersSetting DMX Addresses for DimmersSetting DMX Addresses for DimmersSetting DMX Addresses for DimmersSetting DMX Addresses for Dimmers

Activate PATCH in the SETUP menu.

The button DIMMER PATCH will lead you to the menu EDIT DIMMER PATCH

1 Select the first dimmer channel with a right mouse click.

T IPT IPT IPT IPT IP If several dimmer channels are addressed one by one, these can be selected in one by pushing and holding the leftmouse button (draw loop) in the DMX ADDRESS column. Once the dimmer channels have been selected (redbackground), a right mouse click in the marked column will open the PATCH DIMMER window.

2 Set the DMX output A to H via keyboard.

Set the DMX channel via keyboard; confirm with ENTER.

Or:Or:Or:Or:Or:

Set the DMX output A to H by a left mouse click. Move the blue bar by holding left mouse button, until the desiredaddress appears on the left. Confirm figure with a left mouse click and the chosen figure will be displayed. Repeatthese steps for each dimmer channel.

Assigning the DMX sockets ààààà 2.7 2.7 2.7 2.7 2.7 DMX output and Ethernet configuration

Outputs E to H are only available with an optional channel expansion to 4096 channels. For the expansion,an upgrade is necessary. As of serial number 156, a dongle (hardware protection) has to be installed withinthe grandMA; for serial numbers under SN 156, a plug-in card has to be exchanged. For this operation,For this operation,For this operation,For this operation,For this operation,the unit has to be opened by a qualified technician. CAUTION: unplug the mains plugthe unit has to be opened by a qualified technician. CAUTION: unplug the mains plugthe unit has to be opened by a qualified technician. CAUTION: unplug the mains plugthe unit has to be opened by a qualified technician. CAUTION: unplug the mains plugthe unit has to be opened by a qualified technician. CAUTION: unplug the mains plugfirst!first!first!first!first!

3 To erase DMX address of selected dimmer channel.

4 When the MULTI PATCH button is pressed (button�s background color changes from light gray to dark gray), you canaddress several DMX output channels for a Fixture channel.

When the TEST OUT button is pressed (dark background), the selected DMX output channel is temporarily set to 100percent. Doing so, you can find a patched channel much faster within the stage setting.

2.5 Setting DMX Addresses for Dimmers


5 In the NOMASTER column, the operation of the GRANDMASTER FADER for a specific Dimmer channel can beswitched off. By a right mouse click on a cell in the NOMASTER column, the GRANDMASTER FADER for this Fixturecan be switched off. A YES in the respective cell indicates that the GRANDMASTER FADER is switched off.

6 To activate DMX LIST menu. Within this menu Fixture- and channel-specific adjustments can be realized. ààààà 2.72.72.72.72.7Single Channel-specific Adjustments for the Current Show

7 If this button is on �Enumerate Names�, additional numbers will be generated for those Dimmers whose names arechanged simultaneously. Switching the button by pressing it briefly.

8 By pressing the PRINT button the DMX sheet will be printed (default printer).


10 To leave the DIMMER PATCH menu.

2.5 Setting DMX Addresses for Dimmers


11111

2222233333

1010101010

44444

55555

66666

7777788888 99999

2.6 DMX-Output Window

2 .62 .62 .62 .62 .6 DMX Output WindowDMX Output WindowDMX Output WindowDMX Output WindowDMX Output WindowCreate a DMX Output Window (DMX) using a TFT Display. à à à à à 3.13.13.13.13.1 Creating windows

In this window, each of the patched channels can be displayed with its triggered values.1 By briefly pressing the respective buttons (A � H) (dark background), all DMX ports� DMX channels will be displayed

in this window (if needed, scroll through the window using the Encoder next to the Display.)

2 Here, the first channel of this column is displayed.

3 If you position the mouse pointer on a cell, the DMX channel (possibly already patched channels with their fixturetypes and functions) will be displayed in the lower part of the window.

PPPPPatching Fixtures or Dimmer channelsatching Fixtures or Dimmer channelsatching Fixtures or Dimmer channelsatching Fixtures or Dimmer channelsatching Fixtures or Dimmer channelsSelect the first channel for Fixture or Dimmer channels using the mouse pointer. By a right mouse click, the PatchFixture and Dimmers window will open.

4 Here, the selected DMX channel will be displayed.

5 By pressing this button, you can chose between Fixtures (the table will only show Fixtures), Dimmers (the table willonly show Dimmer channels) or both together (the table will show all Fixtures and Dimmer channels).

6 By pressing this button (changes from OFF to ON), you can switch on Multipatch for the Dimmer channels.Now, you can address several DMX output channels for a Dimmer channel.

7 Here, you can define whether just 1 Fixture /Dimmer channel or between 2 and 100 will be patched simultaneously.

8 Choosing a Fixture or Dimmer channel will patch it/them and will close the window.

9 The number of Fixtures / Dimmer channels set under 7 will be reset to 1 automatically after each patchingprocedure. Pressing this button briefly will switch the display from YES to NO, and the set number will not be resetafter the next patching procedure.

10 Will close this window.

This window will now display all patched channels. If you position the mouse pointer above a channel, the lower partof the window will display the DMX channel and the respective channel of the pertinent Fixture / Dimmer channel.The channels pertinent to a Fixture have a blue frame (if this frame is yellow, this Fixture / Dimmer channel isalready selected).By clicking, holding and moving the first channel of a Fixture / Dimmer using the left mouse button, you can moveit to another free position. The Fixture / Dimmer channel will be patched directly after been moved and at the sametime, the changes will be saved.


Deleting a PDeleting a PDeleting a PDeleting a PDeleting a PatchatchatchatchatchPerform a right mouse click on the channel of a Fixture or Dimmer channel. This will open the UNPATCHING window,

where you can delete the Patch by choosing YES.

2.6.12.6.12.6.12.6.12.6.1Options of the DMX Output windowOptions of the DMX Output windowOptions of the DMX Output windowOptions of the DMX Output windowOptions of the DMX Output windowOn the touch screen, click on the left corner of the title bar.

By pressing the FONT SIZE button, you can switch the font size used in these windows between LARGE and SMALL.

By pressing the % button (DEC or HEX), you can switch the displayed values from Percent, Decimal to Hexadecimal.

The number below Columns Columns Columns Columns Columns indicates, how many channels are being displayed in a column. By clicking on thenumber, you can enter a new value using the keyboard. Confirm with ENTER. The new number will automatically beaccepted.With the DELETE button, you can delete the DMX Output window.

2.6 DMX-Output Window


3333322222 11111

44444

2 .72 .72 .72 .72 .7 DMX Output and Ethernet ConfigurationDMX Output and Ethernet ConfigurationDMX Output and Ethernet ConfigurationDMX Output and Ethernet ConfigurationDMX Output and Ethernet ConfigurationThere are 4 DMX output sockets on the back side of the grandMA. These sockets can be assigned to DMX ports A toH in an arbitrary way.By data transmission via Ethernet, more DMX outputs can be triggered.

Outputs E to H are only available with a channel expansion to 4096 channels. For the expansion, an upgradeis necessary. As of serial number 156, a dongle (hardware protection) has to be installed within the grandMA;for serial numbers under SN 156, a plug-in card has to be exchanged. For this operation, the unitFor this operation, the unitFor this operation, the unitFor this operation, the unitFor this operation, the unithas to be opened by a qualified technician. CAUTION: unplug the mains plug first!has to be opened by a qualified technician. CAUTION: unplug the mains plug first!has to be opened by a qualified technician. CAUTION: unplug the mains plug first!has to be opened by a qualified technician. CAUTION: unplug the mains plug first!has to be opened by a qualified technician. CAUTION: unplug the mains plug first!

Press the TOOLS button once.

2.6.12.6.12.6.12.6.12.6.1 Assigning the DMX-XLR sockets of the Assigning the DMX-XLR sockets of the Assigning the DMX-XLR sockets of the Assigning the DMX-XLR sockets of the Assigning the DMX-XLR sockets of the grandMAgrandMAgrandMAgrandMAgrandMA1 In this column, the DMX ports can be assigned to the respective output sockets on the grandMA.

By pressing the buttons several times, one of the DMX ports (Universe) A to H can be assigned to any of thegrandMA�s output sockets A to D. The assigning of DMX ports (Universe) to the sockets will be effected simulta-neously.

2.6.22.6.22.6.22.6.22.6.2 Configuring the DMX outputs via EthernetConfiguring the DMX outputs via EthernetConfiguring the DMX outputs via EthernetConfiguring the DMX outputs via EthernetConfiguring the DMX outputs via Ethernet2 By pressing a button in the PROTOCOL column, a transmission protocol can be designated for the respective DMX

output. In version 2.10, ARTNET of the company Artistic Licence can be assigned.

3 By pressing a button in the CONFIGURATION column, the ARTNET DMX ETHERNET CONFIGURATION menu will beopened for this DMX output. ààààà 2.7.3 2.7.3 2.7.3 2.7.3 2.7.3 ARTNET DMX-ETHERNET CONFIGURATION

4 In the position �enabled� DMX-Output via Ethernet is possible. By pressing the button it switches to �disabeld�; nowDMX-Output via Ethernet is no longer possible.

2.7 DMX Output and Ethernet Configuration

Call up this menu from the TOOLS menu using the DMX-OUTPUT CONFIGURATIONbutton.


55555 66666

2.7.32.7.32.7.32.7.32.7.3 ARTNET DMX-ETHERNET-CONFIGURATIONARTNET DMX-ETHERNET-CONFIGURATIONARTNET DMX-ETHERNET-CONFIGURATIONARTNET DMX-ETHERNET-CONFIGURATIONARTNET DMX-ETHERNET-CONFIGURATION

From software version 2.10 and later DMX hubs of the company Artistic Licence can be used. It is nowpossible, to connect up to 16 DMX hubs. On the DMX hubs, unique SUB NET addresses have to be designatedaccordingly. The address switches of the individual DMX sockets have to be set to four different addresses.

If DMX hubs are connected, they will be searched for and displayed in the chart when calling up this menu. Ifthe hub is being activated after opening the menu, you can search for the hub by pressing the Scan ofScan ofScan ofScan ofScan ofArtNet NodesArtNet NodesArtNet NodesArtNet NodesArtNet Nodes button to insert the hub in the chart, if one is found.

5 In the left chart, all hubs found will be displayed with the respectively set address for each DMX OUTPUT. Thenumber in front of the colon is the SUBNET address, the number following is the address for the DMX OUTPUT.

Choose an address for the DMX OUTPUT.

6 In the right chart, one line is displayed for each hub. The selected DMX OUTPUT will be displayed on a greenbackground.

If an output is displayed on a red background, this indicates that it is already being assigned and can not be used.

In the SHORT NAME column, you can enter a name for each hub using the keyboard.Press the SAVE button. Now, the hub for this DMX port is configured and the menu will be closed.

If further ports are to be assigned, repeat steps 2 to 6. When all settings are completed, press the SAVE button in theDMX-OUTPUT CONFIGURATION menu. The modified settings are now saved. Now, the blue ACTIVE LED at theassigned DMX hub is on and the DMX outputs can be used. When data is received, the red LED on the DMX hub is on.

2.7 DMX Output and Ethernet Configuration


1111111111

1111122222

1313131313

1111144444

999998888877777 11111000004444411111 22222 5555533333 66666

This menu will only display the actually patched channels. All changes made hereherehereherehere will onlyonlyonlyonlyonly affect thecurrent showcurrent showcurrent showcurrent showcurrent show!

1 This column will show the individualindividualindividualindividualindividual, addressed DMX channel.

2 Name of fixtures and dimmer channels assigned to the individual DMX channels.

3 Number of fixtures and dimmer channels.

4 Functions of the individual DMX channels.

5 In this column, a profile can be assigned to this cannel. ààààà 2.92.92.92.92.9 Creating, Assigning and Deleting Profiles

Using these profiles, you can also define min and max values.

6 Within this column, the respective DMX channel can be inverted. A right mouse click into the cell will activate thisfunction. An inverted channel will be indicated by a YES in the respective cell.

7 DEFAULT: This value will be called up if no CUE, Sequence, Preset or Direct Access addresses the fixture or dimmerchannel.

This setting can be used for example for PAN/TILT, in order to have the preset of the light beam in the center. Thesevalues can be set by selecting the respective cell with a right mouse click. The requested value can be enteredwithin the activated window.

8 The HIGHLIGHT function is used to create a light beam fast and easily during the procedure of programmingpositions of the selected fixtures. The values for individual DMX channels have to be set respectively. These valuescan be set by selecting the respective cell with a right mouse click. The requested value can be entered within theactivated window.

9 SNAP: New value will be activated fastest possible (jumps, does not fade: default setting). Activate by a right mouseclick on the cell. A YES in the respective cell will indicate that SNAP has been chosen for this channel.

Basic setting for the respective DMX channel is FADE.

2 .82 .82 .82 .82 .8 Single Channel-specific Adjustments for the Current ShowSingle Channel-specific Adjustments for the Current ShowSingle Channel-specific Adjustments for the Current ShowSingle Channel-specific Adjustments for the Current ShowSingle Channel-specific Adjustments for the Current Show

Press the DMX LIST button in the PATCH menu to activate this menu.

2.8 Single Channel-specific Adjustments for the Current Show


FADE: A value can be changed slowly (channel can fade, default setting).

This is only a pre-setting for each individual channel and can easily be changed during programming, ifneeded.

10 To move back to FIXTURE PATCH.

11 Allows to move back to DIMMER PATCH.

12 By pressing the PRINT button the DMX table will be printed (default printer).


14 To leave the DMX LIST menu.

2.8 Single Channel-specific Adjustments for the Current Show


11111

22222

2 .92 .92 .92 .92 .9 Creating, Assigning and Deleting ProfilesCreating, Assigning and Deleting ProfilesCreating, Assigning and Deleting ProfilesCreating, Assigning and Deleting ProfilesCreating, Assigning and Deleting ProfilesIn the PROFILE TOOL menu, you can create individual profiles. The profiles created can be assigned to any DMXchannel.


1 The PROFILE TYPES sheet displays four folders for different profiles. Self-created profiles can be saved to theseindividual folders.

With the left mouse button, select a folder, in which a created profile is to be saved, deleted or edited.

Creating a new profileCreating a new profileCreating a new profileCreating a new profileCreating a new profileTo create a new profile, press the NEW button. The EDIT PROFILES menu will open (ààààà next page).

2 The sheet displays the created profiles.

Assigning profiles to a DMX channelAssigning profiles to a DMX channelAssigning profiles to a DMX channelAssigning profiles to a DMX channelAssigning profiles to a DMX channelSelect the requested profile.

Deleting profilesDeleting profilesDeleting profilesDeleting profilesDeleting profilesSelect a profile with the encoder and press the DELETE button.

Customizing profilesCustomizing profilesCustomizing profilesCustomizing profilesCustomizing profilesSelect a profile with the encoder and press the EDIT button. The EDIT PROFILES menu will open with the selectedprofile (ààààà next page).

2.9 Creating and Assigning Profiles

Call up this menu from the TOOLS menu using the EDIT PROFILE button.

Or:Or:Or:Or:Or:

In the DMX List menu, make a right mouse click into the Profiles column. ààààà 2.82.82.82.82.8 Single Channel-specific Adjustmentsfor the Current Show

Or:Or:Or:Or:Or:

In the EDIT FIXTURE menu, make a right mouse click into the Profiles column. ààààà 2.12.12.12.12.111111 Modifying Fixtures (EDITFIXTURE) and ààààà 2.122.122.122.122.12 Creating Fixtures (EDIT FIXTURE)


33333

44444

55555

77777

8888866666

99999

output.

Make a left mouse click on an arbitrary spot or touch the touch screen. The closest dot will be moved to this positionwhile the graph is automatically and softly adjusted to the new positioned dot. The spot clicked on is indicated by across-hair pointer and the size of the value is displayed above the diagram. The value after IN is the value set on thegrandMA, the value after OUT is the DMX value to be output.

Or:Or:Or:Or:Or:

Turning the Encoder will move a cross-hair pointer on the drawn line. By pressing and turning the Encoder, you canmodify the output value. Above the diagram, the value at the current position is displayed. The value after IN is thevalue set on the grandMA, the value after OUT is the DMX value to be output.

Release the Encoder and press it once or press the MARK POSITION button. The closest dot is moved to the markedposition while the graph is automatically and softly adjusted to the new positioned dot.

5 If the HARD EDIT button is pressed (dark background), the graph can be formed arbitrarily.

Mark the first modification dot by a left mouse click or shortly touching the touch screen on an arbitrary spot. Thisposition will be marked by a red dot.


Turning the Encoder will move the cross-hair pointer on the drawn line. By pressing and turning the Encoder, youcan modify the output value. Above the diagram, the value at the current position is displayed. The value after IN isthe value set on the grandMA, the value after OUT is the DMX value to be output.Now, mark a second position using the mouse, the touch screen or the Encoder. The graph will automaticallyconnect the first dot with the second one.

6 Pressing the PREDEFINED FUNCTION button will open a window, in which you can choose between four standardgraphs by clicking on the respective button. Close the window with the EXIT button.

LINEAR: The set value corresponds to the DMX output.

SINUS: The graph displays a sinus curve.

SQUARE: The graph displays a root function.

POWER CORRECTION: The graph serves for correcting a phase-angle Dimmer.

7 Pressing the INVERT X or Y button will invert the values of the x- or y-axis.

8 The current name will be displayed here. The created curve can be renamed using the keyboard.

9 Pressing the CLOSE button, you will save the graph and leave the menu.

2.9 Creating and Assigning Profiles

2.9.12.9.12.9.12.9.12.9.1 EDIT PROFILESEDIT PROFILESEDIT PROFILESEDIT PROFILESEDIT PROFILES

3 By pressing the PERCENTbutton, you can switch thescaling from percent todecimal or, when pressingthe button once more, tohexadecimal.

4 Press the SOFT EDIT button(dark background). On thegraph, several positions areindicated by dots in regularintervals.

The y-axis gives the valueset on the grandMA,whereas the x-axis givesthe DMX value that will be


22222

33333

11111

44444

55555

66666

77777

88888

99999

2.12.12.12.12.100000 Creating presets, effects and group buttons automaticallyCreating presets, effects and group buttons automaticallyCreating presets, effects and group buttons automaticallyCreating presets, effects and group buttons automaticallyCreating presets, effects and group buttons automaticallyFor most of the Fixtures in the library, there are ready-made presets that can be created here. Furthermore, ready-made effects and buttons for each Fixture and Dimmer can be created in the GROUP window.

Call up AUTO CREATE in the SETUP menu.

1 The sheet shows all Fixtures and Dimmers that are used in the current show. On the right side of each Fixture orDimmer, there is a cell for PRESET and GROUP. In the cells, a NO is displayed. You can switch over to YES by rightmouse clicks on the individual cells or using the Encoder on the right side of the Display. When creating presets orgroup buttons, they will be created only for these specific Fixtures or Dimmers.

2 By pressing the CREATE PRESETS (merge) button, the presets for all fixture types will be created simultaneously.Different fixtures with the same name will be displayed on ONE Preset button.Pressing the CREATE PRESETS (don�t merge) button will create individual presets for each fixture type.

The created presets are now available in the separate PRESET WINDOWS.

3 Pressing the CREATE GROUPS button will create an ODD button for each fixture type, an EVEN and an ALL button. TheODD button selects all odd fixtures, the EVEN button all even fixtures and the ALL button selects all fixtures.

Pressing the CREATE SINGLE GROUPS button will create a separate button for each fixture within the GROUPwindow.

4 Pressing the CREATE DIMMER DEFAULT PRESETS button will create presets for each dimmer channel in individuallydefinable steps. Pressing the button beside, these presets can be set to 4 values (5, 10, 20 or 25%).

5 To save self-created presets from a reference fixture, select that particular fixture. Press the SAVE button. Thepresets will now be saved in the USER library for the Fixture in this Show (same name, just new date and timestamp). If future Fixtures of this type will be registered, the created presets can be loaded using CREATE PRESETS (seeitem 22222). In order to use this Fixture with the self-created presets for other Shows or on other consoles, this Fixturemust be saved to the USER library on the HDD or floppy. ààààà 2.12.12.12.12.11.3 1.3 1.3 1.3 1.3 Updating the Fixture Library (USER Library)

2.10 Creating Presets, Effects and Group buttons automatically


6 With a disc inserted containing a show in ASCII format (file with extension .ALQ), the show can be loaded by pushingthis button. No scanner datas can be transferred.

7 Pressing this button will create prepared effects, which will be available in the EFFECT POOL afterwards. à à à à à 66666Effects.

8 Pressing the IMPORT EFFECTS button you can load already saved effects from a floppy.

Pressing the EXPORT EFFECTS button you can save created effects to a floppy.

9 You can leave the CREATE PRESET menu with the CLOSE button.

2.10 Creating Presets, Effects and Group buttons automatically


999998888877777

1111100000

1111111111 1111122222

1313131313

4444411111 22222 5555533333 1111144444

111115555566666

1919191919

2020202020

1111177777

1111166666

1111188888

2121212121

2 . 12 . 12 . 12 . 12 . 111111EDITING FIXTURES (modify)EDITING FIXTURES (modify)EDITING FIXTURES (modify)EDITING FIXTURES (modify)EDITING FIXTURES (modify)If an existing fixture has to be changed, you have to select it in the FIXTURE SCHEDULE.

2 .12 . 12 . 12 . 12 . 11 . 11 . 11 . 11 . 11 . 1 Listing of individual functions in the EDIT FIXTURE menuListing of individual functions in the EDIT FIXTURE menuListing of individual functions in the EDIT FIXTURE menuListing of individual functions in the EDIT FIXTURE menuListing of individual functions in the EDIT FIXTURE menu

1 CH: Listing of individual channels

2 PARAMETER: Column for individual functions

3 FEATURE: Display of group functions (Preset Group)

4 PROFILE: In this column, a profile can be assigned to this cannel. ààààà 2.92.92.92.92.9 Creating, Assigning anddeleting profiles

5 INVERS: Within this column, the respective channel can be inverted

6 DEFAULT : This value will be called up when the Fixture receives no Cue, Sequence, Preset or DirectAccess signal

7 HIGHLIGHT: This value will be called up when these Fixtures have been selected and the HIGHLIGHTbutton is pressed

8 SNAP: FADE/SNAP function for the respective channel ààààà 2.8 2.8 2.8 2.8 2.8 Single Channel-specific Adjustmentsfor the Current Show (point 9)

9 MIB FADE: Basic setting of fade time for the MOVE IN BLACK function

10 MEMO: Cell to enter additional notes concerning the fixture.

11 NAME/MANUFACTURER: To change the Fixture�s name and manufacturer.

Additional note to item 11: This is recommended, as otherwise the same name might exist twice.

2.11 EDITING FIXTURES (modify)

Press EDIT FIXTURE in the FIXTURE SCHEDULE to activate this menu.


12 TYPE OF FIXTURE: Swap between mirror or head Fixture. When using head Fixtures, the FIXTURE SHEET will showa square left of the PAN value, indicating the current head position.

13 Encoder names:

MAX PAN ROTATION: Value of maximum deflection from PAN function; important for Flip functions.MAX TILT ROTATION: Value of maximum deflection from TILT function.MIB DELAY: To set a DELAY time for the MOVE IN BLACK function for this fixture.

MIB FADE: To set a FADE time for the MOVE IN BLACK function for this fixture.

14 To add one empty line in front of the marked position in the chart.

15 To erase the marked line.

16 If COARSE is displayed on this button, normal channels will be created when setting up functions. Pressing thebutton one time, it will display FINE. Now, when creating functions, you can define a FINE channel for eachfunction.

17 Enables you to assign separate DMX addresses to a fixture. Beginning with the respective channel, where the figureis followed by an asterix, a new DMX address can be assigned later on.

18 Here, you can create or change so-called Channel Values (i.e. names for set values displayed in the Fixture Sheet)for individual functions (e.g. COLOUR). ààààà 2.12 Creating Fixtures (EDIT CHANNEL VALUES) Item 33333

19 This is where you can create or delete Presets for the various functions (for example: COLOR). ààààà 2.122.122.122.122.12 CreatingFixtures (EDIT FIXTURE), item 44444

20 The SAVE button will save all changes onlyonlyonlyonlyonly within and for the current showcurrent showcurrent showcurrent showcurrent show.

21 To leave the EDIT FIXTURE menu.

2.12.12.12.12.11.21.21.21.21.2 Modifying FixturesModifying FixturesModifying FixturesModifying FixturesModifying FixturesAll settings for the selected fixture will be displayed in the chart.

By selecting the function or value, the settings can now be changed.

For example:● Selecting a DEFAULT value with a left mouse click. à à à à à 2.12.1 2.12.1 2.12.1 2.12.1 2.12.1 Listing of individual functions in the EDIT FIXTURE

menu (point 6)● Confirm with ENTER (on the keyboard) or make a right mouse click into the marked space (red background).● The SET VALUE window will appear.● Enter the new value or select it with the left mouse button.● The selected value will now be listed in the chart.● By pressing the SAVE button, all changes will be saved.

The modified fixture can only be used for the The modified fixture can only be used for the The modified fixture can only be used for the The modified fixture can only be used for the The modified fixture can only be used for the current showcurrent showcurrent showcurrent showcurrent show.....

2.12.12.12.12.11.3 Updating the Fixture Library (USER Library)1.3 Updating the Fixture Library (USER Library)1.3 Updating the Fixture Library (USER Library)1.3 Updating the Fixture Library (USER Library)1.3 Updating the Fixture Library (USER Library)If you wish to include this fixture configuration in the general fixture library (on hard or floppy disk), this has to beupdated (save on hard or floppy disk).

In order to add this fixture to the harddisk library, the HARDDISK LIBRARY button must beactivated (default). If the fixture is to be saved on floppy disk, the HARDDISK LIBRARY buttonhas to be switched to FLOPPY LIBRARY (Fixture library on floppy disk). This way, you can alsoput fixtures in external archives and transfer these to other grandMA consoles and operators.

If you wish to save to a floppy disk, please insert an empty IBM/PC formatted 3.5� disk. Remove the writeprotection on the disk. After switching to floppy disk, it might take a few seconds for the floppy to respond.

Select the fixture in FIXTURE SCHEDULE (blue frame).The selected fixture will now be saved bypressing the UPDATE LIBRARY button. Remove the disk from the drive afterwards.Remove the disk from the drive afterwards.Remove the disk from the drive afterwards.Remove the disk from the drive afterwards.Remove the disk from the drive afterwards.

2.11 EDITING FIXTURES (modify)


66666

11111

22222

55555

33333

44444

2 . 1 22 . 1 22 . 1 22 . 1 22 . 1 2 EDITING FIXTURES (create new)EDITING FIXTURES (create new)EDITING FIXTURES (create new)EDITING FIXTURES (create new)EDITING FIXTURES (create new)In order to create a new fixture, activate NEW ENTRY in the FIXTURE SCHEDULE menu with a left mouse click.

Press the EDIT FIXTURE button in the FIXTURE SCHEDULE to call up this menu.

1 Select the cell on the right side of CH. 1 (will be displayed with a red background). Press ENTER (on the keyboard) ormake a right mouse click into the cell. The SELECT A PARAMETER window will open.

2 Now, select the function for the first channel. It will automatically be inserted into the cell.

For further functions, repeat these two steps each time by using the cell below.

The DUMMY Function is meant for fixed channels. The output value for this channel has to be set in the DEFAULTcolumn. This channel can not be modified in the FIXTURE-SHEET.

If all fixture functions have been selected, you can now program the presets.The following factory presets are available● PROFILE● INVERS● DEFAULT● HIGHLIGHT● SNAP● MIB FADE● PAN / TILT MAX, MIB DELAY and FADE● TYPE OF FIXTUREààààà 2.12.12.12.12.11.11.11.11.11.1 Listing of individual functions in the EDIT FIXTURE menu

2.12 EDITING FIXTURES (create new)


3 Here, you can create or modify Channel Values for the individual functions (e.g. GOBO).

Pressing the EDIT CHANNEL VALUES button will open the Select Feature Group To Edit menu, where you can selecta Feature Group. The EDIT CHANNEL VALUES menu will open.

Select the cell below NAME and enter a name for a preset. In the next column, enter the value for this name. Withthe PERCENT VALUES button you can switch between displaying the values in either Percentage, decimal orhexadecimal numbers. If you select this Fixture from the Fixture Schedule, these names will be generatedautomatically. If the names are not be created automatically, select the cell and switch over to NO by pressing anarbitrary button. For further presets, use the next line (as an example à à à à à illustration above).

4 Here, you can create or modify presets for the individual functions (e.g. GOBO).

Pressing the Edit Presets button will open the Select Preset Group to Edit menu, where you can select a Preset Group.The Show Presets menu will open.

2.12 EDITING FIXTURES (create new)

By pressing the �Create Presets from Channel Values� button, you can generate presets from the names (see above:the allocated name values will be used for the presets) for the Fixture. Then, all presets in this group will bedisplayed. These presets will be generated when creating them automatically (ààààà 2.102.102.102.102.10 Creating presets, Effects andGroup buttons automatically). By pressing the Delete Presets button, all presets in these groups will be deleted.

5 After all parameters have been set, give them a name. give them a name. give them a name. give them a name. give them a name. Perform a left mouse click on NO NAME. This column willnow have a blue background and you can enter a name, using the keyboard; confirm with ENTER.

Please make sure that the chosen name does not not not not not already exist, because otherwise two with the same namecan later only be recognised by their date.

Now name the MANUFACTURER (name of manufacturer will help you find the fixture much faster later on).Continue with a left mouse click on UNKNOWN. This column will now have a blue background and you can entera name using the keyboard; confirm with ENTER.

6 With the SAVE button, all settings will be saved and you switch to the FIXTURE SCHEDULE menu.

The created fixture can only be used for theThe created fixture can only be used for theThe created fixture can only be used for theThe created fixture can only be used for theThe created fixture can only be used for the current show current show current show current show current show.....

If you wish to include this fixture configuration in the general fixture library (on hard or floppy disk), this has to beupdated (save on hard or floppy disk).

ààààà 2.12.12.12.12.11.3 1.3 1.3 1.3 1.3 Updating the Fixture Library (USER Library)


22222

33333

44444

55555

66666

77777 88888

1111100000

99999 1111111111

1111133333

1111122222

1111144444

11111

1111155555

1111166666

1111177777

2 . 1 32 . 1 32 . 1 32 . 1 32 . 1 3 Settings in the Setup MenuSettings in the Setup MenuSettings in the Setup MenuSettings in the Setup MenuSettings in the Setup Menu

1 By shortly pressing this button, you can set the confirmation menus (e.g. SAVE) to be displayed on either only theright-side TFT touchscreen or on all displays.

2 By clicking this button, four calibrating buttons, numbered 1 to 4, will be displayed on the respective TFT display.Now, activate the buttons using your finger or the supplied pen (special pen with soft rubber core). After the lastbutton, the display will automatically switch back. Now, the touchscreen is calibrated. The setting will automaticallybe saved.

3 With the respective button, the touch screens can be switched on or off, respectively. If one of them is faulty, it mayoccur that the mouse will freeze on one position and can not be operated anymore. In this case, the touchscreenscan be switched off. For this, use function key F9 on the keyboard.

F9 will switch off all three touchscreens (emergency switch). To switch the touchscreensF9 will switch off all three touchscreens (emergency switch). To switch the touchscreensF9 will switch off all three touchscreens (emergency switch). To switch the touchscreensF9 will switch off all three touchscreens (emergency switch). To switch the touchscreensF9 will switch off all three touchscreens (emergency switch). To switch the touchscreensback on, you can use the mouse again.back on, you can use the mouse again.back on, you can use the mouse again.back on, you can use the mouse again.back on, you can use the mouse again.

4 To switch the mouse function on both external monitors on and off. In AUTO mode, the software will recognize byitself, if a monitor is connected or not and will switch the mouse function for the external monitors on or off,respectively.

OFF will not allowwill not allowwill not allowwill not allowwill not allow any mouse function, while ON will keep the mouse function activatedactivatedactivatedactivatedactivated at all times.

5 With this button, the grandMA�s acoustic sensor can be switched on or off (with older grandmas, probably notavailable).

6 To set the sensitivity of trackball and coarse, fine or extra fine (16bit resolution) of the Encoder. With the PUSHbutton, you can set the Encoder�s sensitivity while holding the button down.

7 Switching between the Motorfader functions (Executor Fader, Channel Fader).

AUTO: Executor Faders: When switching between the Pages, the Motorfaders will automatically pick upthe values saved last.

Channel Faders: Faders adjust to the called-up values of the allocated channels.MANUAL: Executor Faders: When switching between the Pages, the saved values will be called up, but the

Faders will nnnnnooooot t t t t follow. To change a saved value, you have to use the Fader tomanually set it to a higher or lower value.

Channel Faders: Faders do not adjust automatically to the called-up values of the assigned channels.To change a saved value, you have to use the Fader to manually set it to a higheror lower value.

2.13 Settings in the Setup Menu


DISABLED: FaderFaderFaderFaderFader sssss without fwithout fwithout fwithout fwithout funununununccccct iont iont iont iont ionExecutor Faders: When switching between the Pages, the saved values will be called up, but the

Faders will not follow.Channel Faders: Faders do not adjust automatically to the called-up values of the assigned channels.

8 To switch the wheel�s functions for the dimmers.

Additiv: All dimmer values will be changed simultaneously. If they reach �0� or �FF�, they will be aligned.

Incremental: All dimmer values will be changed simultaneously. If they reach �0� or �FF�, the respective intervalswill be maintained.

Prop.+: All dimmer values will be changed in percentages and will reach �0� simultaneously.

Prop.�: All dimmer values will be changed in percentages and will reach �FF� simultaneously.

Please note, that with PROP+ a change of the value �0� is not considered a change.Please note, that with PROP+ a change of the value �0� is not considered a change.Please note, that with PROP+ a change of the value �0� is not considered a change.Please note, that with PROP+ a change of the value �0� is not considered a change.Please note, that with PROP+ a change of the value �0� is not considered a change.Please note, that with PROP� a change of the value �FF� is not considered a change.Please note, that with PROP� a change of the value �FF� is not considered a change.Please note, that with PROP� a change of the value �FF� is not considered a change.Please note, that with PROP� a change of the value �FF� is not considered a change.Please note, that with PROP� a change of the value �FF� is not considered a change.

9 To switch between �Light� and �Dark� display background illumination.

10 The desk lamp can be switched either on or off with the ON/OFF button. The brightness of the desk lamp can bechanged using a left mouse click on the blue bar or using the touchscreen.

11 By pressing this button, you will enter the DEFAULTS menu. All general presets can be set in this menu. ààààà 2.142.142.142.142.14Settings in the DEFAULTS menu

12 By pressing this button you will enter the DATE and TIME menu. ààààà 2.172.172.172.172.17 DATE and TIME

13 By pressing this button you can change the display language.

14 By pressing this button, you will open the OOPS Function Options menu ààààà belowbelowbelowbelowbelow

15 To switch the screen saver off an on. By pressing the button briefly, a window will appear where you can select thetime after which the screen saver is supposed to kick in.

16 By pressing this button, you will reach the UPDATE SOFTWARE menu. The operating system, the operating softwareas well as the console software and the fixtures can be updated from this menu. ààààà 1010101010 Software Update

17 To leave the SETUP menu.

2.13.1 OOPS Function Options2.13.1 OOPS Function Options2.13.1 OOPS Function Options2.13.1 OOPS Function Options2.13.1 OOPS Function OptionsIf the OOPS function is activated, the old setting will always be saved additionally when executing commands orentering values. This requires many resources slowing the console down. As the execution of programs may becompromised thereby, this option can be switched off completely or for specific functions.

2.13 Settings in the Setup Menu

General: If the button is on Enabled, all OOPS functions are available � except those for the VIEWScommands or entries in the PROGRAMMER (which can be switched off separately; forfurther information see below). Pressing the Enabled button next to General will switch itover to Disabled and all OOPS functions will be switched off.

Oops for Views: If the button is on Enabled, OOPS functions can be used for VIEWS calls and creating ordeleting VIEWS buttons. Pressing the Enabled button will switch it to Disabled and the OOPSfunction can no longer be used for VIEWS commands.

Oops for Programmer: If the button is on Enabled, the OOPS function is available for entries in the PROGRAMMER(selecting/deselecting or activating/deactivating Fixture or Dimmer channels). Pressing theEnabled button will switch it to Disabled and the OOPS function can no longer be used forentries in the PROGRAMMER.

Pressing the CLOSE button will close the menu and save the settings.


44444 33333 22222

55555

11111

2.142.142.142.142.14 Settings in the DEFAULTS MenuSettings in the DEFAULTS MenuSettings in the DEFAULTS MenuSettings in the DEFAULTS MenuSettings in the DEFAULTS Menu

Pressing the DEFAULT button in the SETUP menu will bring you to the DEFAULTS menu.

2.14 Settings in the DEFAULTS Menu

Cue TimingCue TimingCue TimingCue TimingCue TimingThis column will display the preset times and settings that will be used when saving Cues and Sequences.

Using the Encoders, you can adjust the individual times and trigger calls.

Playback TimingPlayback TimingPlayback TimingPlayback TimingPlayback TimingThe duration set for the OFF Time OFF Time OFF Time OFF Time OFF Time will be used when switching off Executors (OFF button).

GOTO & GO-:GOTO & GO-:GOTO & GO-:GOTO & GO-:GOTO & GO-: If a specific time is set when calling up a Cue using the GOTO or GO- function, the Cue will becalled up with this duration. If Cue Timing was set, the Cue will be called up with the duration programmed in thisCue. You can overwrite the Goto Default duration at any time. ààààà 4.2.34.2.34.2.34.2.34.2.3 Default Sequence (Master Sequence)

Here you can enter a Default time for MIB DELAY and FADE. ààààà 5.1.45.1.45.1.45.1.45.1.4 Move in Black Option

Executor DefaultsExecutor DefaultsExecutor DefaultsExecutor DefaultsExecutor DefaultsDefault is Sequence/Chaser:Default is Sequence/Chaser:Default is Sequence/Chaser:Default is Sequence/Chaser:Default is Sequence/Chaser: With this button, you can define, whether a newly programmed sequence willbe created as a Chaser (running light) or as a Sequence (GO MODE) (default setting).

Chase Speed: Chase Speed: Chase Speed: Chase Speed: Chase Speed: Here, you can define the preset for Chase Speed and Effect Speed.

Readout: Readout: Readout: Readout: Readout: By pressing the button, you can here switch the Chaser Speed between BPM (beats per minute), Hz(beats per second) and SEC (seconds).

The preset of the Chaser Speed is also used for the Effect Speed.


2.14 Settings in the DEFAULTS Menu

Crossfade Reload/Permanent:Crossfade Reload/Permanent:Crossfade Reload/Permanent:Crossfade Reload/Permanent:Crossfade Reload/Permanent: Here, you can define whether Fading should be performed just in one direc-tion (Reload) or in both directions (Permanent).

Sheet SortingSheet SortingSheet SortingSheet SortingSheet SortingBy the SORTING column, you define according to which aspects the fixtures and channels shall be sorted whensetting up new windows. You can switch to the next option by clicking on the respective buttons.

Sheet FontsizeSheet FontsizeSheet FontsizeSheet FontsizeSheet FontsizeWith the FONTSIZES column, you can define the type size of new windows.

Sheet ReadoutSheet ReadoutSheet ReadoutSheet ReadoutSheet ReadoutPreset for the output of numbers in the OUTPUT, CHANNEL and PATCH windows.

MiscMiscMiscMiscMisc� Function of BLACKOUT button:

PUSH: serves as push button (key)TOGGLE: will remain active when pressedDISABLED: switches the blackout function off

� Function of the GRANDMASTER FADER:ENABLED: Fader activeDISABLED: Fader inactive

� KEYBOARD GERMAN/ENGLISH: Switch option for country-specific keyboards.

� With the Preset ColorPreset ColorPreset ColorPreset ColorPreset Color button, three different presets for the color scheme of displaying preset buttons can becalled up.

1 RESET DEFAULTS button: Will reset all changes back to factory settings.

2 Set the query mode to create or overwrite cues.

33333 PRESET FILTER ON /OFF:

FILTER ON: When saving a PRESET, only only only only only the functions of this feature (e.g. COLOUR) will be saved.

FILTER OFF: When saving a PRESET, all functionsall functionsall functionsall functionsall functions of the chosen fixture will be saved.

Preset, whether Cue Only will be ON or OFF when saving data.

Preset, whether set times of cues (FADE/DELAY) will be reset (RESET TIMES ON) upon the next saving process or

whether they shall be maintained (RESET TIMES OFF).

4 Functions for data saving.

Active Values: Will save only activeonly activeonly activeonly activeonly active values (red background or red numbers/characters)

All: Will always save allallallallall values given on the output (DMX)

All for Selected Devices: Will save allallallallall values of the selected Fixtures and Dimmers (Fixture and Dimmer charactersin yellow)

5 Encoder labelling for figures within the Cue Timing column.


Trigger monitor

2 . 1 52 . 1 52 . 1 52 . 1 52 . 1 5 Setting Sound SignalsSetting Sound SignalsSetting Sound SignalsSetting Sound SignalsSetting Sound SignalsThe sound signal is used for triggering Chasers and Sequences. In other words, this is an electronic, graphicequalizer. In order to slowly balance any fluctuations of the audio signal, a specific compressor function has beenintegrated.

Furthermore, you will find an integrated adjustable HOLD-OFF function. This function will prevent any doubletriggers (for example: with fast BASSDRUM beats).

Furthermore, beats will be automatically recognized via the incoming sound signal (BPM).


Call up this menu from the TOOLS menu using the Sound SettingsSound SettingsSound SettingsSound SettingsSound Settings button.

To set an equalizer, pull the respective �slider� to the desired position. In the left lower corner, there is a visual triggersignal (monitor) for your orientation. The small dot on the left side of the HOLD Function will indicate the remainingHOLD time. The small dot on the left side of the GAIN indicator will show the compression rate of the audio signal.

The right small dot will indicate the state of compression of the audio signal. The sound signal is visualized in thelower left part of the display. The analysis of the sound signal will be indicated in the smaller right part of the window,including indication of the recognised BPM (Beats per minute). By moving the BPM slider, the beat can be set. Thenext-possible beat will be recognised from the incoming audio signal and will be used to control the BPM.

If the BPM button is ON, the currently recognised beat will be used. When switching the BPM to OFF, the lastrecognised beat at the time will remain unchanged and will be used. You can adjust the value using the BPM slider.

If the Auto Stop button is on ON, the Chase or the effect will be stopped when there is no sound signal. If the AutoFader button is also on ON, the Chase or the effect will be faded out when there is no sound signal.When you switch the Auto Stop button to OFF, the Chaser or effect will continue with the latest BPM valuemeasured.

The AUTO GAIN function can be used for grandMAs from serial no. 0055 and later (button will turn dark-grey button,HARDWARE modification). grandMA ultra-light allows only only only only only Auto Gain.

For For For For For grandMA�grandMA�grandMA�grandMA�grandMA�s with serial no. up to 0054, this button cans with serial no. up to 0054, this button cans with serial no. up to 0054, this button cans with serial no. up to 0054, this button cans with serial no. up to 0054, this button can notnotnotnotnot be used. be used. be used. be used. be used.

You can leave this menu by pressing the CLOSE button; all settings will be saved.

2.15 Setting Sound Signals


55555

44444

11111

33333

33333

22222

2.162 .162 .162 .162 .16 Adjustments in the ATTRIBUTE GROUPING menuAdjustments in the ATTRIBUTE GROUPING menuAdjustments in the ATTRIBUTE GROUPING menuAdjustments in the ATTRIBUTE GROUPING menuAdjustments in the ATTRIBUTE GROUPING menuIn the �Preset and Feature Assignment� menu, you can change the names of Preset and Features Groups. Furthermore, youcan create or adapt new Features Groups.But first a short explanation about the differences between Presets, Features and Attributes:

2.16 Adjustments in the ATTRIBUTE GROUPING menu

1 Attribute:Attr ibute:Attr ibute:Attr ibute:Attr ibute: Attributes are individual functions of Fixtures like Goborad1, Focus, Iris, Pan, Tilt ...

2 Feature:Feature:Feature:Feature:Feature: Features are groups, in which several Attributes are combined. In the Fixture Sheet, the first line willdisplay all Features available. Below the individual Features, the respective Attributes are displayed.

3 Presets:Presets:Presets:Presets:Presets: In a preset, the value of one or more Attributes can be saved. Presets are divided in different PresetGroups (Gobo, Colour, �).Features are allocated to the individual Preset Groups.

4 By pressing the FEATURE button, you can select the different Feature Groups for the Preset Group selected tochange the individual Attributes using the Encoder.

5 Here, the individual Attributes are displayed that can be changed with the respective Encoder.


44444

33333

22222

5555511111 66666

2.16.1 Preset and Feature Assignment2.16.1 Preset and Feature Assignment2.16.1 Preset and Feature Assignment2.16.1 Preset and Feature Assignment2.16.1 Preset and Feature Assignment

Attention! This menu is important and will influence the entire programming!Attention! This menu is important and will influence the entire programming!Attention! This menu is important and will influence the entire programming!Attention! This menu is important and will influence the entire programming!Attention! This menu is important and will influence the entire programming!

Call up this menu by pressing the Attribute Grouping button in the Defaults menu.

2.16 Settings in the ATTRIBUTE GROUPING menu

Changing the Names of Preset GroupsChanging the Names of Preset GroupsChanging the Names of Preset GroupsChanging the Names of Preset GroupsChanging the Names of Preset Groups1 Click on a Preset Group.

2 Click on the name, change it using the keyboard and confirm with Enter. The name will only be changed and savedafter pressing the SAVE and Reload Views button.

Changing the Names of Preset GroupsChanging the Names of Preset GroupsChanging the Names of Preset GroupsChanging the Names of Preset GroupsChanging the Names of Preset Groups1 Click on a Preset Group.

3 Click on a feature of this Preset Group.

4 Click on the name, change it using the keyboard and confirm with Enter. The name will only be changed and savedafter pressing the �SAVE and Reload Views� button.

Creating a FeatureCreating a FeatureCreating a FeatureCreating a FeatureCreating a FeatureBy pressing the �Add Feature� button, a new Feature is created in the selected Preset Group. To assign a name to the createdFeature ààààà see above, Changing the Names of Features

Deleting FeaturesDeleting FeaturesDeleting FeaturesDeleting FeaturesDeleting FeaturesBy pressing the �Delete Feature� button, the selected Feature will be deleted. If there were still Attributes contained in theFeature, these will be made available automatically as Free Attributes.

Transferring Attributes into other FeaturesTransferring Attributes into other FeaturesTransferring Attributes into other FeaturesTransferring Attributes into other FeaturesTransferring Attributes into other Features3 Click on a Feature of a Preset Group.

5 By clicking on an Attribute, this will be deleted from this Feature and be made available as Free Attribute.

3 Now, select the Feature, into which a Free Attribute is to be saved.

6 By selecting an Attribute, this will be moved into the selected Feature.

Changes will only take effect and be saved after pressing the �SAVE and Reload Views� button.


22222

444443333311111

55555

2.16.2 Encoder (Attribute) Grouping2.16.2 Encoder (Attribute) Grouping2.16.2 Encoder (Attribute) Grouping2.16.2 Encoder (Attribute) Grouping2.16.2 Encoder (Attribute) GroupingAll settings within this menu will affect the saving of Cues, Presets and creating of Presets (Create Preset menu).Call up this menu by pressing the �Encoder (Attribute) Grouping� button in the Preset and Feature Assignment.

2.16 Settings in the ATTRIBUTE GROUPING menu

The Attributes combined in a group will be activated and saved when they are changed (e.g. Pan and Tilt).1 By selecting a group, the combined Attributes will be displayed on the right side.

2 Pressing the �Add Group� button will create a new group.In order to delete a group, this group has to be selected first. Now, press the �Delete Group� button. The group will bedeleted, the Attributes will automatically be added to the Free Attributes.

3 In this column, the Attributes of the selected group will be displayed. By selecting an Attribute, this will be removedfrom this group and added to the Free Attributes.

4 In order to assign Free Attributes to another group, this group has to be selected first. Selecting the Attribute will addit to the currently selected group.

5 By pressing the �Default� button, all groups except 3 will be deleted. Almost all Attributes will be displayed as FreeAttributes in the right column. In the remaining 3 groups, the fixed Attributes (Pan/Tilt, Col.Mix1-4 and Blade1A-4B) are allocated. These Attributes can notnotnotnotnot be moved into other groups (indicated by �fix� next the Attribute�sname).

With CLOSE, you can leave this menu. Changes will only take effect and be saved after pressing the �SAVEand Reload Views� button.


44444

11111 22222

33333

55555

11111

2 . 1 72 . 1 72 . 1 72 . 1 72 . 1 7 TIME & DATE MenuTIME & DATE MenuTIME & DATE MenuTIME & DATE MenuTIME & DATE MenuPressing the TIME and DATE button in the SETUP Menu will open the following menu.

2.17 Menü TIME & DATE

1 You can set TIME and DATE with the encoders below the display. (You can switch encoder functions by pressing theencoder).

2 Set position for the automatic control of (ààààà 8.3 8.3 8.3 8.3 8.3 Agenda Menu) sunrise and sunset calculation. Clicking on therespective buttons will open a window, where the position can be set.Information regarding the respective position can be looked up in a software program that can be downloaded fromthe internet at: www.djuga.net/winglobe.html.

3 If the button is set to EnabledEnabledEnabledEnabledEnabled,the clock will automatically switch between summer and winter time. Pressing thebutton deactivates this function (Disabled). Pressing the respective button in the Begin/EndBegin/EndBegin/EndBegin/EndBegin/End field will open awindow where you can set the begining and the end of the summer time.

4 Pressing this button will open a sheet, where the calculated times for Dawn, Sunrise, Sunset and Dusk for yesterday,today and tommorrow are listed.

5 Leave this menu with the CLOSE button.


2.18 User Management2.18 User Management2.18 User Management2.18 User Management2.18 User Management

2.18.1 2.18.1 2.18.1 2.18.1 2.18.1 IntroductionThe new user management and security features include:

- Temporary simple desk lock mechanism.

- User management for up to 32 users.

- Users have privilege levels.

- These levels of privilege can prevent an inexperienced user from destroying show data.

- Users can have their own user profile.

- User profiles include views and default settings, even a set of default views that can be loaded into any show.

- Multiple users can share one user profile ( although they can have different privilege levels).

- Forced login at desk start as an option.

When you get a new desk, or you update your old version:

All user management features are disabled by default. If you do not touch them, you will not notice a difference tothe older versions of grandMA. Internally you will be automatically logged in as administrator, working with adefault user profile.

The user management is not show-dependent. It is affecting all shows on your desk.

2.18.2 Locking the Desk2.18.2 Locking the Desk2.18.2 Locking the Desk2.18.2 Locking the Desk2.18.2 Locking the DeskLocking the desk is a method to temporarily protect your desk against misuse from inexperienced users. It is notsuitable for permanent protection.

Locking the desk is not affecting the output. All running programs continue to do so. But the complete surface of thedesk is inaccessible. Eventual playing around with the master fader will be ignored.

Activating Desk Lock:

- Press CTRL-PAUSE on the PC-Keyboard

- All touchscreens will show DESK LOCKED.

- Desk is locked.

Deactivating Desk Lock:

- Press CTRL-PAUSE on the PC-Keyboard again.

- All touchscreens will restore to the original screens.

- Desk is unlocked.

CAUTION:

Due to the fact, that the master fader is not motorised, master dimming may jump to an unwanted level upondeactivation of desk lock. So have a look at it before you deactivate desk lock! For the grandMA ultra-light this is alsovalid for all other faders.

2.18 User management


2.18.3 Concept of User Profiles2.18.3 Concept of User Profiles2.18.3 Concept of User Profiles2.18.3 Concept of User Profiles2.18.3 Concept of User Profiles- The desk has a list of users.

- Each user can have his own user profile, but he can also share a profile with other users.

- A user profile includes views, quikey arrangement and playback settings.

- This part is used to store and load default Views, Setup and Default settings (Encoder and Trackball sensitivity andWheel function ààààà 2.13 2.13 2.13 2.13 2.13 Settings in the Setup menu Furthermore Cue Timing, Executor Defaults, Sheet Sorting,Sheet Fontsize, Sheet Readout, Misc., Preset Colours, Attribute Grouping and Store Options ààààà 2.14 2.14 2.14 2.14 2.14 Settings inthe DEFAULTS menu).

- Each show contains a full set of local user profiles. These local user profiles can be stored as default in the globalparts and they can be loaded from there.

- When saving a show on floppy disk, all users registered to this console will also be saved with all default settings.When loading a show from floppy disk to another console, all users including all default settings will automati-cally be transferred to the new console. Individual users can use these profiles for a particular show or for othershows in which this console is used.

2.18.4 Creating a new User2.18.4 Creating a new User2.18.4 Creating a new User2.18.4 Creating a new User2.18.4 Creating a new UserTo create a new user, you need to have administrator privilege level:

- Go to TOOLS menu.

- Go to USER / CONFIGURATION.

- Press the NEW USER button.

- You will be asked for a unique new user name. After you have entered the name, a new user appears in the list.

- Edit the full name for the new user. The full name should differ from the user name, because it is shown publicin the headline of the tools menu, while the user name is only used for login.

- Change the rights (privilege level) for the new user.

- By default, the new user is using the DEFAULT user profile. If the user should use a different or an independentuser profile, change his user profile. If you create a new user profile in this way, it is initialised with the defaultprofile.

Beside the users which are in the list, there is always one hidden administrator.

You can not delete or change this administrator.

His user name is ADMIN and he is using the DEFAULT user profile.

Login becomes enabled if at least one user is in the visible user list.

Of course the presence of the ADMIN is destroying a real security concept. But on the other hand you will neverreally lose access to your desk.

2.18.5 Deleting a User2.18.5 Deleting a User2.18.5 Deleting a User2.18.5 Deleting a User2.18.5 Deleting a UserTo delete a user, you need to have administrator privilege level:

- Go to TOOLS menu.


- Select the user you want to delete.

- Press the DELETE USER button.

- The user will disappear. If he was the only one to use a certain user profile, this profile will also be deleted.

Please note, that you can not delete yourself from the list.



2.18.6 User Rights2.18.6 User Rights2.18.6 User Rights2.18.6 User Rights2.18.6 User RightsTo change the rights (privilege level) of a user, you need to have administrator privilege level:

- Go to TOOLS menu.


- Edit the RIGHTS field of the respective user you want to change.

Please note, that you can not change your own rights (simply because you are in the User Manager menu, youalready have administrator rights. If you would change that, you would lock yourself out from this menu.)

At the moment, the following privilege levels are implemented:

PLAYBACK:

- User can use all playback functions.

- He can load shows.

- He has no access to any function that would change the show, beside from playback parameters.

- Even if he has changed playback settings, the show will not be saved. In this way, the next time the desk startsor the show is loaded, everything is as it was before.

PROGRAMMING:

- User has full access to all functions, except User Management and Desk Software Update.

ADMINISTRATOR:

- Beside all other functions, User Management and Update of Desk Software are enabled.

Some grandMA operators may find it helpful to create a user with playback rights only, for their own personal use.After they have finished programming, during the real show, they log in as this playback user, so they can be surenot to change anything in their precious show data ( of course they should save their show before they log in asplayback user!).

It is not necessary to save the whole desk after you have changed something in the User Manager. All data of theUser Manager is immediately saved when you leave the User Manager menu!

2.18.7 Login2.18.7 Login2.18.7 Login2.18.7 Login2.18.7 LoginLogin is only enabled if at least one user appears in the user list (TOOLS menu / User Configuration).

To do a manual login:

- Go to TOOLS menu.

- Press LOGIN button.

Never push Login without knowing the password! Otherwise you can only log in by �Never push Login without knowing the password! Otherwise you can only log in by �Never push Login without knowing the password! Otherwise you can only log in by �Never push Login without knowing the password! Otherwise you can only log in by �Never push Login without knowing the password! Otherwise you can only log in by �ADMIN�ADMIN�ADMIN�ADMIN�ADMIN�.....

All touchscreens will show LOGIN, and you have to enter a valid user name.

During LOGIN, the surface of the desk is locked.

LOGIN does not affect playback. All running programs continue to do so.

After a successful login, the views of the corresponding user profile will appear on the screens. Furthermore, theuser�s saved setup and default settings will automatically be loaded, too.

If a user loads a certain show for the very first time (he has never used this show before), this show will be loadedwith the previously used profile and NOT with his personal user profile. If needed, the personal user profile can beloaded afterwards.

2.18.8 Save or Load User Profiles (Default)2.18.8 Save or Load User Profiles (Default)2.18.8 Save or Load User Profiles (Default)2.18.8 Save or Load User Profiles (Default)2.18.8 Save or Load User Profiles (Default)Individual user profiles are saved independently from the show and can thus be loaded for any other show afterwards.

- Go to the TOOLS menu.

- Pressing the button LOAD USER DEFAULTS will load your own profile (current settings will be overwritten).

- Pressing the button SAVE USER DEFAULTS will save current settings into the independent user profile (Default).This profile can now also be used in other shows.



2.18.9 Forced Login at Desk Start2.18.9 Forced Login at Desk Start2.18.9 Forced Login at Desk Start2.18.9 Forced Login at Desk Start2.18.9 Forced Login at Desk StartForced Login is only enabled if at least one user appears in the user list (TOOLS menu / User Configuration).

To change the Forced Login setting, you need to have administrator privilege level:

- Go to TOOLS menu.


- Press the FORCE LOGIN AT DESKSTART button.

If you switch on FORCED LOGIN, upon every desk start or loading of a show, the desk will automatically bring up thelogin screen.

If FORCED LOGIN is switched off, upon desk start the desk will automatically login the user who was last logged in.

2.18.12.18.12.18.12.18.12.18.10 Who is logged in at the moment?0 Who is logged in at the moment?0 Who is logged in at the moment?0 Who is logged in at the moment?0 Who is logged in at the moment?- Go to TOOLS menu.

- Look at the title.

It says �TOOLS MENU, current user is ��.

The name that you see there is the public full name of the user currently logged in.

Please note that the short user name, used for login, may (and should) be different from this full name.



33333 Creating a ShowCreating a ShowCreating a ShowCreating a ShowCreating a Show

3.13 .13 .13 .13 .1 CREATING A WINDOWCREATING A WINDOWCREATING A WINDOWCREATING A WINDOWCREATING A WINDOW

fixtures, functions and values. ààààà 3.43.43.43.43.4 Accessing Fixtures directly

TRACKING: In this window you can display a Sequence that is assigned to an EXECUTOR fader or EXECUTORbutton. Here, as opposed to the EXECUTOR Sheet, all values or times can be displayedseparately. Any value/time can be modified separately for any channel. ààààà 5.45.45.45.45.4 TRACKINGwindow

DMX: In this window, all DMX output channels are displayed as values, like they are actuallypatched. à à à à à 2.62.62.62.62.6 DMX Output window

GROUPS: Displays, creates new, edits and calls up fixture and dimmer groups. à à à à à 3.33.33.33.33.3 Creating andCalling up Fixtures and Dimmer groups

SEQUENCE: In this Pool, all created Sequences are displayed. This way, assignments to Executors can bemade very quickly. Here, the Sequences can be renamed, copied and deleted. ààààà 5.1 5.1 5.1 5.1 5.1 ASSIGNmenu

EFFECTS: Displaying and Calling up Effect Groups. ààààà 66666 Effects

FORMS: In this POOL, all created forms will be displayed. Here, you can rename, copy or delete forms.ààààà 6.7 6.7 6.7 6.7 6.7 Creating and Saving Virtual Forms (EDIT FORMS)

MACROS: Indicates and calls up macros on the displays. ààààà 88888 Macros and QUIKEY

VIEWS: Displaying and Calling up Views. ààààà 3.2.23.2.23.2.23.2.23.2.2 View Pool

QUIKEY: Displaying and Calling up control buttons on the displays. ààààà 88888 Macros and QUIKEY

COMMAND LINE: Here, the executed commands are listed with their respective names. This is also, where thecommands can be entered. ààààà 99999 Command Line

CLOCK: Display window for the analogue or digital clock. Switching by pressing the ANALOG button.

AGENDA: Here, you can create automatic controls depending on TIME/DATE or SUNRISE/SUNSET.ààààà 8.38.38.38.38.3 Agenda menu

1 Click into an �empty� space on one of the three TFT displays or the externalmonitors. The CREATE A WINDOW menu will open.

3.1.13.1.13.1.13.1.13.1.1 Listing of individual windows and functionsListing of individual windows and functionsListing of individual windows and functionsListing of individual windows and functionsListing of individual windows and functionsCLEAR ALL: Erases all windows on this screen/monitor.

CHANNEL: This window will display dimmer channels as figures.You have direct access to channels and values here.ààààà 3.53.53.53.53.5 Accessing Dimmer Channels directly

EXECUTOR: Within this window, you will have the option todisplay a sequence, which is assigned to anEXECUTOR fader or an EXECUTOR button. Amongother options, this is where global times can bechanged also. à à à à à 5.35.35.35.35.3 EXECUTOR window

FADER: Selected dimmer channels can be displayed as eitherbar or figure within this window. Here you will alsohave direct access to channels and values. à à à à à 3.53.53.53.53.5Accessing Dimmer Channels directly

FIXTURE: Displays all fixtures plus the various functions, values,status etc. Here you will have direct access to the

3.1 CREATING A WINDOW


44444

33333

44444

44444

3.1 CREATING A WINDOW

DESK STATUS: Displays the current software versions:VXWORKS: operating system with dateGrandMA: main program with date. If this line is displayed in green, the unit supports

4096 DMX channelsIO SUBSYSTEM: program for the second integrated computer (Motorola), internals, system

load, etc.

TIMECODE: Recording, Playing back, Editing and Saving SMPTE LTC Timecode controlled operations.ààààà 7.17.17.17.17.1 Timecode

PAN / TILT, DIMMER,GOBO, COLOUR,BEAM, FOCUS,CONTROL, SHAPERSand ALL: Creates new, edits and calls up individual PRESETS with name and number. à à à à à 3.73.73.73.73.7 Creating

and Calling up Presets

2 Select the window or function to be created with a left mouse click.

3 If you wish to move the newly created window, hold the window border with the left mouse button and move thewindow.

4 There are 3 ways to enlarge a window: Move the cursor carefully to the lower or right border or corner, until you willsee a small double-arrow next to the cursor. Now press and hold the left mouse button. By moving the mouse, thewindow can now be zoomed according to your requirements.

The most effective way to work with the grandMA is using the touchscreen and the encoder which is locatednext to the respective display.

3.1.23.1.23.1.23.1.23.1.2 Deleting a windowDeleting a windowDeleting a windowDeleting a windowDeleting a windowPress the DELETE button once. Click on the title bar of the window.

Or:Or:Or:Or:Or:

Click the headline with the right mouse button. In the next window, confirm with YES or DELETE.

Or:Or:Or:Or:Or:

When pressing the uppermost and lowermost VIEW buttons simultaneously, all windows on this TFT displaywill be deleted.


44444

55555

33333

3 .23 .23 .23 .23 .2 Saving VIEWSSaving VIEWSSaving VIEWSSaving VIEWSSaving VIEWSThe VIEW buttons on the touchscreens or the external monitors can be assigned with various views.

The buttons located beside the screens can be used for direct access to the VIEW buttons on the screens.

What can a button (key) be used for?

● You can save one or moreone or moreone or moreone or moreone or more displays on it,● you can save all all all all all currently created windows on all all all all all screens and both external

monitors on it,● or you can save a Macro function ààààà 7.17.17.17.17.1 Creating Macros

1 Organize a display or monitor ààààà 3.13.13.13.13.1 CREATING A WINDOW

2 Press STORE button once (STORE LED is on).

3 Press VIEWbutton or VIEW key once. The SELECT VIEW window will open.

4 Enter a name for the VIEW using the keyboard. The new name will bedisplayed in the top line.

5 By pressing the buttons 1�5 (selected button will turn dark-grey), selectthe display to be saved.

Pressing the button ALL SCREENS will save ALL displays on one viewbutton.

6 With the OK or ENTER button you can save and assign the view to theview button.

3.2 Saving VIEWS


11111 22222

33333

3 . 2 . 13 . 2 . 13 . 2 . 13 . 2 . 13 . 2 . 1Assigning VIEWSAssigning VIEWSAssigning VIEWSAssigning VIEWSAssigning VIEWSAll created views can by assigned to any view button.

Click on the view button with the right mouse button. The window SELECT will appear. In this window, makea left click on the VIEW button. Now, the window SELECT VIEW will appear:

1 The table shows all created VIEWs with their names.

2 The QTY column shows the number of saved displays and external monitors for the individual VIEWs.

3 Scrolling is possible by dragging the scrollbar on the right side.

4 Selecting a VIEW in the table will assign this view to the chosen button.

3 . 2 . 23 . 2 . 23 . 2 . 23 . 2 . 23 . 2 . 2View PView PView PView PView PoolooloolooloolIn the View Pool, all created Views are displayed and can be called up directly by selection.

3.2 Saving VIEWS


3 .33 .33 .33 .33 .3 Creating and calling up Fixtures and Dimmer GROUPSCreating and calling up Fixtures and Dimmer GROUPSCreating and calling up Fixtures and Dimmer GROUPSCreating and calling up Fixtures and Dimmer GROUPSCreating and calling up Fixtures and Dimmer GROUPSImportant and frequently used combinations of fixtures and dimmer channels can be saved in groups (currentlymax. 999 pcs.).

3.3.13.3.13.3.13.3.13.3.1 Creating fixture or dimmer groupsCreating fixture or dimmer groupsCreating fixture or dimmer groupsCreating fixture or dimmer groupsCreating fixture or dimmer groupsCreate a GROUP window on one of the TFT touchscreens. à à à à à 3.13.13.13.13.1 Creating a Window

● Use the touch screen or make a left mouse click on the individual Fixture within the FIXTURE SHEET or click onthe Dimmer channels in the CHANNEL or FADER SHEET.

The selectedselectedselectedselectedselected scanners or dimmer channels of a selected group can be called up one by one in a certainsequence. In selected groups, the individual Fixtures or Dimmer channels can be selected in a specific orderone after another. When selecting Fixtures or Channels for a group, make use of their order in which, aftercalling up the group, they are to be separately switched by using the NEXT/PREV button.

Or:Or:Or:Or:Or:● Press the FIXTURE button for a fixture group or the CHANNEL

button for dimmer groups (LED is on).

Pressing the ENTER key shortly will lock the Fixture or Channelin the Command Line.

● Enter the number of first fixture or dimmer channel, using thenumeric keypad.

● Now you can select the fixture or dimmer channel with therespectively following number by using the �+� key.

● The THRU key on the numeric keypad will select all fixtures anddimmer channels from... tofrom... tofrom... tofrom... tofrom... to including the last numberentered.

● Using the �� key, the fixture/dimmer channel with the followinginput number will not not not not not be selected.

● Confirm with ENTER; the selection will be processed.

The selected fixturesselected fixturesselected fixturesselected fixturesselected fixtures or channels will be displayed in theFIXTURE or CHANNEL window, and given in yellow characters.

Press the STORE button once (LED within the button is on). Using the touchscreen or left mouseclick, select the desired group button on the display containing the GROUP window. The selectedfixtures are now saved to this group (STORE LED is off).

You can now name this group, using the keyboard. Enter the names or descriptions and confirm withENTER.

Press the CLEAR button once. This erases the selected group of fixtures and dimmer channels.

For further groups, simply repeat all steps.

ààààà 2.102.102.102.102.10 Creating presets, effects and group buttons automatically

3.3 Creating and calling up Fixtures and Dimmer GROUPS


3.3.23.3.23.3.23.3.23.3.2 Calling up groupsCalling up groupsCalling up groupsCalling up groupsCalling up groupsGroups can be called up by:● A left mouse click● Direct touch on screen● Pressing the GROUP button once, entering the preset group number with the keyboard and confirming with

ENTER.● Press the GROUP button once. Pressing the ENTER key once will lock GROUP as preset in the Command Line.

Then, enter the group number on the numeric keypad and call it up pressing ENTER.By pressing the CLEAR button once shortly, all selected Fixtures and Channels are deleted (displayedin yellow).

Proceed as follows to separately activate selected Fixtures/Dimmers or called-up groups in the desired/stored order:

NEXT button once within a group or selection: forwards

Pressing the SET button once reselects all Fixtures and dimmer channels in the group.

PREV button once within a group or selection: backwards

3.3.43.3.43.3.43.3.43.3.4 Copying groupsCopying groupsCopying groupsCopying groupsCopying groupsPress the COPY button once (LED is on).

Select the Group Buttons in the GROUP window. By selecting several groups one after theother, that set of groups can be copied together.

Press the AT button once (LED is on).

Click on the position for the copied group in the GROUP window.

3.3 Creating and calling up Fixtures and Dimmer GROUPS

If there are more groups than can be displayed in the respective GROUP window, you can scroll within every�active� window (title bar in dark blue) on every screen by using the encoder wheel down on the right.

3.3.33.3.33.3.33.3.33.3.3 Moving GROUP buttons within a windowMoving GROUP buttons within a windowMoving GROUP buttons within a windowMoving GROUP buttons within a windowMoving GROUP buttons within a windowPress the MOVE button once (MOVE LED lights up).

Using the touch screen or left mouse button, click on the GROUP button and hold it down (a smallhand appears). Move the button to the another positon within this window and release it there.

Confirm with ENTER.

The functions Move, Copy or Delete should also be used for Executors, Pages, Sequences or Effects.

You can also insert Group Buttons.

Press the MOVE button twice (LED is blinking).

Using the touch screen or left mouse button, click on the GROUP button and hold it (a small handappears). Move the button to required position between the other buttons in this window and releaseit. All following buttons will be moved by one position to the right.


11111 22222

3 .43 .43 .43 .43 .4 Accessing Fixtures directly (in the FIXTURE SHEET)Accessing Fixtures directly (in the FIXTURE SHEET)Accessing Fixtures directly (in the FIXTURE SHEET)Accessing Fixtures directly (in the FIXTURE SHEET)Accessing Fixtures directly (in the FIXTURE SHEET)The individual fixture functions can always be accessed directly. Several fixtures can be controlled simultaneouslyby one function. The selection will determine which fixtures will react to Direct Access procedures (selectedfixtures will be marked in yellow writing in the FIXTURE window).

Within the FIXTURE window, you can locate, select and execute all functions of all visible fixtures.

1 Select the fixtures, where you wish to modify a value (the selected fixtures will be displayed in yellow characters).

Selection:

● Call up a fixture group. à à à à à 3.33.33.33.33.3 Creating and calling up Fixtures and Dimmer GROUPS

o r :o r :o r :o r :o r :● Select fixtures using the touchscreen.

o r :o r :o r :o r :o r :● Select fixtures by using the Fixture button and the numeric keypad. à à à à à 3.33.33.33.33.3 Creating and calling up Fixtures and

Dimmer GROUPS

o r :o r :o r :o r :o r :● A left mouse click on the individual fixtures.

2 Select the requested function by clicking on the button. Switch on the Preset Control Bar à à à à à 3.4.73.4.73.4.73.4.73.4.7 Options in theFixture Window.

The values can now be changed via the encoders, located below the right TFT display (all functions of the encoderswill be displayed directly on the screen; pressing the encoder will switch over).

The various groups can now be selected by pressing the FEATURE button.


The Trackball affects the PAN/TILT function only (if switched on).


The wheel affects dimmer values only.


Make a middle mouse click on the requested function and hold it. You can change the value by moving the mousewhile holding the middle mouse button.

For saving the settings à à à à à 44444 Cues and SequencesFor creating Presets à à à à à 3.73.73.73.73.7 Creating and calling up PresetsTo call up or create Effects à à à à à 6 6 6 6 6 Effects

3.4 Accessing Fixtures directly (in the FIXTURE SHEET)


You can also delete activated values of entire function groups of selected fixtures (Output will be set to Default ofactivated cue value).

If you wish to modify the selection ororororor the activated values of the fixtures:

● Press the CLEAR button:

When pressing the CLEAR button the firstfirstfirstfirstfirst time, the selection of fixtures will be deleted from theOUTPUT window (yellow characters turn grey).

● Press the CLEAR button again:

When pressing the CLEAR button the secondsecondsecondsecondsecond time, the activation of modified values will becanceled (red background).

● Press the CLEAR button one more time:

When pressing the CLEAR key the third third third third third time, all modified values will be reset (default or to theiroriginal setting prior to the activation).

After pressing the CLEAR button for the first time, the yellow LED in this button will flash. This means that onlythe selection was deleted. When you select other fixtures or dimmer channels now, the yellow LED will notflash anymore.


The modifiedmodifiedmodifiedmodifiedmodified values will be kept and displayed with red background.

3 . 4 . 13 . 4 . 13 . 4 . 13 . 4 . 13 . 4 . 1The ALIGN FunctionThe ALIGN FunctionThe ALIGN FunctionThe ALIGN FunctionThe ALIGN FunctionThe ALIGN function allows you to use four different modes modes modes modes modes of changing values.

ALIGN button pressed once (LED is on).

When changing activated values, the value of the first selected Channel/Fixture will be taken asstarting value (will not be changed), while the value of the last selected Channel/Fixture value will bethe one modified most, and all values in between will be distributed evenly.

ALIGN button pressed twice (LED is on).

When changing activated values, the last value of the last selected Channel/Fixture will be taken asfirst value (will not be changed), while the value of the first selected Channel/Fixture will be the onemodified most, and all values in between will be distributed evenly.

ALIGN button pressed 3 times (LED is on).

When changing activated values, the value of the selected Channel/Fixture value �in the middle� willbe taken as first value (will not be changed). The value of the first and last selected Channel/Fixturewill be the ones modified most, and all values in between will be distributed evenly.

You can also delete activated values of single fixtures (Output will be set to Default or activated cue value).

Press OFF button 1x (LED is on).

Click on the activated value in the Fixture Sheet.

Press a button for the respective function on the Preset Control Bar or click on that function withinthe Fixture Sheet.

The selection of single fixtures can also be deleted.

Press OFF button 1 x (LED is on).

Click on the Fixture button in the Group Window or on the Fixture Name in the Fixture Sheet.

ALIGN button pressed 4 times (LED is on).

When changing activated values, the middle value will be the one modified most, the values on theleft and right will not change, and the values in between will be distributed evenly.



3.4.23.4.23.4.23.4.23.4.2PAUSE FunctionPAUSE FunctionPAUSE FunctionPAUSE FunctionPAUSE FunctionWith the Pause Function you can temporarily freeze entire fixtures or just single functions of fixtures. Afteractivation of the Pause Function, no further changes will be put out at the DMX output. But you can still change andsave fixtures or single functions internally.

You can park single fixtures with all functions. Parked fixtures are displayed with a blue background.

Press PAUSE button 1x (LED is on).

Click on fixture or fixture button in the Group Window or click on fixture in the Fixture Sheet.

You can also park single functions of the fixtures. Parked fixtures are displayed with a blue background.


Click on the functions in the Preset Control Bar (Switch on Preset Control Bar à à à à à 3.4.73.4.73.4.73.4.73.4.7 Options in theFixture Window) or directy in the Fixture Sheet.

Parked fixtures or functions can be released again either all together or individually.

Press GO+ button 1x (LED is on).

Click on fixture or fixture button in the Group window or click on fixture in the Fixture Sheet.


Click on the functions within the Preset Control Bar or directly in the Fixture Sheet.



11111

22222

33333

3.4.3.4.3.4.3.4.3.4.33333 FADE and DELAFADE and DELAFADE and DELAFADE and DELAFADE and DELAY times in the FIXTURE windowY times in the FIXTURE windowY times in the FIXTURE windowY times in the FIXTURE windowY times in the FIXTURE windowAdditionallyAdditionallyAdditionallyAdditionallyAdditionally to the standard (Basic) FADE and DELAY times, individual durations can also be set for the individualfunctions in the FIXTURE window.

You will need these settings when creating Cues, in order to be able to work with different FADE or DELAY times forindividual functions.

1 Press the FADE or DELAY button (switching on the control bar à à à à à 3.4.73.4.73.4.73.4.73.4.7 Options in the Fixture window).

Or:Or:Or:Or:Or:

If the AUTO button is pressed (on the control bar or in the options, Switching on the Control bar. ààààà3.4.7 3.4.7 3.4.7 3.4.7 3.4.7 Options in the Fixture window), when pressing the TIME button once, the fixture sheet willswitch to FADEFADEFADEFADEFADE time mode. The second time, the fixture sheet will switch to DELAY time mode.

If the AUTO button is not pressed, the display will not switch over. The currently selected FADE orDELAY function will be displayed by an arrow on the Command Line control bar. ààààà 99999 Command Line

2 Choose a function, where you wish to program a time, other than the Basic time. You will find a button for eachfunction, displayed above the Encoder descriptions. By pressing these buttons (buttons will turn dark-grey), you canselect, which functions shall be affected by the change.

The various function groups can be selected by pressing the FEATURE button.

Using the SELECT/DESELECT button or by pressing the encoder on the right, you can either select all buttons (darkgrey) or erase them (light grey).

Now you can modify the IND. FADE time or IND. DELAY time (individual Fade/Delay Times) for the selected fixturesusing the left encoder.

Pressing the button PUSH FOR DELAY/FADE or pressing the second Encoder you can switch between IND. DELAYtime and IND. FADE time.



11111

22222

33333

44444


3.4.43.4.43.4.43.4.43.4.4 Selecting individual ValuesSelecting individual ValuesSelecting individual ValuesSelecting individual ValuesSelecting individual ValuesWhen saving settings, active values can also be saved. These values are indicated by a red background or by rednumbers.

By default, functions are activated together. ààààà 2.162.162.162.162.16 Settings within the ATTRIBUTE GROUPING menu

In order to split the activation for a function once, make a right mouse click on the set activationset activationset activationset activationset activation (red background)before savingbefore savingbefore savingbefore savingbefore saving it.

This will open the Change Activation/SelectionChange Activation/SelectionChange Activation/SelectionChange Activation/SelectionChange Activation/Selection window.

1 Functions, which are not not not not not supposed to be saved, need to be switched off via the respective buttons (buttons willturn from dark-gray to light-gray).

2 With the Set Activation for SelectionSet Activation for SelectionSet Activation for SelectionSet Activation for SelectionSet Activation for Selection button, the activation is separated for all selected Fixtures.

With the Set Activation for FixtureSet Activation for FixtureSet Activation for FixtureSet Activation for FixtureSet Activation for Fixture button, the activation for the individual Fixture (number and name beingdisplayed by the function buttons) is separated.

When saving, the individual active value is now being saved.

3 With the Deselect FixtureDeselect FixtureDeselect FixtureDeselect FixtureDeselect Fixture button, the individual Fixture is deselected. With the Clear SelectionClear SelectionClear SelectionClear SelectionClear Selection button, allselected Fixtures are deselected.

4 With the <<<< button, you can switch to the previous Fixture (number and name will be displayed above thefunction buttons). With the >>>> button, you can switch to the next Fixture.

With the CLOSE button, you can close the window.


11111

22222

33333


3.4.53.4.53.4.53.4.53.4.5 FIXTURE OPTIONFIXTURE OPTIONFIXTURE OPTIONFIXTURE OPTIONFIXTURE OPTIONIn the Fixture Sheet, you can adapt different basic settings for each individual Fixture.

Make a right mouse click on the Fixture. The FIXTURE OPTION window will open.

1 The Fixture can be renamed using the keyboard.

Next to TYPE the type of Fixture is displayed, next to NUMBER the corresponding number, and next to PATCH thepatched channel for this Fixture.

2 Pressing the PAN NORMAL button (display changes to PAN INVERSE) will invert the output of the PAN function.

Pressing the TILT NORMAL button (display changes to TILT INVERSE) will invert the output of the TILT function.

Pressing the NO SWAP button (display changes to SWAPPED) will invert the output of the PAN and TILT functions.

Pressing the WITH MASTER button (display changes to NO MASTER), the Dimmer value will be output without regardto the set GRANDMASTER.

If a Fixture was modified in this window, the Fixture�s name will be displayed on a blue background in the FixtureSheet. These changes can also be set while patching Fixtures. ààààà 2.4 2.4 2.4 2.4 2.4 Selecting DMX addresses for Fixtures

3 With the <<< button, you can switch to the previous Fixture. With the >>> button, you can switch to the nextFixture.


3 . 4 .3 . 4 .3 . 4 .3 . 4 .3 . 4 . 66666AUTO-SORT Function in the FIXTURE WindowAUTO-SORT Function in the FIXTURE WindowAUTO-SORT Function in the FIXTURE WindowAUTO-SORT Function in the FIXTURE WindowAUTO-SORT Function in the FIXTURE WindowPressing the �Auto Cols� button (dark background) will move the function column, for which the value is beingchanged, automatically to the left.Selecting Presets ororororor functions in the Preset Window (ààààà 3.73.73.73.73.7 Create Presets) will move the respective column in theFixture Window to the left.

Pressing the �Auto Rows� button (dark background) will move up those fixtures, selected via groups or directly byfixture button and numeric keypad.

3 . 4 .3 . 4 .3 . 4 .3 . 4 .3 . 4 . 77777SORT Function in the FIXTURE WindowSORT Function in the FIXTURE WindowSORT Function in the FIXTURE WindowSORT Function in the FIXTURE WindowSORT Function in the FIXTURE WindowPressing the SORT button will update the sorting (ààààà right) in the Fixture Window.


3.4.83.4.83.4.83.4.83.4.8 Options in the FIXTURE WindowOptions in the FIXTURE WindowOptions in the FIXTURE WindowOptions in the FIXTURE WindowOptions in the FIXTURE WindowTouch the touch screen on the left corner of the title bar.

Or:Or:Or:Or:Or:

Proceed with a right mouse click on top line.

The FIXTURE SHEET OPTIONS window will open.

LAYER TO DISPLAY: By pressing the respective button, the following values will be displayed as basic setting.

● Preset Values: The FIXTURE window will show the presets or values.● Fade: FADE times will be displayed.● Delay: DELAY times will be displayed.● Values Only: Only the values will be displayed.● DMX: The DMX output values will be displayed.● Id Executor: The Executor�s number and page will be displayed.● Id Sequence: The sequence�s number and the respective Cue will be

displayed.● Auto: If this button is pressed, the display will automatically toggle

between the different options when swapping with the TIMEbutton.

FONT SIZE: By pressing this button, you can choose between LARGE or SMALL characters in theFIXTURE window.

SORT BY: With the respective button, you can determine according to which criteria the fixtureswithin the column are to be sorted.

● Numbers: Fixtures will be sorted by numbers in the FIXTURE window.● Names: Fixtures will be sorted by name.● Selected Devices: The selectedselectedselectedselectedselected Fixtures will be moved upwards.● Active Values: Fixtures for which a value is activatedactivatedactivatedactivatedactivated, will be moved

upwards.● Dimmer Values: Fixtures will be sorted according to highest dimmer value.● Sort Ascending: Sorting by ascending values.

Sort Desending: Sorting by descending values.

READOUT: Pressing this button, you can switch between the following display options.

● %: Values will be displayed as percentages.● % +: Values will be displayed as percentage values; interim values

will be displayed next to the figure in form of 3 dots.● DEC: Values will be displayed as decimal numbers (0�255).● HEX: Values will be displayed as hexadecimal numbers (0�FF).

When pressing the Show Layer Control button (displayed in dark gray), a control bar will be displayed below theFixture. By pressing the respective buttons on the control bar, the display in the window will switch to the respectivevalue.

When pressing the Show Preset Control button (displayed in dark grey), a control bar will be displayed below thefixtures. Each function has its own button. The respective function will be activated by pressing the single buttonsin the control bar. It can be modified using the encoder. By pressing the FEATURE button (above the right encoder),you can select the various function groups.

A small rectangle is displayed in the right upper corner of each button. If it is displayed with black background, thismeans, that there have been no changes on this particular function. If the background color is red, this function hasbeen modified.

This window can be deleted by pressing the DELETE WINDOW button.

Pressing the CLOSE button will close the Option Window.

These settings will all be saved when saving the VIEWS (ààààà 3.2 3.2 3.2 3.2 3.2 Saving VIEWS).



11111

3 .53 .53 .53 .53 .5 Accessing Dimmer Channels directly (in the CHANNEL SHEET)Accessing Dimmer Channels directly (in the CHANNEL SHEET)Accessing Dimmer Channels directly (in the CHANNEL SHEET)Accessing Dimmer Channels directly (in the CHANNEL SHEET)Accessing Dimmer Channels directly (in the CHANNEL SHEET)The individual dimmer channels can always be accessed directly, provided that the desired channels have beenselected for direct access (selected channels will be displayed in yellow characters in the CHANNEL window).

1 Select the channels, for which you wish to modify a value (selected channels will be displayed in yellow characters).

Selection:

● Call up a dimmer group. ààààà 3.33.33.33.33.3 Creating and calling up Fixtures and Dimmer GROUPSOr:Or:Or:Or:Or:

● Select dimmers via the CHANNEL button and the numeric keypad. à à à à à 9 9 9 9 9 Command Line

Or:Or:Or:Or:Or:● Start with a left mouse click on the individual channels.

Or:Or:Or:Or:Or:● Make a left mouse click on the first channel and hold the mouse button down; by moving the mouse (creates a

LoopLoopLoopLoopLoop), all channels in this loop in this loop in this loop in this loop in this loop are being selected selected selected selected selected.

2 Values can be modified with the encoders (Encoder assignment is displayed on the screen above) or with the Wheel.

Or:Or:Or:Or:Or:

By direct entry into the Command Line (AT functions) you can also enter dimmer values à à à à à 99999 Command Line

Or:Or:Or:Or:Or:

Select channels with a middle mouse click and hold hold hold hold hold the mouse button down; the value will be modified by movingthe mouse while holding the middle mouse button down.

3.5 Accessing Dimmer Channels directly (in the CHANNEL SHEET)



3.5.13.5.13.5.13.5.13.5.1 CHANNEL ModeCHANNEL ModeCHANNEL ModeCHANNEL ModeCHANNEL ModeActivate CHANNEL Mode with the CHANNEL FADER buttons.

The assignment of Channels and Faders can be changed via the CHANNEL FADER buttons (for example:1�20, 21�40, etc.).

The assignment of a channel number to a Fader is listed on the TFT displays above the faders.

By pressing the CLEAR button, individual channels, which have been modified manually, can bereleased again while the selection of this channel will be deleted.

The respective channel can be selected using the button above the Fader.

In CHANNEL mode, the individual channel values can be set with the Faders.

The respective channel can be set to 100% using the button below the Fader.

In the TFT displays above the Faders, the assignment between channel numbers and Faders will be displayed.

The respective channel can be hidden using the lower button.

In order to modify the selection ororororor the active values of dimmer channels:

● Press CLEAR button:

Pressing the CLEAR button for the first first first first first time deletes the selected dimmer channels in the OUTPUTwindow (yellow characters turn grey).

The modified modified modified modified modified Values are kept and are displayed with red background.

● Press CLEAR button again:

Pressing the CLEAR button the secondsecondsecondsecondsecond time, takes off the activation of the modified values (redbackground).

● Press CLEAR button one more time:

Pressing the CLEAR button a third third third third third time, all changed values are reset (to Default or the previousposition before activation).

When pressing the CLEAR button the first time, the LED in this button will flash. This shows, that only theselection has been deleted. The yellow LED will stop flashing as soon as you start to select other fixtures ordimmer channels.


3.5.23.5.23.5.23.5.23.5.2ALIGN FunctionALIGN FunctionALIGN FunctionALIGN FunctionALIGN FunctionUsing the ALIGN function enables you to use four different function modes function modes function modes function modes function modes for changing values.

Press the ALIGN button once (LED is on).

When changing active values, the first value will be taken as starting value (will not be changed),while the last value is the one modified most, and all values in between will be distributed evenly.

Press the ALIGN button twice (LED is on).

When changing the active values, the last value will be taken as starting value (will not be changed),while the first value will be the one modified most, and all values in between will be distributedevenly.

Press the ALIGN button 3 times (LED is on).

When changing the active values, the middle value will be taken as starting value (will not bechanged), the first and last value will be the ones modified most, and all values in between will bedistributed evenly.


Press a button for the respective function on the Preset Control Bar or click on that function withinthe Fixture Sheet.


You can also delete active values of single dimmer channels .

3.5.33.5.33.5.33.5.33.5.3PAUSE FunctionPAUSE FunctionPAUSE FunctionPAUSE FunctionPAUSE FunctionWith the Pause Function you can temporarily freeze dimmer channels�. After activation of the Pause Function, nofurther changes will be put out at the DMX output. But you can still change and save dimmer channels internally.


Click on Dimmer button in the Group Window or click on dimmer channels in the Channel or FaderSheet. Parked dimmer channels will be displayed with a blue background.

Parked dimmer channels can also be released either entirely or separately.

Press GO+ button 1x (LED is on).

Click on dimmer button in the Group window or click on dimmer channels in the Channel or FaderSheet.


11111

22222

3.5.43.5.43.5.43.5.43.5.4 FADE and DELAFADE and DELAFADE and DELAFADE and DELAFADE and DELAY times in the CHANNEL windowY times in the CHANNEL windowY times in the CHANNEL windowY times in the CHANNEL windowY times in the CHANNEL windowIn addition toIn addition toIn addition toIn addition toIn addition to the standard (basic) FADE times, individual durations can also be set for the individual functionsin the FIXTURE window (not in the FADER CHANNEL window).

These settings are needed when creating Cues, so that you can work with different FADE or DELAY times forindividual channels.

1 Press the FADE or DELAY button (switching on the control bar à à à à à 3,5.73,5.73,5.73,5.73,5.7 Options in the Channel window).

Or:Or:Or:Or:Or:

If the AUTO button is pressed (on the control bar or in the options, Switching on the Control bar. ààààà 3,5.7 Options in the Fixture window), when pressing the TIME button once, this will switch thechannel sheet to the FADEFADEFADEFADEFADE time mode. The second time, this will switch the channel sheet to theDELAY time mode.

If the AUTO button is not pressed, the display will not switch over. The currently selected function ofthe FADE or DELAY Command Line will be displayed by an arrow on the control bar for the CommandLine ààààà 9 Command Line

2 Now you can modify the IND. FADE or IND. DELAY time for the selected dimmer channels using the left encoder.

You can switch between IND. FADE and IND. DELAY time by pushing either the PUSH FOR DELAY/FADE button or thesecond encoder.



3 . 5 . 53 . 5 . 53 . 5 . 53 . 5 . 53 . 5 . 5Link Fader-Function in the CHANNEL windowLink Fader-Function in the CHANNEL windowLink Fader-Function in the CHANNEL windowLink Fader-Function in the CHANNEL windowLink Fader-Function in the CHANNEL windowIf the Link Fader function is activated (button has a black background), all changes will automatically be transferredto the faders when in CHANNEL mode ( ààààà CHANNEL mode).

3.5.63.5.63.5.63.5.63.5.6 AUTO-SORT-Function in the CHANNEL windowAUTO-SORT-Function in the CHANNEL windowAUTO-SORT-Function in the CHANNEL windowAUTO-SORT-Function in the CHANNEL windowAUTO-SORT-Function in the CHANNEL windowIf the AUTO-SORT-function is activated (button has a black background), the selected channels in the CHANNELwindow will automatically be moved to the left and upwards.

3.5.73.5.73.5.73.5.73.5.7 Options within the CHANNEL windowOptions within the CHANNEL windowOptions within the CHANNEL windowOptions within the CHANNEL windowOptions within the CHANNEL windowTouch the touch screen on the left corner of the title bar.

Or:Or:Or:Or:Or:

Start with a right mouse click on top line. The CHANNEL SHEET OPTIONS window will open.

Layer to Display (not in the FADER CHANNEL window):By pressing the respective buttons, the following basic values will be displayed:

● Values: Values are displayed in the CHANNEL window.● Fade: FADE times will be displayed.● Delay: DELAY times will be displayed.● DMX: The DMX output values are displayed.● Id Executor: The Executor�s number and page are displayed (only valid for Executor buttons).● Id Sequence: The Sequence�s number and respective Cue are displayed (only valid for Executor buttons).● Auto: If this button is pressed, the display will automatically swap in this window when using the

TIME button.

Font Size (not in the FADER CHANNEL window):Pressing this button, you can choose between LARGE or SMALL characters in this window.

Sort by:With the respective button, you can define the channels� sorting order in the window.

● Numbers: Within the CHANNEL window channels are sorted by numbers.● Names: Channels will be sorted by name.● Selected Devices: The selectedselectedselectedselectedselected channels will be moved to left/above.● Active Values: Channels for which a value is activatedactivatedactivatedactivatedactivated, will be moved upwards.● Values: Channels will be sorted by highest value.● Sort Ascendig: Sorting by ascending numbers.

Sort Desending: Sorting by descending numbers.

Readout:By pressing this button, you can choose the display criteria for the values.

● %: Values will be displayed as percentages.● % +: Values will be given as percentage values; interim values will be displayed next to the

figure in form of dots.● DEC: Values will be given as decimal numbers (0�255).● HEX: Values will be given as hexadecimal numbers (0�FF).

Direction:By pressing this button, you can choose between sorting the channels from left to right or from top to bottom.

Colums:● The figure indicates, how many channels will be displayed in one column. Clicking on that figure, you can

enter a new number via keyboard; confirm with ENTER. The new number will automatically be taken over.● With this button, you can choose between either AUTO WRAP (automatic adaptation of size when changing

the number of channels in this window) or NO WRAP (size of channels will notnotnotnotnot be adjusted when modifyingthe number).

Name Field:● With this button, you can switch between SHOW (displays the channel names) and HIDE (no names are

displayed).

The Channel window can be deleted by pressing the DELETE button.

By pressing the CLOSE button, the Option window will be closed.

All these settings (excl. �LINK�) will be saved when saving the VIEWS (ààààà 3.23.23.23.23.2 Saving VIEWS).



11111

22222

33333

3 . 5 . 83 . 5 . 83 . 5 . 83 . 5 . 83 . 5 . 8DIMMER OPTIONDIMMER OPTIONDIMMER OPTIONDIMMER OPTIONDIMMER OPTIONIn the Channel Sheet, you can adapt different basic settings for each individual Dimmer channel.

Make a right mouse click on the Channel.

The DIMMER OPTION window will open.

1 The Dimmer channel can be renamed using the keyboard.

Next to TYPE the type of Dimmer is displayed, next to NUMBER the corresponding number, and next to PATCH thepatched channel for this Channel.

2 Pressing the WITH MASTER button (display changes to NO MASTER), the Dimmer channel will be output withoutregard to the set GRANDMASTER.

If a Dimmer channel was modified in this window, the Dimmer channel�s number or name will be displayed on a bluebackground in the Channel Sheet.

These modifications can also be defined while patching Dimmer channels. ààààà 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 Selecting DMX addresses forDimmers

3 With the <<< button, you can switch to the previous Dimmer channel. With the >>> button, you can switch to thenext Dimmer channel.




3.6 Colours used in the FIXTURE, CHANNEL and FADER window

3 .63 .63 .63 .63 .6 Colours used in the FIXTURE, CHANNEL and FADER windowColours used in the FIXTURE, CHANNEL and FADER windowColours used in the FIXTURE, CHANNEL and FADER windowColours used in the FIXTURE, CHANNEL and FADER windowColours used in the FIXTURE, CHANNEL and FADER window

Input or Function Status Channel Dimmer Fixturenumber/ Channel AttributeAttribute Value Value

Channel or attribute not selected, gray gray graynot used, or released no value3x CLEAR

Not selected, not selected, but gray yellow yellowbut value from output value >0%any Executor

Dimmer not selected, not selected, but gray blue-green yellowlast fade on Master output value >0%Sequence did not changethe value

Dimmer not selected, not selected, but gray green yellowlast fade on Master output value >0%Sequence decreasedthe value (DOWN)

Dimmer not selected, not selected, but gray magenta yellowlast fade on Master output value >0%Sequence increasedthe value (UP)

Not selected, not selected, but gray White on dark- White on dark-last change was manual manual changed red background red background

Manuell calling up selected, yellow gray graybut not active

Again manual Activation active yellow white on red white on redor changed by Fader background backgroundor Encoder

Selection deleted by not selected, not gray White on dark- White on dark-CLEAR button active, but selected red background red background

Activation deleted by not selected, but grey white whiteCLEAR button manually changed

Not selected, only output grey yellow yellowbut value from anyExecutor (except Master)

Not selected, not selected, gray Turquoise on dark- White on dark-but Preset activated value fromPreset red background red background

Selected, after Preset selected, yellow Turquoise on White on redwas activated value fromPreset red background background

Activation deleted Not selected, gray White on tur- Whiteby CLEAR value from Preset quoise background


33333

3 .73 .73 .73 .73 .7 Creating and calling up PresetsCreating and calling up PresetsCreating and calling up PresetsCreating and calling up PresetsCreating and calling up PresetsThere are certain values for the functions of fixtures, which will be needed again and again, for example the valuesfor individual colours of the color wheel. These values can be programmed as presets in the respective PRESETwindow and can here be called up again.

If you have presets for the fixtures be created automatically (CREATE PRESETS), these pre-recorded presets will beavailable in the respective windows. ààààà 2.102.102.102.102.10 Creating Presets, Effects and Group buttons automatically

1 Create a window for all functions for which presets are to be used and position it on a display.

2 In the GROUP window, select those fixtures, for which you want to create a Preset, by a simple touch or mouse click(fixtures have to be displayed in yellow in the FIXTURE window).

3 On the display, select the Preset group, for which you want to create a Preset, using the Touchscreen or by a leftmouse click on the title bar, for example: In the Preset window PAN/TILT.

Values and positions can be changed by:

● Encoders (all functions and the assignment will be displayed on the right display above the encoders),● Trackball (only PAN /TILT), if activated,● Wheel (only for dimmer values),● Middle mouse button (click on a value in the FIXTURE or CHANNEL window and hold it; the value will be changed

by moving the mouse while holding the middle mouse button).

● Switch on the Trackball by pressing the TRACKBALL ON button (the integrated LED must be on).Now you can control the selected fixtures via the trackball (PAN/TILT) . Changed (active) valueswill be displayed in the OUTPUT window by a red background colour.

3.7 Creating and calling up Presets


● Shortly push STORE button (STORE LED comes on). Select the required location on the displayshowing the PAN/TILT window by a simple touch or with left mouse click. These values are nowsaved in thisthisthisthisthis location (STORE LED is off).

● Now enter a name for the preset using the keyboard: confirm with ENTER.

If you want to save more presets for the same fixtures and functions, start again with step 3, until allpresets for these fixtures/channels are done.

● Press CLEAR button once:

When pressing the CLEAR button for the first first first first first time, the selection for all fixtures in the FIXTUREsheet will be deleted (yellow characters will turn grey).

The modified (active) values will be preserved and are displayed on red background.

Pressing the CLEAR button a third third third third third time will reset all modified values (Default or to the positionbefore the modification).

To create presets for other fixtures and functions, start again with step 5 and select the respectivefixtures/channels and functions.

3 . 7 . 13 . 7 . 13 . 7 . 13 . 7 . 13 . 7 . 1Moving Preset Buttons within the WindowMoving Preset Buttons within the WindowMoving Preset Buttons within the WindowMoving Preset Buttons within the WindowMoving Preset Buttons within the WindowPress MOVE button 1x (LED comes on).

Activate the button in the respective window by either using the touchscreen or making a left mouseclick on the button and hold (a hand symbol appears). Move the button to the required location withinthis window and release it.

You can also insert preset buttons.

● Press CLEAR button again:

Pressing the CLEAR button the second second second second second time will cancel the activation of the modified values (redbackground).

● Press CLEAR button a 3rd time:

Press MOVE button 2x (LED flashes).

Activate the button in the respective preset window using the touchscreen or a left mouse click onthe button and hold it (hand symbol appears). Move the button to the desired location between theother buttons and release it. The following buttons will all be moved by one position to the right.

You can also save presets including several functions on one button. These presets can be created in any presetgroup.

Push STORE button and holdholdholdholdhold. The following selection appears on the right TFT-Display:

● Shortly pressing the Preset Filter ON button will switch it to Preset Filter OFF.

● Now select the desired location with touchscreen or left mouse button. These values are now saved in thisthisthisthisthis(Preset-) location (STORE LED is off).

● Enter a name for the preset using the keyboard; confirm with ENTER.

ààààà 4.5 4.5 4.5 4.5 4.5 Update Cue or Preset



Manual FadeManual FadeManual FadeManual FadeManual Fade

Select the Fixtures or Dimmers, for which you want to call up a preset (Fixtures/Dimmers have to be displayed inyellow). Now, the individual presets can be called up for the selected Fixtures. The called-up presets and their nameswill be displayed in the FIXTURE windows.

If you select a preset directly, without having selected Fixtures or Dimmer channels, all Fixtures and Dimmers, forwhich presets had been created, will be selected. The preset can now be called up by pressing the respective button.

Using the Fader next to the right display, you can either define Preset Fade times or fade overpresets manually.

Press the button above the Fader once (red LED is on). Select the desired Fade time using the Fader.The selected Fade time will be used when presets are being called up.

Press the button above the Fader once more (green LED is on). Select your Presets. With the Fader,you can now fade over towards the selected Preset. Default setting for the Fader to fade justupwards or in both directions ààààà 2.142.142.142.142.14 Settings in the DEFAULTS menu below the ExecutorDefaults Crossfade.

3.7.33.7.33.7.33.7.33.7.3 Calling up PresetsCalling up PresetsCalling up PresetsCalling up PresetsCalling up Presets

3.7.43.7.43.7.43.7.43.7.4 FREEZE FunctionFREEZE FunctionFREEZE FunctionFREEZE FunctionFREEZE FunctionBy activating the FREEZE function, called-up Presets can be locked. As long as the FREEZE Function is switched on,the called-up preset can not be overwritten by any Cues, Sequences or Chasers.

Press the FREEZE button once (LED is on).

Select a Preset � the selected Preset will be activated and can no longer be modified by Cues,Sequences or Chasers.

In order to deactivate the FREEZE function, press the FREEZE button once more (LED is off).


3.7.23.7.23.7.23.7.23.7.2 Copying PresetsCopying PresetsCopying PresetsCopying PresetsCopying PresetsPress the COPY button once (LED is on).

Select the Preset Buttons in the respective PRESET Window. By selecting various presets,several presets can be copied at the same time.

Press AT button 1x (LED is on).

Click on the position for the copied presets in the PRESET Window.

Press the ENTER button once.

à 3.4.2 Pause Function


3 .83 .83 .83 .83 .8 Deleting Groups, Sequences, Views etc.Deleting Groups, Sequences, Views etc.Deleting Groups, Sequences, Views etc.Deleting Groups, Sequences, Views etc.Deleting Groups, Sequences, Views etc.For all following Deletions, the DELETE button has to be pressed in advance (LED is on).For all following Deletions, the DELETE button has to be pressed in advance (LED is on).For all following Deletions, the DELETE button has to be pressed in advance (LED is on).For all following Deletions, the DELETE button has to be pressed in advance (LED is on).For all following Deletions, the DELETE button has to be pressed in advance (LED is on).

Deleting Groups:Deleting Groups:Deleting Groups:Deleting Groups:Deleting Groups: Select the respective Group by touch or left mouse click.


Press the GROUP button. Enter a Group number using the numeric keypad andconfirm with ENTER.

Deleting Presets:Deleting Presets:Deleting Presets:Deleting Presets:Deleting Presets: Select Preset in the respective window by touch or left mouse click.


Press the PRESET button. Enter a Preset Function number (e.g.: 3 for Gobo)followed by �.� and the Preset number; confirm with ENTER.

Deleting VIEW Assignments:Deleting VIEW Assignments:Deleting VIEW Assignments:Deleting VIEW Assignments:Deleting VIEW Assignments: Select a VIEW with the VIEW button on the side of the numeric keypad, via theTouchscreen or a left mouse click.

Deleting a VIEW:Deleting a VIEW:Deleting a VIEW:Deleting a VIEW:Deleting a VIEW: Press the VIEW button (LED is on). The SELECT VIEW window appears; nowselect the window to be deleted. The VIEW Name will be maintained, but withoutany contents. All assignments to VIEW buttons are now deleted.

Deleting a MACRO:Deleting a MACRO:Deleting a MACRO:Deleting a MACRO:Deleting a MACRO: Press the MACRO button (LED is on). The SELECT MACRO window appears; nowselect the macro to be deleted. The MACRO Name will be maintained, butwitout any contents. All assignments to MACRO buttons are now deleted.

Deleting an EXECUTOR:Deleting an EXECUTOR:Deleting an EXECUTOR:Deleting an EXECUTOR:Deleting an EXECUTOR: Press the desired EXECUTOR button.


Deleting the EXECUTOR on the currentcurrentcurrentcurrentcurrent page:� Press the EXECUTOR button next to the numeric keypad (LED is on). Enter the

EXECUTOR number via the numeric keypad and confirm with ENTER.

Deleting the EXECUTOR on anotheranotheranotheranotheranother page:� Press the EXECUTOR button next to the numeric keypad (LED is on). Now,

enter the PAGE number.

Then, press the full stop key and the number of the EXECUTOR and confirmwith ENTER.

Example:Example:Example:Example:Example: EXECUTOR 5 on PAGE 3 is to be deleted:Entry:Entry:Entry:Entry:Entry: [DELETE button] [EXECUTOR button] [3] [.] [5] [ENTER]

Or:Or:Or:Or:Or:

� Press the EXECUTOR button next to the numeric keypad (LED is on). Enterthe EXECUTOR number via the numeric keypad.

� Press the PAGE button next to the numeric keypad (LED is on). Enter thePAGE number via the numeric keypad and confirm with ENTER.

Deleting Sequences:Deleting Sequences:Deleting Sequences:Deleting Sequences:Deleting Sequences: Press the SEQUENCE button. Enter the number of Sequence via the numerickeypad and confirm with ENTER.

Deleting CUES:Deleting CUES:Deleting CUES:Deleting CUES:Deleting CUES: Press the SEQUENCE button. Enter the number of Sequence via the numerickeypad. Press the CUE button and enter the cue number via numeric keypad;confirm with ENTER.

If no sequence number is entered, the Cue of the Master (default) sequence isdeleted.

Deleting a PAGE:Deleting a PAGE:Deleting a PAGE:Deleting a PAGE:Deleting a PAGE: Press the PAGE button next to the numeric keypad. Enter the PAGE number viathe numeric keypad and confirm with ENTER. The complete PAGE with allEXECUTOR faders and buttons is deleted.

3.8 Deleting Groups, Sequences, Views etc.


4 .14 .14 .14 .14 .1 Creating Cues (separate memories)Creating Cues (separate memories)Creating Cues (separate memories)Creating Cues (separate memories)Creating Cues (separate memories)The actual stage setting can be saved as a Cue and be called up via the EXECUTOR buttons or faders.

● All changedchangedchangedchangedchanged (active) values (recommended setting),● allallallallall momentary settings (complete Output),● or allallallallall values of the selectedselectedselectedselectedselected Fixtures and channels

can be saved as Cues.

4 . 1 . 14 . 1 . 14 . 1 . 14 . 1 . 14 . 1 . 1Creating new CuesCreating new CuesCreating new CuesCreating new CuesCreating new CuesDefine the stage setting via direct access or presets. ààààà 3.43.43.43.43.4 and 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 Accessing Dimmer Channels directly or 3.73.73.73.73.7Calling up Presets

This shall now be saved as CUE in the following way:

Press the STORE button and holdholdholdholdhold it. The following options and encoder names will appear on theright TFT display:

4.1 Creating Cues (separate memories)

44444 Cues and SequencesCues and SequencesCues and SequencesCues and SequencesCues and SequencesCues are individual stage settings, which can be assigned and saved directly to and on so-called EXECUTOR buttonsor EXECUTOR Faders.

Several cues in line are called a sequence, which can also be assigned and saved to and on so-called EXECUTORbuttons or EXECUTOR Faders.

If cues and sequences are created on the basis of Presets, a later change of this Preset will automatically cause therespective change of all cues and sequences in this Preset.

Thus, the time-consuming check and correction of each Cue becomes unnecessary.

T IPT IPT IPT IPT IP Therefore, we recommend to use the Preset functions as often as possible.

EXECUTOR buttons or Faders can be used and can have assignments for multiple created sequences.

EXECUTOR Faders and buttons are organised pagewise (in PAGES). You can work on several PAGES simultaneously.When using motor faders, always those motor faders will be moving which had been activated on that respectivePAGE.

With the EXECUTOR buttons it is possible to call up the Cues, Sequences and Chasers. à 5.1.3 Buttons and Faders.

For the dimmer channels, the respective FADER and the Grandmaster always has to beFor the dimmer channels, the respective FADER and the Grandmaster always has to beFor the dimmer channels, the respective FADER and the Grandmaster always has to beFor the dimmer channels, the respective FADER and the Grandmaster always has to beFor the dimmer channels, the respective FADER and the Grandmaster always has to bepushed upwards.pushed upwards.pushed upwards.pushed upwards.pushed upwards.

EXECUTOR buttons do not have a Master and are therefore activated immediately. If dimmer values are called up viaCues or Sequences assigned to EXECUTOR buttonsassigned to EXECUTOR buttonsassigned to EXECUTOR buttonsassigned to EXECUTOR buttonsassigned to EXECUTOR buttons, these values will be overwritten (ààààà LTP principle) whencalling up the same dimmers via Executor buttons later. In practical terms this means: Dimmers, serving as �standard�console (HTP), have to be assigned to the Executor Faders.


11111

22222

1 Press this button (selected button will receive dark-grey background colour):

● Active Values: Save onlyonlyonlyonlyonly the activeactiveactiveactiveactive values (all values in the FIXTURE/CHANNEL window which areshown with a red background colourred background colourred background colourred background colourred background colour).

● All: Save allallallallall momentary settings (all fixture and channel values).● All for Selected Devices: All All All All All values of the selectedselectedselectedselectedselected fixtures and channels are being saved (the fixture/channel

numbers will be marked in yellow).

For thisthisthisthisthis CUE, set the following parameters via the encoders:

● TRIGGER: Call of the CUE by GO, SOUND, TIME or FOLLOW (i.e. after all previous durations have ended)or automatically at a set point of time.

● BASIC-FADE: CUE will be faded in with a set time; this is only possible with �FADE� functions. ààààà 2.82.82.82.82.8 SingleChannel-specific Adjustments for the Current Show (point 10) and ààààà 2.12.12.12.12.11 1 1 1 1 EDITING FIXTURES(modify) (point 9)

● SNAP DELAY: The values of the CUE will be called up with delay (only with �SNAP� functions).

● OUTFADE TIME: Dimmer channels, which become smallerbecome smallerbecome smallerbecome smallerbecome smaller in the next Cue, will be faded with the setduration.

● IND. FADETIME: All additional individual FADE times set in the FIXTURE Sheet.● IND. DELAYTIME: All additional individual DELAY times set in the FIXTURE Sheet.

Release the STORE button (LED stays on).

Cues can be saved on EXECUTOR faders or EXECUTOR buttons.

Define the assignment position of the Cue by pressing the EXECUTOR button once. Whensaving to an EXECUTOR FADER, press a button above or below the fader once.

The CUE is now assigned to this EXECUTOR button or EXECUTOR fader and saved to theSequence Pool. This way it is possible, to assign the same Cue more often than once. ààààà 5.15.15.15.15.1ASSIGN menu (Assignment to EXECUTOR)

Repeat all steps to create the next Cue.

Pressing the CLEAR button: once - will delete the selection, twice � will delete the active values andreset all values then.



4.1.24.1.24.1.24.1.24.1.2 Overwriting a CueOverwriting a CueOverwriting a CueOverwriting a CueOverwriting a Cue

If you wish to overwrite a Cue completely, simply use the same EXECUTOR fader or EXECUTOR button once again.The following window will appear:

In order to overwrite this cue completely, press the OVERWRITE button.

4 . 1 . 34 . 1 . 34 . 1 . 34 . 1 . 34 . 1 . 3Merging a CueMerging a CueMerging a CueMerging a CueMerging a CueWhen merging cues, all existing and saved settings will be maintained. The newly set values will be saved and addedto the cue, while already existing values will be overwritten.

If you wish to merge a cue, simply use the same EXECUTOR Fader or EXECUTOR button once again. The SAVE windowwill appear (as above). In order to merge this cue, press the MERGE button.

4.1.44.1.44.1.44.1.44.1.4 Removing a CueRemoving a CueRemoving a CueRemoving a CueRemoving a CueIn the removing operation, only those parts of the Cue will be taken out (deleted) of the already existing Cue that areactive (red).

You can also remove some part of a complete sequence by entering: [STORE] [SEQUENCE] [Sequence number][CUE] [1] [THRU] [number of last Cue] [ENTER]. A window will open in which you confirm your operation bypressing the REMOVE button. (This syntax does also apply for �OVERWRITE� and �MERGE�.)

Caution!Caution!Caution!Caution!Caution! In NON-TRACKING mode, only Dimmer channels of the first copied Cue are taken account of. Forthe following Cues, the Dimmer values are �0� and have to be reprogrammed manually.

4 .24 .24 .24 .24 .2 Programming SequencesProgramming SequencesProgramming SequencesProgramming SequencesProgramming SequencesSequence is the generic term for a combination of cues, with the option of various Fade and Delay times per channeland cue. Sequences can be saved either on an EXECUTOR fader or an EXECUTOR button.

Save the first Cue (first step of a sequence) either on an EXECUTOR fader or an EXECUTOR button. à à à à à 4.14.14.14.14.1 CreatingCues

Set the second Cue (next step of the sequence) as before. When saving the second Cue, use the same EXECUTORfader or EXECUTOR button. Now, the SAVE window will appear:

In order to create a Sequence (more than one Cue) now, press the CREATE SECOND CUE button. The saved Cue willnow be saved in this Sequence as the second step.

In the ASSIGN menu, you can define whether this Sequence should be executed in TRACKING or NON-TRACKINGmode. TRACKING and NON TRACKING do only refer to Dimmer values. ààààà 5.1.4 5.1.4 5.1.4 5.1.4 5.1.4 EXECUTOR SETTINGS

Create the next Cue for any other step and use the same EXECUTOR fader or button when saving.

4.1 Creating Cues (separate memories) / 4.2 Programming Sequences


4.2.14.2.14.2.14.2.14.2.1 Copying SequencesCopying SequencesCopying SequencesCopying SequencesCopying SequencesOnce a Sequence has been set, it can be copied completely with all Cues, Fade and Delay times.

Press the SEQUENCE button once (LED is on).

Using the numeric keypad, enter the number of the Sequence to be copied. All sequences andtheir numbers will be displayed in the Assign menu. ààààà 5.15.15.15.15.1 ASSIGN Menu

Press the COPY button once (LED is on).


Using the numeric keypad, enter the number of the new Sequence and confirm with ENTER.


4.2.24.2.24.2.24.2.24.2.2 Including CuesIncluding CuesIncluding CuesIncluding CuesIncluding CuesSet a Cue ààààà 4.14.14.14.14.1 Creating Cues

Press the STORE button once (LED is on).

Press the SEQUENCE button once (LED is on).

Enter the number of the Sequence using the numeric keypad.

Example: A new Cue is to be included between Cue 3 and Cue 4. This new Cue will be named for example Cue no.3.1(numbers between 3.001 and 3.999 are possible).This way, 999 Cues can be included between twoCues.

Press the CUE button once (LED is on).

Enter the number of the newnewnewnewnew Cue via numeric keypad and confirm with ENTER.


4 . 2 . 44 . 2 . 44 . 2 . 44 . 2 . 44 . 2 . 4LOAD CUELOAD CUELOAD CUELOAD CUELOAD CUEYou can use LOAD CUE in order to directly call up a certain cue with either one or several executors.

Press the GOTO button twice (LED is blinks).

Select an executor by shortly pressing a button.

A window with a chart appears. All cues of this sequence are listed in this chart.

If you select one of these cues, it will be loaded. This cue will be displayed as next (red blinkingbackground) in the small executor window above the executor.

Start this cue with the GO button.

Cues within the Mastersequence can be directly loadedCues within the Mastersequence can be directly loadedCues within the Mastersequence can be directly loadedCues within the Mastersequence can be directly loadedCues within the Mastersequence can be directly loadedPress GOTO button twice (LED is on).

Enter Cue number using the keypad and confirm with ENTER.

The Cue will be loaded and displayed as next (red blinking background) in the small executorwindow above the executor.

Start this cue with the GO button.

4.2.34.2.34.2.34.2.34.2.3 Default Sequence (Master Sequence)Default Sequence (Master Sequence)Default Sequence (Master Sequence)Default Sequence (Master Sequence)Default Sequence (Master Sequence)When creating sequences, Cues can directly be saved on a Default Sequence.

Press the SELECT button once (LED is on).

Select the respective EXECUTOR, which shall run the Default Sequence by pressing the respectiveEXECUTOR button once. The headline of the small EXECUTOR window will be green.

Push STORE button 1x (LED flashes).

Push ENTER button 1x; the created cue is now saved in the Master Sequence.

Set the first Cue of the Default Sequence. ààààà 4.14.14.14.14.1 Creating Cues

The Cue will always be called up as if the Sequence would run from the very beginning.The Cue will always be called up as if the Sequence would run from the very beginning.The Cue will always be called up as if the Sequence would run from the very beginning.The Cue will always be called up as if the Sequence would run from the very beginning.The Cue will always be called up as if the Sequence would run from the very beginning.That means, all previous steps will be accounted for and the result will be realized immediatelyThat means, all previous steps will be accounted for and the result will be realized immediatelyThat means, all previous steps will be accounted for and the result will be realized immediatelyThat means, all previous steps will be accounted for and the result will be realized immediatelyThat means, all previous steps will be accounted for and the result will be realized immediatelyafterwards. (afterwards. (afterwards. (afterwards. (afterwards. (As far as Dimmers are concerned, this function depends on whether TrackingAs far as Dimmers are concerned, this function depends on whether TrackingAs far as Dimmers are concerned, this function depends on whether TrackingAs far as Dimmers are concerned, this function depends on whether TrackingAs far as Dimmers are concerned, this function depends on whether Trackinghad been activated in the ASSIGN menuhad been activated in the ASSIGN menuhad been activated in the ASSIGN menuhad been activated in the ASSIGN menuhad been activated in the ASSIGN menu. . . . . à 5.1.45.1.45.1.45.1.45.1.4 EXECUTOR SETTINGS)))))

In the Default Sequence, Cues can be called up directlyIn the Default Sequence, Cues can be called up directlyIn the Default Sequence, Cues can be called up directlyIn the Default Sequence, Cues can be called up directlyIn the Default Sequence, Cues can be called up directlyPress the GOTO Button once (LED is on).

Enter the Cue number on the numeric keypad and confirm with ENTER. The Cue will be called upwith the preset duration (ààààà 2.142.142.142.142.14 Settings in the DEFAULTS menu).

When calling up Cues directly, you can enter a FADE or DELAY time using the TIME button.

After having entered the Cue number, press the TIME button for the FADE time once and enter theduration using the numeric keypad, or press the TIME button once more for the DELAY time, enterthe duration using the numeric keypad and confirm with enter. The Cue will be called up with theentered duration.

4.2 Programming Sequences

TIPTIPTIPTIPTIP If no EXECUTOR button has been selected before saving, and you confirm with ENTER, the saved Cue will always beadded to the current Default Sequence.


4.2.44.2.44.2.44.2.44.2.4 Calling sequences or chasers (Playback)Calling sequences or chasers (Playback)Calling sequences or chasers (Playback)Calling sequences or chasers (Playback)Calling sequences or chasers (Playback)Using the EXECUTOR button, you can call up the saved Sequences directly.

If the green LED in the button is on, a Cue or a Sequence is saved on this button.

If the yellow LED is on or is flashing, this Cue, the Sequence or the saved Chaser isactivated.

The yellow LED indicates the beat of a Chaser or a Sequence.

Push up the respective Fader for the EXECUTOR faders to see the dimmer values.Call up the Cue using the Go+ button (standard setting: button below the Fader). Ifthe green LED in the button above the Fader is on, a Cue or a Sequence is saved onthis button.

If the yellow LED is on or is flashing, this Cue, the Sequence or the saved Chaser isactivated. The yellow LED indicates the beat of a Chaser or a Sequence.

Using the PAGE buttons, you can additionally select other pages. Using the PAGEbuttons, you can additionally select other pages. à 5.45.45.45.45.4 PAGE Administration (PAGE)

With the Fader right to the EXECUTOR button, you can either set fixed fade timesor perform a fade-in manually when calling up Cues using the EXECUTOR buttons.

Press the button above the Fader once (red LED is on). Set the desired fade timeusing the Fader. When selecting Cues using the EXECUTOR buttons, only the fadetime set here will be used (does also apply for SNAPDELAY times).

Press the button above the Fader again (green LED is on). Select the Cue using theEXECUTOR button. Using the Fader, you can now fade to the selected Cue. Defaultsetting for the Fader to fade just upwards or in both directions ààààà 2.142.142.142.142.14 Settings inthe DEFAULTS menu below the Executor Defaults Crossfade.


With the PREVIEW function, Cues in the FIXTURE SHEET or CHANNEL SHEET will bedisplayed (without output to the DMX output).

Press the PREVIEW button once and call up the desired Cue using the EXECUTORbutton.


1111122222

44444

33333

55555

66666

4 .34 .34 .34 .34 .3 Editing SequencesEditing SequencesEditing SequencesEditing SequencesEditing SequencesDuring editing procedures, you can change allallallallall values of the various cues, add values or delete them. The X-FADEand DELAY times can be adapted, and the call of various cues via GO button, X-FADER, SOUND or TIME can bedefined.

Except as indicated in this chapter, there are three other ways:ààààà 4.1.2, 4.1.3, 4.1.4 4.1.2, 4.1.3, 4.1.4 4.1.2, 4.1.3, 4.1.4 4.1.2, 4.1.3, 4.1.4 4.1.2, 4.1.3, 4.1.4 Overwriting, expanding, removing Cuesààààà 4.3.44.3.44.3.44.3.44.3.4 Update Cues or Presetsààààà 5.35.35.35.35.3 EXECUTOR window

1 You will find the addressed EXECUTOR fader or button in the headline, giving the number of the PAGE and thesequence by its name.

2 The second line will give you the functions of the columns.● No.: Number of Cue● NAME: Name of Cue● MIB: Activate MIB (Move In Black function) individually for each cue. Activate it by selecting a cell and

shortly pressing on the encoder on the right side of the display. Activation is confirmed by YES.

MIB can only be used in cells where a � ***** � is displayed.

Press the EDIT button (LED is on).

Select the cue or sequence with the respective EXECUTOR button.

Or:Or:Or:Or:Or:

Make a left mouse click into the Sheet of the small window above the EXECUTOR Faderor use the touchscreen to do so.

The EDIT menu appears on the right TFT display, showing a listing of the individual cues.

4.3 Editing Sequences


● TRIGGER: Call up Cue (GO button, SOUND, TIME or FOLLOW)

If the TIMES button on the title bar is pressed:● FADE: FADE time● OUTFADE: Duration of fade in on Dimmer channels becoming smaller● SNAP: Duration of the DELAY● IND.FADE: Duration of the individual FADE time (min and max)● IND. DELAY: Duration of the individual DELAY time (min and max)

If the LOOPS button on the title bar is pressed:● LOOP: will jump, when called up, to the CUE of the given number withoutwithoutwithoutwithoutwithout calling up this Cue● LOOPDELAY: The sequence of the LOOP-Function will be displayed● LINK: The set Macro will be displayed● LI. DEL: The set time will be displayed, afterafterafterafterafter which the Macro will be called up

If the EFFECTS button on the title bar is pressed:

● EFFECTS: Display of the effects calls

A second sheet will appear in the lower part of the display:● NO.: Number of the Effect Group● NAME: Name of the Effect Group● ACTION: Type of Effect call● INTENS: Display of the defined size of the Effect Group

F (Fade): If Y (YES) is displayed, the size will be faded in with the set fade time● SPEED: Display of the defined speed of the Effect Group

F (Fade): If Y (YES) is displayed, the speed will be faded in with the set fade time● SOFT: Display of the set softness (softer fade in) of the effect

F (Fade): If Y (YES) is displayed, the softness will be faded in with the set fade timeIf AUTO SCROLL button is pressed, the chart will be automatically moved to top/bottom when handling largersequences.

3 The chart will show you all cues of a sequence including the various TRIGGER functions.

4 You can define the TRIGGER (call-up option) for all all all all all cues using the buttons (selected button will turn dark gray).

5 The MODIFY CUE button will enable you to change values of individual cues (ààààà below).

6 This button will lead you to the ASSIGN menu. ààààà 5.15.15.15.15.1 ASSIGN menu

7 Description of each encoder.

4.3.14.3.14.3.14.3.14.3.1Changing values for individual steps in the sequenceChanging values for individual steps in the sequenceChanging values for individual steps in the sequenceChanging values for individual steps in the sequenceChanging values for individual steps in the sequence� Select the Cue that you want to change (red cell).� Press the MODIFY CUE button (the Cue will be displayed on a green background and the STORE button starts

flashing).� In the FIXTURE or CHANNEL window, all values of the Cue will now be called up or displayedall values of the Cue will now be called up or displayedall values of the Cue will now be called up or displayedall values of the Cue will now be called up or displayedall values of the Cue will now be called up or displayed

(active, red)(active, red)(active, red)(active, red)(active, red). At the same time, this Cue will be put out on stage.� The cue can now be changed by either direct access or presets. ààààà 3.4 3.4 3.4 3.4 3.4 Accessing Fixtures directly (in the

FIXTURE SHEET) / 3.53.53.53.53.5 Accessing Dimmer Channels directly (in the CHANNEL SHEET) and 3.7 3.7 3.7 3.7 3.7 Creating andcalling up Presets

If the Cue is not to be seen on stage, activate the Blind function by pressing the BLINDbutton (integrated LED is on).

Press the STORE button once. The changed Cue is now saved.

Press the CLEAR button twice if necessary (Cue values will be deleted in the FIXTURE orCHANNEL window).

For modifying further Cues, select the respective Cue one by one (will be displayed on agreen background).

Repeat all steps as described with first cue and save with STORE.



Status CopyStatus CopyStatus CopyStatus CopyStatus Copy

4.3.24.3.24.3.24.3.24.3.2 Changing the TRIGGER (Call-up) of individual Steps within the SequenceChanging the TRIGGER (Call-up) of individual Steps within the SequenceChanging the TRIGGER (Call-up) of individual Steps within the SequenceChanging the TRIGGER (Call-up) of individual Steps within the SequenceChanging the TRIGGER (Call-up) of individual Steps within the SequenceSelect the respective cue within the TRIGGER column (red cell).

Enter the following with the left Encoder or via the keyboard and confirm with ENTER.● F: for FOLLOW mode● G: for GO button● S: for SOUND signal● No.: Automatically according to set time (e.g. if the set time is 1.5, this Cue will be called

up after 1.5 seconds automatically).

4.3.34.3.34.3.34.3.34.3.3 Changing the FADE or DELAChanging the FADE or DELAChanging the FADE or DELAChanging the FADE or DELAChanging the FADE or DELAY times of individual steps within the SequenceY times of individual steps within the SequenceY times of individual steps within the SequenceY times of individual steps within the SequenceY times of individual steps within the SequenceSelect the respective cue (red cell).

Here, the duration for thisthisthisthisthis cue can be changed globally with the BASIC-FADE TIME encoder.Pressing the encoder BASIC-FADE TIME, you switch to IND.FADE (all additional individual FADEtimes changed in the FIXTURE-Timing sheet). By turning the wheel, you can change thesetimes.

Pressing the encoder SNAP DELAY, you switch to DELAY TIME (all additional individual DELAYtimes changed in the FIXTURE-Timing sheet). Byturning the wheel, you can change thesetimes.

Pressing the TRIGGER encoder will switch to BASIC OUTFADE. Here, you can modifiy thedurations by turning the Encoder.

If no FADE or DELAY times are indicated, no values are saved to this CUE.


4.3.44.3.44.3.44.3.44.3.4 Copying Cues Copying Cues Copying Cues Copying Cues Copying CuesPress the COPY Button once (LED is on).

Press the SEQUENCE Button once (LED is on).Using the keypad, enter the number of the Sequence from which Cues are to becopied.

Press the CUE Button once (LED is on).Using the keypad, enter the number of the first Cue from which the copying is to start. If only oneCue is to be copied, continue with the AT Button.Pressing the + button will copy the respective Cue indicated by the following number.Pressing the THRU button on the keypad will copy the Cues from...tofrom...tofrom...tofrom...tofrom...to (including last Cue).When pressing the � button, the Cue with the next number will notnotnotnotnot be copied.


Enter the new number for the copied Cues using the keypad.

Example: The Cues are to be inserted between Cue 10 and Cue 11. Number these Cues e.g. as 10.1(possible Cue numbers are 10.001 - 10.999). This way, up to 999 Cues can be insertedbetween two existing Cues.

Confirm with ENTER.

When copying oneoneoneoneone Cue, the COPY window will open.

After pressing this button, you can choose between:

Only the values and times actually saved to this Cue Only the values and times actually saved to this Cue Only the values and times actually saved to this Cue Only the values and times actually saved to this Cue Only the values and times actually saved to this Cue will becopied. The history will be disregarded.

The Cue will be copied as it would actually be realized on stage. That means,all previous steps will be taken into account and the result will be copiedafterwards.

Pressing COPY will copy the Cue, CANCEL will abort the process.

When copying more than one Cue, only the values and times actually saved to this Cue only the values and times actually saved to this Cue only the values and times actually saved to this Cue only the values and times actually saved to this Cue only the values and times actually saved to this Cue will be copied.The history will be disregarded.


4.3.54.3.54.3.54.3.54.3.5 Moving CuesMoving CuesMoving CuesMoving CuesMoving CuesPress the MOVE Button once (LED is on).

Press the SEQUENCE Button once (LED is on).

Using the keypad, enter the number of the Sequence in which Cues are to be moved.

Press the CUE button once (LED is on).

Using the keypad, enter the number of the first Cue as of which the Cues are to be moved. If onlyone Cue is to be moved, continue with the AT button.

Pressing the + key will move the respective Cue indicated by the following number.Pressing the THRU key on the keypad will move the Cues from...to (including last Cue)(including last Cue)(including last Cue)(including last Cue)(including last Cue).When pressing the � key, the Cue with the next number will notnotnotnotnot be moved.Press the AT button once (LED is on).

Enter the new number for the moved Cues using the keypad.

Example: The Cues are to be inserted between Cue 10 and Cue 11. Number these Cues e.g. as 10.1(possible Cue numbers are 10.001 - 10.999).

This way, up to 999 Cues can be inserted between two existing Cues.

Confirm with ENTER.

When moving oneoneoneoneone Cue, the COPY window will open.

After pressing this button, you can choose between:

During the moving process, only the values and times actually saved to thisCue will be copiedwill be copiedwill be copiedwill be copiedwill be copied. The history will be disregarded.

The Cue will be moved as it would actually be realized on stage. That means,all previous steps will be taken into account and the result will be copiedafterwards.

Pressing COPY will move the Cue, CANCEL will abort the process.

When moving more than one Cue, only the values and times actually saved to this Cue will be copied.will be copied.will be copied.will be copied.will be copied. Thehistory will be disregarded.



11111

22222

4 . 3 . 64 . 3 . 64 . 3 . 64 . 3 . 64 . 3 . 6Deleting and renumbering CuesDeleting and renumbering CuesDeleting and renumbering CuesDeleting and renumbering CuesDeleting and renumbering CuesMake a right mouse click on the respective Cue in the NO. column.

The following window will open.

1 START LINE: Display of the first selected Cue. The number can be modified by clicking on it.

END LINE: Display of the last selected Cue. The number can be modified by clicking on it.

2 NEW START: Display of the first new number of the selected Cues. The number can be modified by clicking on it.STEP WIDTH: Display of the steps, in which the Cues� new numbers will be placed. The number canbe modified by clicking on it.

Deleting CuesDeleting CuesDeleting CuesDeleting CuesDeleting CuesSelect the Cue to be deleted. By pressing the DELETE button, the CUE will be deleted. If you want to delete not onlyone but several Cues, select the respective Cues. By pressing the DELETE button, the Cues will be deleted.

Renumbering CuesRenumbering CuesRenumbering CuesRenumbering CuesRenumbering CuesSelect the Cue to be renumbered. Enter the new number on the right side of �NEW START�. By pressing theRENUMBER button, the Cue will be renumbered. If you want to renumber not only one but several Cues, select therespective Cues. Enter the new number for the first Cue on the right side of �NEW START�. By pressing the RENUMBERbutton, the Cues will be renumbered.

4.3.74.3.74.3.74.3.74.3.7 Inserting LOOPsInserting LOOPsInserting LOOPsInserting LOOPsInserting LOOPsWithin a Sequence, you can allocate a Loop to a Cue. When this Cue is reached, it will be executed, then the Loopwill be called up.This process will either run over a preset period or for the number of Loops indicated.

Make a right mouse click on the respective Cue in the LOOP column. The SELECT LOOP-TARGET window will open.Select the Cue to which a jump is to be performed. The Cue will be listed in the top line.

Select the jump function by pressing the respective Button:� With the LOOP (TIMED) Button, only jumps within the set time frame are performed.� With the LOOP (COUNT) Button, the jump will be repeated as often as indicated.� With the DELETE Button, you can delete the jump.For the indicated jump, you can now determine the duration or number of jumps in the LOOPDELAY column byclicking on or entering the respective value.Example: When you enter �5� in the TIMED cell, the jumps will be executed for 5 seconds. When you enter �5� in

the COUNT cell, the jump will be repeated five times, before the Sequence will be continued.

4.3.84.3.84.3.84.3.84.3.8 Inserting MacrosInserting MacrosInserting MacrosInserting MacrosInserting MacrosWithin a Sequence, a Macro can be called up by a Cue. As soon as this Cue is reached, the Marco will be executed.By setting a time frame, the Macro can be called up with an individual delay. ààààà 7.17.17.17.17.1 Creating and ProgrammingMacros

Make a right mouse click on the respective Cue in the LINK column. The SELECT MACRO window will open. Selectthe MACRO to be executed. The Macro will be displayed with its name or number.

For the selected Macro, you can now enter a time frame in the LI. DEL column. The Macro will only be executed afterthis time has ended, e.g. if you enter �5� in the LI. DEL column, the Macro will be executed after a delay of fiveseconds.



77777

44444

1111122222

55555

33333

88888

66666

1 The activated EXECUTOR fader or button is now listed in the headline, giving the page number and the name ofsequence.

4.4. Editing Chasers4.4. Editing Chasers4.4. Editing Chasers4.4. Editing Chasers4.4. Editing ChasersA Chaser is an automatically running sequence. During the editing process, you will be able to modify, add or deleteall all all all all values of individual Cues. Speed, X-FADE and SNAP-DELAY times can be adapted globally.

Except as indicated in this chapter, there are three other ways:ààààà 4.1.2, 4.1.3, 4.1.4 4.1.2, 4.1.3, 4.1.4 4.1.2, 4.1.3, 4.1.4 4.1.2, 4.1.3, 4.1.4 4.1.2, 4.1.3, 4.1.4 Overwriting, expanding, removing Cuesààààà 4.3.44.3.44.3.44.3.44.3.4 Update Cues or Presetsààààà 5.35.35.35.35.3 EXECUTOR window

Or:Or:Or:Or:Or:

Make a left mouse click into the chart of the small window above the EXECUTOR Fader.

Press the EDIT button (LED is on).

The EDIT menu appears on the right TFT display, giving a listing of the individual cues.

Select a Chaser with the respective EXECUTOR button.

4.4 Editing Chasers


2 The functions of the columns are given in the second line.

● No.: Number of Cues● NAME: Name of Cue● MIB: Activate MIB (Move In Black function) individually for each cue. Activate it by selecting a cell and

shortly pressing on the encoder on the right side of the display. Activation is confirmed by YES.

MIB can only be used in cells where a � ***** � is displayed.

● TRIGGER: Has no effect on Chaser

If the TIMES button on the title bar is pressed:

● FADE: Has no effect on Chaser● OUTFADE: Has no effect on Chaser● SNAP: Has no effect on Chaser● I.FADE: Has no effect on Chaser● I DELAY: Has no effect on Chaser

If the LOOPS button on the title bar is pressed:● LOOP: Jumps to the respective CUE of indicated number upon activation, withoutwithoutwithoutwithoutwithout calling this Cue up● LOOPDELAY: The sequence of the LOOP function will be displayed● LINK: The set Macro will be displayed● LI. DEL: The set time will be displayed, after after after after after which the Macro will be called up

If the EFFECTS button on the title bar is pressed:● EFFECTS: Display of the Effect calls

A second sheet will appear in the lower part of the display:● No.: Number of the Effect Group● NAME: Name of the Effect Group● ACTION: Type of Effect call● INTENS: Display of the defined size of the Effect Group

F (Fade): If Y (YES) is displayed, the size will be faded in with the set fade time● SPEED: Display of the defined speed of the Effect Group

F (Fade): If Y (YES) is displayed, the speed will be faded in with the set fade time● SOFT: Display of the set softness (softer fade in) of the effects

F (Fade): If Y (YES) is displayed, the softness will be faded in with the set fade time

3 The chart will show all Cues of the Chaser.

4 With the help of the button you can define various sequences for the Chaser.

● GO: Call-up of the steps with the GO button. Fade and Delay time will be executed with the set time.● RUN: Chaser runs with the set speed. Fade and Delay time will be adjusted in terms of percentage.● SOUND: Call-up of the steps via a sound signal. Fade and Delay time will be executed with the set time.● BPM: Call-up of the steps via the automatic recognition of BBBBBeats PPPPPer MMMMMinute. Fade and Delay time will

be adjusted in terms of percentage.● FORWARD: Chaser runs forward.● REVERS: Chaser runs backwards.● BOUNCE: Chaser runs forward, then backwards and so on.● RANDOMLY: Chaser calls up individual steps on random basis.● AUTO LOOP / SINGLE ON / SINGLE OFF (Switch over by pressing the button):

On AUTO LOOP, after the last step, the Chaser will jump back to the first and continue. With SINGLEON, the Chaser makes one run and stops at the last Cue. With SINGLE OFF, the Chaser makes onerun and switches off after the last Cue.

● SPEED INDV.: On RUN, an individually set speed will be used.● SPEED 1�4 : On RUN, the respective SPEED-Group will be used. These set speeds can be used for all Chasers.

ààààà 5.1.10 5.1.10 5.1.10 5.1.10 5.1.10 Assigning the Special Master

5 Using the buttons, you can either divide or double the set speed.

HALF SPEED: Pressing 1x, the set speed will be divided in half � this can be done up to 8 times (Modification willbe displayed above the left Encoder).

1:11:11:11:11:1: Resets the speed to the set value.

DOUBLE SPEED: Pressing 1x, the set speed will be doubled � this can be done up to 8 times (Modification will bedisplayed above the left Encoder.

6 Values of individual Cues can be modified with the MODIFY-CUE button (STORE button flashes). à à à à à 4.4.1 4.4.1 4.4.1 4.4.1 4.4.1Modifying values of separate Chaser steps

4.4 Editing Chasers


7 This button will bring you to the ASSIGN menu. ààààà 5.25.25.25.25.2 ASSIGN menu

8 Description/labelling of the encoders, located below the TFT display.

● CHASE SPEED: The individual individual individual individual individual speed can be set with this Encoder.If one of the SPEED buttons 1 to 4 is pressed, you can set the speed of this SPEED group usingthis Encoder.

SPEED SCALE: Pressing the CHASE SPEED encoder, this encoder will be switched to SPEED SCALE � now youcan set the division or doubling of the speed with this Encoder.

● CHASE INFADE: Setting of the In-Fade time for FADE functions.

CHASE SPEED 1: When pressing the CHASE INFADE encoder, this encoder will be switched to CHASE SPEED 1 �now you can set the speed for this group with this Encoder.

● CHASE OUTFADE: Setting the Out-Fade time for Dimmer Functions. (The OUTFADE time can be linked to theinfade time; The display shows �INFADE�).

CHASE SPEED 2: When pressing the CHASE OUTFADE encoder, this encoder will be switched to CHASE SPEED 2� now you can set the speed for this group with this Encoder.

● SNAP DELAY: Setting the delay time of SNAP functions.

CHASE SPEED 3: When pressing the SNAPDELAY encoder, this encoder will be switched to CHASE SPEED 3 �now you can set the speed for this group with this encoder.

Press the STORE button once. The changed Cue is now saved.

If the Cue is not to be seen on stage, activate the Blind function by pressing the BLIND button(integrated LED is on).

Press the CLEAR button twice (Cue values will be deleted in the FIXTURE or CHANNEL window).

4.4.14.4.14.4.14.4.14.4.1 Modifying values of separate Chaser stepsModifying values of separate Chaser stepsModifying values of separate Chaser stepsModifying values of separate Chaser stepsModifying values of separate Chaser steps� Select the Cue to be modified (red cell).

� Press the MODIFY CUE button (The Cue will be displayed with a green background).

� In the FIXTURE or CHANNEL window, all values of the Cue will now be called up or displayedall values of the Cue will now be called up or displayedall values of the Cue will now be called up or displayedall values of the Cue will now be called up or displayedall values of the Cue will now be called up or displayed(active, red)(active, red)(active, red)(active, red)(active, red). At the same time, this Cue will be put out on stage.

� This cue can now be modified by either direct access or presets. à à à à à 3.4 3.4 3.4 3.4 3.4 Direct Access to Fixtures (in the FIXTURESHEET) / 3.53.53.53.53.5 Direct Access to Dimmer Channels (in the CHANNEL SHEET) and 3.7 3.7 3.7 3.7 3.7 Creating and calling up Presets

For modifying further Cues, select the respective Cue (Cue will be displayed on a green background).

Repeat all steps as described with the first cue and save with STORE.

ààààà 4.3.4 4.3.4 4.3.4 4.3.4 4.3.4 Copying Cuesààààà 4.3.5 4.3.5 4.3.5 4.3.5 4.3.5 Moving Cuesààààà 4.3.6 4.3.6 4.3.6 4.3.6 4.3.6 Deleting and renumbering Cuesààààà 4.3.7 4.3.7 4.3.7 4.3.7 4.3.7 Inserting LOOPsààààà 4.3.8 4.3.8 4.3.8 4.3.8 4.3.8 Inserting Macros

4.4 Editing Chasers


11111

22222

33333

4.54.54.54.54.5 Update CueUpdate CueUpdate CueUpdate CueUpdate CueWhen executing sequences, separate Cues can be modified and saved directly.

Call up the Cue to be modified. Modify the Cue by either direct access or via presets (UPDATE button LED is on).ààààà 3.4 3.4 3.4 3.4 3.4 Direct Access to Fixtures (in the FIXTURE SHEET) / 3.53.53.53.53.5 Direct Access to Dimmer Channels and 3.7 3.7 3.7 3.7 3.7 Creatingand calling up Presets

Press the Update button once.

The UPDATE window will open

1 By shortly pressing this button, you can switch between �only original contents� and �add new contents�

Only original contents: Upon updating a cue, only the changes on those fixtures/channels will be saved, whichhave already been used in this cue.

Add new contents: When updating a cue, only the changes of those fixtures/channels will be saved whichhave already been used in this cue.

2 By shortly pressing this button, you can switch between �only last called Executor� and �all possible Executors�.

Only last called Executor: The�Cue Destinations� chart only shows the last loaded cue.

All possible Executors: The �Cue Destinations� chart shows all currently laoded cues of all executors.

3 Pressing the �Update Cue� button will update that cue being displayed with a red background. You can selectanother cue using the encoder.

Pressing the �Update All Cues� button will update all cues listed in the chart.

4.5 Update Cue


11111

22222

4 .64 .64 .64 .64 .6 Update PresetUpdate PresetUpdate PresetUpdate PresetUpdate PresetPress the EDIT button (LED is on).Click on one of the Preset Buttons (the LED will blink, the preset button will display EDIT). The Presetis called up, the used fixtures/channels are being selected and the values will be activated.Enter your required modifications here.

If you want to change more than one preset, you can select another preset by pressing the EDIT button right afterthe modification. Before you can actually change the new selected preset, a window will open, where you can savethe 1st preset by pressing the OK button or where you can cancel the modification by pressing CANCEL. The secondpreset can only be called up after this.

Or:Or:Or:Or:Or:

When executing sequences you can modify and save single values of presets directly.

Activate a cue, in which presets are to be modified. Now you can modify this cue by direct access (the UPDATEbutton LED is on). ààààà 3.4 3.4 3.4 3.4 3.4 Accessing fixtures directly / 3.53.53.53.53.5 Accessing Dimmer Channels directly

Press the Update button 1x.

The UPDATE window will open.

Press the UPDATE button.A window appears, where you can either save the preset by pressing the OK button or cancel themodification by pressing CANCEL.

1 By shortly pressing this button, you can switch between �only original contents� and �add new contents�.

Only original contents: When updating a preset, only those changes on Fixtures/Channels will be saved, whichhave been used in this preset before.

Add new contents: When updating a preset, all changes on all Fixtures/Channels will be saved.

2 Pressing the �Update Preset� button will update that preset being displayed with a red background. You can selectanother preset using the encoder.

Pressing the �Update All Presets� button will update all presets listed in the chart.

4.6 Update Preset


55555 Executing Cues, Sequences and ChasersExecuting Cues, Sequences and ChasersExecuting Cues, Sequences and ChasersExecuting Cues, Sequences and ChasersExecuting Cues, Sequences and Chasers5 .15 .15 .15 .15 .1 ASSIGN menu (Assignment to EXECUTOR)ASSIGN menu (Assignment to EXECUTOR)ASSIGN menu (Assignment to EXECUTOR)ASSIGN menu (Assignment to EXECUTOR)ASSIGN menu (Assignment to EXECUTOR)

The created Cues, Sequences or Effect Groups can be assigned to any EXECUTOR fader or button.

One way to enter the ASSIGN menu is by a mouse click or using the touch screen on the title barof the EXECUTOR FADER window.

Or:Or:Or:Or:Or:

Press the ASSIGN button once (LED is on).

Select a Sequence in the Sequence Pool, or an Effect Group in the Effect Pool.

Press the EXECUTOR FADER or EXECUTOR button, to which you want to assign a Sequence orChaser.

Or:Or:Or:Or:Or:

Press the ASSIGN button once (LED is on).

Press the EXECUTOR FADER or EXECUTOR button, for which a Sequence or Chaser is to be created.The ASSIGN menu will appear in the middle TFT display.

Another way to enter the ASSIGN menu is via the EDIT menu.

The title bar will display the selected EXECUTOR FADER or BUTTON.

5.1.15.1.15.1.15.1.15.1.1 Assigning Sequences or Effect GroupsAssigning Sequences or Effect GroupsAssigning Sequences or Effect GroupsAssigning Sequences or Effect GroupsAssigning Sequences or Effect Groups

The �Function� button must be activated (dark background)..

By pressing the CHASER, SEQUENCE or EFFECT button, all created Sequences will be listed in the Sheet. Select theSequence or Effect Group to be assigned. Assigned Sequences or Effect Groups are displayed in red.

The CUES column shows the number of Cues in the individual Sequences.

By pressing the button �Edit�, you can customize the assigned Sequence or Effect Group in the EDIT menu.ààààà 4.34.34.34.34.3 or 4.44.44.44.44.4 Editing Cues, Sequences or Chasers. ààààà 6.26.26.26.26.2 Editing Effect Groups

5 .1 .25 .1 .25 .1 .25 .1 .25 .1 .2 Changing Sequence NamesChanging Sequence NamesChanging Sequence NamesChanging Sequence NamesChanging Sequence NamesBy pushing the button �Name� the name of the sequence assigned to the executor can be changed by keyboard.

or :o r :o r :o r :o r :

Push ASSIGN button 2x (LED is on).

Push the executor button, where the name of the sequence should be changed.

A window appears, where you can now enter the new name.

5.1 ASSIGN menu (Assignment to EXECUTOR)


11111

22222

33333

22222

5 . 1 . 35 . 1 . 35 . 1 . 35 . 1 . 35 . 1 . 3Changing Buttons and FadersChanging Buttons and FadersChanging Buttons and FadersChanging Buttons and FadersChanging Buttons and Faders

The �Settings� button must be activated (dark background).


1 When clicking on the FADER symbol button, a selection will appear in which you can assign the respective functionto the Fader by another mouse click.

● Master: The Fader controls all dimmer values of this Sequence.● Swap: With the Fader, the sequence is faded in and allallallallall dimmer values used in this sequence are set to

�0�

It is only possible to use a SWIt is only possible to use a SWIt is only possible to use a SWIt is only possible to use a SWIt is only possible to use a SWAP AP AP AP AP ororororor Master fader Master fader Master fader Master fader Master fader.....

● FADE: With the Fader, the fade-in time can be set for the FADE function, when using Chasers.● Speed: The Chaser speed can be set with the Fader.● Xfade: With the Fader, you can fade in to the next step.● XF A: If Split Crossfade is active, you can fade out the currently called up Cue when pushing the fader

upwards or downwards (ààààà item item item item item 5).If Split Crossfade is not activenot activenot activenot activenot active, you can fade out to the darkening Dimmer channels of the nextCue when pushing the fader upwards or downwards.

● XF B: If Split Crossfade is active, you can use the Fader to fade in the next Cue when pushing the faderupwards or downwards (ààààà item item item item item 55555).If Split Crossfade is not activenot activenot activenot activenot active, you can fade out to the next Cue and to the brightening Dimmerchannels when pushing the fader upwards or downwards.

● Empty: Fader has no function.● Rate: Using the Fader, you can change all fade and delay times for sequences. if the fader is on a

medium position, all times will be executed in the normal way. Using the RATE 1 button, you canautomatically set the Fader to the medium position.


2 By a click on the respective BUTTON symbol, a selection will appear in which any button can be allocated withdifferent functions.

● Go: The next step will be called up with all programmed FADE and DELAY times.● Go�: For sequences, the previous step is called up and all changes effected on previous Cues are

executed (full tracking). At the same time, all programmed FADE and DELAY times will be executed.For Chasers, the running direction will be reversed.

● Pause: Sequence or Chaser will be interrupted; continue with GO+ or GO�.● On: Switches the Executor on and starts the sequence or brings it back, if it was overwritten (LPT).● Off: Switches the Executor off.● Rate 1: Puts the RATE FADER to mid position (ààààà item 3 RATE Faderitem 3 RATE Faderitem 3 RATE Faderitem 3 RATE Faderitem 3 RATE Fader).● Learn: Direct entering of the Chaser speed. When pressing this button at least three times, the Chaser

speed is set.● <<<: Call-up of the previous step without FADE or SNAP times.● >>>: Call-up of the next step without FADE or SNAP times.● Temp: Cue, Chaser or Sequence is activated as long as button is pressed. Upon releasing the button,

previous condition will be restored.● Top: Resets the Sequence to the first step.● Empty: Button has no function.● Flash: Sets the Dimmer value to 100%, starts the sequence, if not already activated.● Out: To hide the dimmer values (temporarily).● Toggle: To switch on and off the respective Cue, Sequence or Chaser.● Fix: Will fix sequence or chaser on this executor, even when switching PAGES here (this will be

displayed by an orange background in the small EXECUTOR window).● Load: Pressing the button on the right TFT display will open a chart for this sequence where you can

select and directly load a cue (LOAD CUE). Start the cue using the GO button.● Select: Lays this executor down as Master Sequence.● Swop: Cue, Chaser or Sequence is activated, as long as button is pushed. AllAllAllAllAll other dimmer channels are

faded out, except with executors, where �Swop Protected� has been activated.

3 With the Size of Executor buttons 1 � 5, you can define whether it should be possible to use one to five Faders foryour operations with EXECUTOR FADERs, and whether one to five buttons could be used for EXECUTOR BUTTONS.The respective titles will be displayed on the TFT display above the EXECUTOR FADERS. When the LIST function isactive, the function of the EXECUTOR buttons will be displayed above these buttons (press LIST button).

Default Default Default Default Default Button and Fader AssignmentButton and Fader AssignmentButton and Fader AssignmentButton and Fader AssignmentButton and Fader AssignmentPressing the �Save as default� button will save the current settings as default settings in the Default Button/Fadermenu. For each option (1-5 Faders or 1-5 Buttons, Sequences or Chasers), one individual setting will be saved.

Pressing the �Load from default� button will load the saved default settings and use them for this Executor.

Pressing the �Apply to all Exec� will overwrite all Fader or Button Executors. Prerequisite is, however, an identicalnumber of Fader and Button assignments.



5 . 1 . 45 . 1 . 45 . 1 . 45 . 1 . 45 . 1 . 4Playback OptionsPlayback OptionsPlayback OptionsPlayback OptionsPlayback Options

The �Settings� button must be pressed (dark background).


If you press the �Auto start� button (background dark gray), the Sequence or Chaser will be automatically startedwhen pushing the Master Fader upwards (item 6).

If the �Auto stop� button is pressed (dark gray background), the sequence or Chaser will automatically be switchedoff when pushing the master fader downwards to the lower stop.

If the �Auto Fix� button is pressed (dark background) and the Sequence or Chaser is started, this Executor will belocked to that position when switching the Executor pages and will only be released after switching itonly be released after switching itonly be released after switching itonly be released after switching itonly be released after switching itoffoffoffoffoff. If an Executor is saved at that position on another page, this Executor will appear and can be used again onlyafter switching the locked Executor off.

If the �Swop Protected� button is pressed, the Dimmers of this Sequence will not be switched off, when anotherSequence is called up using Swop.

If the TRACKING button is pressed (dark background), the Sequence will be executed in Tracking mode. If the buttonis not pressed, the Sequence will be executed in Non Tracking mode.

TRACKING and NON TRACKING refer to all Dimmer values TRACKING and NON TRACKING refer to all Dimmer values TRACKING and NON TRACKING refer to all Dimmer values TRACKING and NON TRACKING refer to all Dimmer values TRACKING and NON TRACKING refer to all Dimmer values onlyonlyonlyonlyonly .....

The TRACKINGTRACKINGTRACKINGTRACKINGTRACKING mode is intended for theatre applicationstheatre applicationstheatre applicationstheatre applicationstheatre applications.

Dimmer channels that were called up in a Cue, remain unchanged for each further Cue, until they are modified oroverwritten by a further Cue (LTP principle). Therefore, you do not have to program them in later steps.

TIPTIPTIPTIPTIP Example: At the beginning of a Sequence, Dimmer channels are set to 80 percent. Let�s assume that the setting is tobe used for several steps. As long as the channels are not modified, they will remain at 80 percent. When workingwith this Sequence, you may recognize, however, that the channel setting should only be at 70 percent. Now, youonly have to change this channel setting onceonceonceonceonce; all further Cues will automatically be �modified� to 70 percent.

The NON TRACKINGNON TRACKINGNON TRACKINGNON TRACKINGNON TRACKING mode is the �Standard SHOW Mode�. As opposed to TRACKING (Theatre mode), all dimmerchannels that are not activated (not red)not activated (not red)not activated (not red)not activated (not red)not activated (not red) will be saved with �0%� or called up with �0%�, respectively.

That means: This is to ensure that in the next step, the unused Dimmer channels will be set to 0 percent. ààààà 5.45.45.45.45.4TRACKING window



Button A/B or Split Xfade:Button A/B or Split Xfade:Button A/B or Split Xfade:Button A/B or Split Xfade:Button A/B or Split Xfade: If the �Split Xfade� button is pressed (displayed in dark), this function is active(ààààà item 5.1.3 item 5.1.3 item 5.1.3 item 5.1.3 item 5.1.3 Changing Faders, Fader XF A and XF B).

Button Normal triggerButton Normal triggerButton Normal triggerButton Normal triggerButton Normal trigger If the �Normal Trigger� button is pressed, this Sequence/Chaser will be executewith the saved calls. Pressing this button briefly, it will switch to �Trigger isGO�, where after the Sequence/Chaser can only be controlled by the GObutton.

LTP DimmersLTP DimmersLTP DimmersLTP DimmersLTP Dimmers button pressed: When activating this sequence, the dimmer channels of this sequence willbe called up as previously programmed. They will overwrite all other dimmerchannels of those Cues that were also called up in LTP mode. HTP Executorsremain unchanged.

Move in Black OptionsMove in Black OptionsMove in Black OptionsMove in Black OptionsMove in Black OptionsMIB Always MIB Always MIB Always MIB Always MIB Always button pressed: Loading a cue in a sequence where the dimmer values of the fixtures are set

at 0 and loading in the following steps, for example, a different position, coloror gobo, etc., these channels will already be executed upon calling up thecue. You can also set a FADE or DELAY time for these channels (ààààà 2.14 2.14 2.14 2.14 2.14Settings in the Defaults Menu / Playback Timing).

MIB NeverMIB NeverMIB NeverMIB NeverMIB Never button pressed: Separately activated cues for MIB are being completely switched off (ààààà 4.3 4.3 4.3 4.3 4.3Edit Sequences).

Auto PrePosAuto PrePosAuto PrePosAuto PrePosAuto PrePos button pressed: For Fixtures with inactive Dimmersinactive Dimmersinactive Dimmersinactive Dimmersinactive Dimmers, all other channels will be executedwithout programmed fade times when calling up the first Cue of this Sequence.When deactivating this sequence, the channels will be altered only after therespective dimmer has been set to 0.

RESTART OPTIONSRESTART OPTIONSRESTART OPTIONSRESTART OPTIONSRESTART OPTIONSIf the �Restart with first cue� button is pressed, the Sequence will, after switching off, start again at the firstfirstfirstfirstfirst step.

If the �Restart with actual cue� button is pressed, the Sequence will, after switching off, start again at the lastlastlastlastlastcalledcalledcalledcalledcalled step.

If the �Restart with next cue� button is pressed, the Sequence will, after switching off, start again at the nextnextnextnextnext step.

If the �Release from first step� button is pressed, all functions, previously used in this sequence, will be switched offafter execution of the last cue and immediate call up of the first cue. The execution of this sequence now behavesin a way, as if the sequence is being switched off after the last cue and being switched on again.

Defaults Defaults Defaults Defaults Defaults OptionsOptionsOptionsOptionsOptionsPressing the SAVE AS DEFAULT button will save the current settings as default settings.

Pressing the LOAD FROM DEFAULT button will load the saved default settings and use them for this Executor.


If the GROUP MASTER button is pressed, the Sheet will display all created groups.

Select the group to be assigned. Assigned groups are displayed in red. The DIMMER column will show thenumber of Dimmer channels used by the Fixtures and Dimmers.

Changing Group NamesChanging Group NamesChanging Group NamesChanging Group NamesChanging Group NamesBy pushing the button �Name� the name of the group assigned to the executor can be changed by keyboard.

or :o r :o r :o r :o r :Push ASSIGNbutton 2x (LED is on).

Push the executor button, where the name of the group should be changed.A window appears, where you can now enter the new name.

or :o r :o r :o r :o r :

in Group Pool ààààà 3.3 3.3 3.3 3.3 3.3 Creating and calling up Fixtures and Dimmer GROUPS

Submaster Options

The �Settings� button must be pressed (dark background).

If the POSITIVE ENABLE button is pressed, this Group Master is the Master Fader for all dimmer channels ofthis group.

If a Group Master is set as INHIBIT Master (If a Group Master is set as INHIBIT Master (If a Group Master is set as INHIBIT Master (If a Group Master is set as INHIBIT Master (If a Group Master is set as INHIBIT Master (NEGATIVE INHIBIT button is pressedNEGATIVE INHIBIT button is pressedNEGATIVE INHIBIT button is pressedNEGATIVE INHIBIT button is pressedNEGATIVE INHIBIT button is pressed) for a) for a) for a) for a) for agroup also including Fixtures or dimmer channels from other groups, the INHIBIT Mastergroup also including Fixtures or dimmer channels from other groups, the INHIBIT Mastergroup also including Fixtures or dimmer channels from other groups, the INHIBIT Mastergroup also including Fixtures or dimmer channels from other groups, the INHIBIT Mastergroup also including Fixtures or dimmer channels from other groups, the INHIBIT Mastermust also be pushed up, to be able to use the overlapping channels. The INHIBIT Mastermust also be pushed up, to be able to use the overlapping channels. The INHIBIT Mastermust also be pushed up, to be able to use the overlapping channels. The INHIBIT Mastermust also be pushed up, to be able to use the overlapping channels. The INHIBIT Mastermust also be pushed up, to be able to use the overlapping channels. The INHIBIT Mastercan also be used as Master Fader for all other Group Masters.can also be used as Master Fader for all other Group Masters.can also be used as Master Fader for all other Group Masters.can also be used as Master Fader for all other Group Masters.can also be used as Master Fader for all other Group Masters.

Group OverviewGroup OverviewGroup OverviewGroup OverviewGroup OverviewPressing the GROUP button twice will open an overview in the right display showingall assigned Group Masters. In this overview, every Group Master is displayed with aseparate small window.

The upper button contains the group name. Clicking on this button will open the Pageon which it is saved. The display above the Fader shows �HERE�.

With the FULL button, you can set the Master to 100%. With the OUT button, you canset the Master to �0�. The yellow status indicator next to the buttons will give you thecurrently set value for the respective Fader.

Pressing the ALL FULL button in the title bar will set all group masters to 100%.

Pressing the CLOSE button will close this window.

5.1.55.1.55.1.55.1.55.1.5 Assigning Group MastersAssigning Group MastersAssigning Group MastersAssigning Group MastersAssigning Group MastersPress the ASSIGN button once (LED is on).Select a group in the GROUP Pool.Press an EXECUTOR FADER button, to which the group is to be assigned to.

Or: Or: Or: Or: Or: Using the ASSIGN menu:

The �Function� button must be activated (dark background).



5 .1 .5 .1 .5 .1 .5 .1 .5 .1 . 66666 Assigning Special MastersAssigning Special MastersAssigning Special MastersAssigning Special MastersAssigning Special MastersPress the ASSIGN button once (LED is on).Press an EXECUTOR FADER button, to which a Special Master is to be assigned to.


The �Function� button must be pressed (dark background).

If the SPECIAL MASTER button is pressed, all CHASER SPEED Masters will be displayed.

Select the CHASER SPEED to be assigned.

The following window will appear above the assigned Executor fader:

Here, the name of the Speed Group will be displayed.

The speed is displayed here.

With the upper button, you can enter a speed directly. By pressing the button at least twice, youcan set the speed.

With the button below the fader, you can double the speed.With the lower button, you can halve the speed.

The speed of the Speed Group can be adjusted by using the respective Fader.If SOUND : BPMSOUND : BPMSOUND : BPMSOUND : BPMSOUND : BPM is selected, you can adjust the given BPM value in the Sound menu using the fader (ààààà 2.142.142.142.142.14Sound Signal Settings). The Sound Menu will open by touching the lower part of this window (not the headline).o r :o r :o r :o r :o r :

If SOUND : HOLDSOUND : HOLDSOUND : HOLDSOUND : HOLDSOUND : HOLD is selected, you can adjust the given HOLD value in the Sound menu using the fader (ààààà 2.142.142.142.142.14Sound Signal Settings). The Sound Menu will open by touching the lower part of this window (not the headline).

Here the name of the fader function will be displayed.

The speed is displayed here.With the upper button, you can enter a speed directly. By pressing the button at least twice youcan set the speed.With the button below the fader you can double the speed.With the lower button you can halve the speed.You can adjust the BPM / HOLD value with the fader.

5.1.75.1.75.1.75.1.75.1.7 Moving, copying or deleting ExecutorsMoving, copying or deleting ExecutorsMoving, copying or deleting ExecutorsMoving, copying or deleting ExecutorsMoving, copying or deleting ExecutorsPress the MOVE button once to move Executors (LED is on).

Or:Or:Or:Or:Or:

Press the COPY button once to copy Executors (LED is on).

Press the DELETE button once to delete Executors (LED is on).

To move or copy an Executor button or a window above the Executor, press or click onit once.

Pressing another Executor button or window above the Executor will set the newposition.

Press an Executor button or on a window above the Executor once.

If there are programmed Macros or Timecode Shows, in which the moved or deletedIf there are programmed Macros or Timecode Shows, in which the moved or deletedIf there are programmed Macros or Timecode Shows, in which the moved or deletedIf there are programmed Macros or Timecode Shows, in which the moved or deletedIf there are programmed Macros or Timecode Shows, in which the moved or deletedExecutors were to be used, these assignments may get lost!Executors were to be used, these assignments may get lost!Executors were to be used, these assignments may get lost!Executors were to be used, these assignments may get lost!Executors were to be used, these assignments may get lost!


11111

22222

5 .25 .25 .25 .25 .2 Small EXECUTOR WindowSmall EXECUTOR WindowSmall EXECUTOR WindowSmall EXECUTOR WindowSmall EXECUTOR WindowgrandMA:grandMA:grandMA:grandMA:grandMA:

These windows are located above every EXECUTOR FADER or, after pressing the LIST button twice, in the right TFTdisplay for the EXECUTOR buttons.

grandMA grandMA grandMA grandMA grandMA light und ultra-light:light und ultra-light:light und ultra-light:light und ultra-light:light und ultra-light:

After pressing the LIST FADERS button, these windows will be displayed above each of the EXECUTOR FADERS.After pressing the LIST BUTTONS button twice, they will be displayed on the TFT display for the EXECUTOR buttons.

1 The name of the assigned sequence is displayed in the headline. The shown figure displays the number of thesequence.

Clicking on the SheetSheetSheetSheetSheet (not into the header) on the touc screen or using the left mouse button will open the EDITmenu. ààààà 4.34.34.34.34.3 Editing Sequences or 4.4 4.4 4.4 4.4 4.4 Editing Chasers

Clicking on the title bartitle bartitle bartitle bartitle bar on the touchscreen or using a mouse button will open the ASSIGN menu. ààààà 5.15.15.15.15.1 ASSIGNmenu

Furthermore, an extract from the Cue Sheet will be displayed:

Sequence:Sequence:Sequence:Sequence:Sequence: The Outfade time of the last Cue will be displayed by a blue bar in the upper cell.

The Infade time of the cue will be displayed in the second cell.The next Cue will be displayed in the next cell below.

Chaser:Chaser:Chaser:Chaser:Chaser: The speed will be displayed in the upper cell.The Fade time in percentage will be displayed in the second cell and also as green bar.As long as the Chaser is not activated, you will find the type of activation in the bottom line. Duringexecution, the number of Cues already done will be displayed on the left while on the right side youwill see the total number of all Cues, which is also being displayed symbolically by a bar.

2 Here, the individual Fader and Button functions are displayed:● On the left side, the Fader function is displayed. The yellow status indicator will give you the Fader value

currently set.● The function for the button above the encoder is displayed on top.● The function of the upper button below the Fader is displayed in the middle cell.● And the function of the lower button below the Fader is displayed in the lower cell.

5.2 Small EXECUTOR Window

Yellow:one Sequence

Magenta:one Chaser

green background= �Master Sequence�


5 .35 .35 .35 .35 .3 EXECUTOR WindowEXECUTOR WindowEXECUTOR WindowEXECUTOR WindowEXECUTOR WindowIn the EXECUTOR window, you can have the sequence of one FADER or BUTTON displayed, while you have thepossibility for modifications. ààààà 3.13.13.13.13.1 Creating a window

Touch the touchscreen on the left corner of the title bar.

Or:Or:Or:Or:Or:

With a right mouse click on the title bar, you can open the EXECUTOR SHEET OPTIONS window.

In this EXECUTOR window, you can select the respective Sequence by clicking on it. With the FONT SIZE button, youcan switch the font size used in this window between LARGE and SMALL. With the DELETE WINDOW button, you candelete the Executor window or close the OPTIONS window using the CLOSE button.

In this window, you can watch the progress of the sequence; the currently called-up Cue will be displayed by ayellow background. Trigger calls, FADE or DELAY times can be modified directly.

By clicking on a Cue listed in the Sheet (indicated by a red cell), the possible Cue settings appear in the right displayabove the Encoders. Now, you can use the Encoders to modify the individual values for the selected Cue.

Using the �RATE FACTOR� Encoder, you can temporarily adjust all FADE and DELAY times. If the Sequence is switchedoff, the RATE FACTOR will automatically be set to 1.

If the LOOPS button is pressed, the programmed jumps and Macros will be displayed in the Sheet. If the EFFECTSbutton is pressed, the calls of the Effect Groups are displayed. ààààà 4.3 4.3 4.3 4.3 4.3 Editing Sequences

If the LINK DEFAULT button of the title bar is pressed, the default sequence will automatically be transferred to theEXECUTOR window when changing the default sequence. (Assigning the Default sequence ààààà 1.7 1.7 1.7 1.7 1.7 Layout andControls (items 9 and 10))

If you press the AUTO SCROLL button, the Sheet will be automatically moved upwards/downwards when working ona larger Sequence.

5.3 EXECUTOR Window


5 .45 .45 .45 .45 .4 TRACKING WindowTRACKING WindowTRACKING WindowTRACKING WindowTRACKING WindowIn the Tracking window, all values and times/durations of a Sequence can be displayed. Here, all values and times/durations can be reviewed and modified.

Create a Tracking Sheet. ààààà 3.13.13.13.13.1 Creating windows

Touch the touchscreen on the left corner of the title bar.

Or:Or:Or:Or:Or:

With a right mouse click on the title bar, you can open the TRACKINGSHEET OPTIONS window.

In this window, you can select sequences by clicking on the respective ones.

In the INCLUDED Sheet, all functions of the Fixtures used in this Sequence are displayed. By clicking on a function,you can move it into the EXCLUDED sheet. Functions displayed in this Sheet will notnotnotnotnot be displayed in this TrackingSheet. With this function, you obtain a better overview for the Tracking Sheet.With the FONT SIZE button, you can switch the font size used in this window between LARGE and SMALL.

By pressing the % button (DEC or HEX) you can switch the display of values between percent, decimal or hexadecimalvalues.

With the DELETE WINDOW button, you can delete the Executor window or close the OPTIONS window using theCLOSE button.

In this window, you can watch the progress of the sequence; the currently called-up Cue will be displayed by ayellow background.

If the FIX button is pressed (dark background), all selectedselectedselectedselectedselected Fixture functions will be displayed first in the Sheet.

If the button is not pressed (indicated by a CHA), the Sheet will display all functions regardless of theirregardless of theirregardless of theirregardless of theirregardless of theirselectionsselectionsselectionsselectionsselections. When selecting presets, the Fixtures/Dimmers will be sorted accordingly in the Tracking Sheet.

If the MASK button is pressed, the INCLUDED/EXCLUDED functions will be activated in the OPTIONS menu.

If the SORT button is pressed (dark appearance), the Fixtures/Dimmers will be sorted by selection and function.When selecting groups or presets, the Fixtures/Dimmers will be sorted accordingly in the Tracking Sheet.

5.4 TRACKING Window


If the LINK DEFAULT button of the title bar is pressed, the default sequence will automatically be transferred to theEXECUTOR window when changing the default sequence. (Assigning the Default sequence ààààà 1.7 1.7 1.7 1.7 1.7 Layout andControls (items 9 and 10))

If the AUTO SCROLL button is pressed, the Sheet will be automatically moved upwards/downwards whenworking on a larger Sequence.

Using the left mouse button, you can select values or times/durations (also by using the �lasso function�).Values and times/durations can be modified using the middle mouse button. If you make a middle mouse clickon the selected value and then shortly push the right mouse button, a window will open where you can nowenter values or load presets directly.To modify presets, you have to make a middle mouse click on the preset. A window will open where you can entervalues or load other presets direclty.

This is one of only a few menus which makes sense to be used only by mouse!

The following window will open on a right mouse click on the selected values.

Proceed with one of the following options: 1. Selecting one or more cells in the Tracking Sheet2. Choosing the DELETE, CUE ONLY, UNBLOCK or BLOCK command3. Executing the command when activating the selection (Selection,

All Channels..., Complete or Selected Channel...).

DELETE: Will remove all values.

CUE ONLY: Will copy the values of the previous step into the following step (that step must be empty).

BLOCK: With BLOCK, the removed values (light gray) can be converted into �saved values�. The values will bedisplayed in pink.

UNBLOCK: Re-converts block values to removed values (light gray).

5.4 TRACKING-Fenster


5 .55 .55 .55 .55 .5 PPPPPage Administrationage Administrationage Administrationage Administrationage AdministrationIf you are in Channel Mode, the currently called-up PAGE of theCHANNEL Mode appears down in the middle. ààààà 3.5.13.5.13.5.13.5.13.5.1 CHANNEL Mode.

If you are in Executor Mode, the currently called-up PAGE of theexecutor faders appears down in the middle.

After pressing the LIST button once, the currently called-up PAGE of theEXECUTOR BUTTONS appears at the bottom of the right display.

Using the respective PAGE buttons, you can open the different PAGES.

Or:Or:Or:Or:Or:

Hold a PAGE button down, for which another is to be called up. While holding down a button, the EXECUTOR ButtonLEDs will indicate the current PAGE you are on (Example: If LED 28 is flashing, PAGE 8 is selected). By pressinganother button you can switch to a different PAGE.

Or:Or:Or:Or:Or:

5 . 5 . 25 . 5 . 25 . 5 . 25 . 5 . 25 . 5 . 2Executor Fader PExecutor Fader PExecutor Fader PExecutor Fader PExecutor Fader PageageageageageWhen pressing both PAGE buttons for the Executor Faders simultaneously the display will show a summary of theExecutor Fader Pages.

Or:Or:Or:Or:Or:

If in EXECUTOR FADER Mode, you can call up the summary for all EXECUTOR FADERPages by pressing the PAGE Buttons in the display. By clicking on a PAGE Buttonyou can call up the respective PAGE.

The individual Faders are indicated by symbols in the respective PAGE Buttons. Theyellow bar graph will give you the currently set value for the respective Fader. Ifthere is a green square above the Fader symbol, a Sequence, a Group or a SpecialMaster is allocated to this Executor Fader. If this square is yellow, the Sequence orChaser is active.

5 . 5 . 15 . 5 . 15 . 5 . 15 . 5 . 15 . 5 . 1Channel PChannel PChannel PChannel PChannel PageageageageageWhen pressing both PAGE buttons of the Channel Mode simultaneously the display will show a summary of theCHANNEL PAGES.

Or:Or:Or:Or:Or:

If in Channel Mode, you can call up the summary for all Channel Pages by pressing thePAGE Buttons in the display. By clicking on the respective PAGE Buttons you can call upthe PAGE.

5.5.35.5.35.5.35.5.35.5.3 Executor Button PExecutor Button PExecutor Button PExecutor Button PExecutor Button PageageageageageWhen pressing both PAGE buttons for the Executor Buttons simultaneously the display will show a summary of theEXECUTOR BUTTON Pages.

Or:Or:Or:Or:Or:

After pressing the LIST button once, the TFT display will show a listing of theSequences assigned to the Buttons, and in the middle a PAGE Button with thecurrently called-up EXECUTOR Page.

You can call up the summary for all EXECUTOR BUTTON Pages by pressing thePAGE buttons in the display. By clicking on a PAGE button you can call up therespective PAGE.

The buttons are indicated by symbols in the respective PAGE buttons. If there is agreen square, a Sequence, a Group or a Special Master is allocated to this ExecutorButton. If this square is yellow, the Sequence or Chaser is active.

5.5 Page Administration (PAGE)


5.5.45.5.45.5.45.5.45.5.4 Edit PAGE NameEdit PAGE NameEdit PAGE NameEdit PAGE NameEdit PAGE NamePress the EDIT button once.

If there are programmed Macros or Timecode Shows, in which the moved or deleted PagesIf there are programmed Macros or Timecode Shows, in which the moved or deleted PagesIf there are programmed Macros or Timecode Shows, in which the moved or deleted PagesIf there are programmed Macros or Timecode Shows, in which the moved or deleted PagesIf there are programmed Macros or Timecode Shows, in which the moved or deleted Pageswere to be used, these assignments may get lost!were to be used, these assignments may get lost!were to be used, these assignments may get lost!were to be used, these assignments may get lost!were to be used, these assignments may get lost!

Select the PAGE button on the display.

The EDIT NAME window will open. Enter a name using the keyboard and confirm with ENTER.

5.5.55.5.55.5.55.5.55.5.5Copying, moving and deleting PCopying, moving and deleting PCopying, moving and deleting PCopying, moving and deleting PCopying, moving and deleting Pagesagesagesagesages

Copy or move the PCopy or move the PCopy or move the PCopy or move the PCopy or move the Page containing the Executor faders age containing the Executor faders age containing the Executor faders age containing the Executor faders age containing the Executor faders ororororor buttons buttons buttons buttons buttonsPress the COPY button once to copy Pages (LED is on).

Or:Or:Or:Or:Or:

Press the MOVE button once to move Pages (LED is on).Press the PAGE button once (LED is on).�22222� for Executor fader or �33333� for Executor buttons (enter via numeric keypad).Press the �.�-(dot) key and then enter the page number.Press the AT key (LED is on), enter the number of the target Page and confirm with ENTER.

Copy or move complete PCopy or move complete PCopy or move complete PCopy or move complete PCopy or move complete Pages with Executor-Faders ages with Executor-Faders ages with Executor-Faders ages with Executor-Faders ages with Executor-Faders and and and and and buttonsbuttonsbuttonsbuttonsbuttonsPress the COPY button once to copy Pages (LED is on).

Or:Or:Or:Or:Or:

Press the MOVE button once to move Pages (LED is on).Press the PAGE button once (LED is on).Enter the page number.Press the AT key (LED is on), enter the number of the target Page and confirm with ENTER.

Delete PDelete PDelete PDelete PDelete Pages with Executor faders ages with Executor faders ages with Executor faders ages with Executor faders ages with Executor faders ororororor buttons buttons buttons buttons buttonsPress the DELETE button once to delete Pages (LED is on).Press the PAGE button once (LED is on).�22222� for Executor fader or �33333� for Executor buttons (enter via numeric keypad).Press the �.�-(dot) key and then the page number; confirm with ENTER.A window will open; here, confirm the deleting operation with the DELETE button.

Deleting PDeleting PDeleting PDeleting PDeleting Pages with Executor fader ages with Executor fader ages with Executor fader ages with Executor fader ages with Executor fader andandandandand buttons buttons buttons buttons buttonsPress the DELETE button once to delete Pages (LED is on).Press the PAGE button once (LED is on).Enter the page number on the keypad and confirm with ENTER.A window will open; here, confirm the deleting operation with the DELETE button.

5.5 Page Administration (PAGE)


5 .65 .65 .65 .65 .6 OFF menu (RUNNING PROGRAMS)OFF menu (RUNNING PROGRAMS)OFF menu (RUNNING PROGRAMS)OFF menu (RUNNING PROGRAMS)OFF menu (RUNNING PROGRAMS)Pressing the OFF button twice will open the RUNNING PROGRAMS window.

All active chasers, sequences, effect groups, timecode shows and Macros are displayed here.

● CHASES ALL OFF: Switches off all all all all all (!) active CHASERS.● SEQUENCES ALL OFF: Switches off all all all all all (!) active SEQUENCES.● EFFECTS ALL OFF: Switches off all all all all all (!) active EFFECTS.● TIMECODE ALL OFF: Switches off all all all all all (!) active TIMECODE SHOWS.● MACROS ALL OFF: Switches off all all all all all (!) active MACROS.

Pressing the DETAILS button will open the View ALL RUNNING EFFECTS menu. ààààà 6.6 View ALL RUNNING EFFECTSmenu● CURRENT PAGE OFF: Switches off all all all all all (!) Executors of the current Page● ALL FADERS OFF: Switches off all all all all all (!) active EXECUTOR Faders.● ALL BUTTONS OFF: Switches off all all all all all (!) active EXECUTOR buttons.● EVERYTHING OFF: Switches off all all all all all (!) EXECUTORS.● CLOSE: Will close this window.

You can also switch off Executors or Pages directly.

e.g.:e.g. :e.g. :e.g. :e.g. : � [OFF button] [EXECUTOR button] [3] [TIME button] [2] [Enter]

� [OFFbutton] [PAGE button] [3] [TIME button] [2] [Enter]

Furthermore, Fixtures or Groups can be released (kicked out) from direct access.e.g.:e.g. :e.g. :e.g. :e.g. : � [OFF button] [FIXTURE button] [3] [Enter]

� [OFF button] [GROUP button] [3] [Enter]

5.6 OFF menu (Running Programms)


33333

222221 Select Fixtures or Dimmers, for which an effect is to be used (selected Fixtures/Dimmers are indicated by yellow

characters).

2 Choose an Effect Group. Buttons and Encoder names are displayed above the encoders. Pressing the EDIT buttonfor this Effect Group will open the EDIT EFFECT menu in the right TFT display.

Or:Or:Or:Or:Or:

Make a right mouse click on a button in the Effect Pool. The EDIT EFFECT menu will appear in the right TFT display.

3 Pressing the ADD LINE button once will open the SELECT PARAMETER window. Now, select a function (e.g. PAN). Afterselecting a function, the SELECT TABLE window will open, where you can select an Effect for the chosen function.

PWM: Pulse width modulationRANDOM: Random fade-ins of individual channels of the selected functionCHASE: Running light functionSIN: Sinus functionCOS: Co-sinus functionLIN+: Saw tooth ascendingLIN�: Saw tooth descendingTRIANGLE: Triangle functionPHASE1/PHASE2/PHASE3: To create rainbow colors by means of the color mixing unit. Setting one of the PHASES

on one channel of the color mixing unit will create a rainbow color-blending whenexecuting the effect.

By pressing the USER DEFINED button (turns dark gray), self-created two-dimensional forms can be selected for thePAN/TILT function. If a form is to be created or modified, press the NEW or EDIT button to open the EDIT FORMS menu.ààààà 6.66.66.66.66.6 Creating and saving virtual forms

In order to assign further Effects to the selected Fixtures/Dimmers in this group, press the Add Line button again. Anew line will be displayed and the Select Parameter window will open. Choose a function now and assign an Effect.

Up to 16 individual Effects can be combined within a Group.

66666 EffectsEffectsEffectsEffectsEffects

6 .16 .16 .16 .16 .1 Effect PEffect PEffect PEffect PEffect PoolooloolooloolIn the Effect Pool, you can save up to 900 different Effect Groups. In the individual Effect Groups, different Effectsand functions can be combined and matched to each other.

For PAN/TILT values, self-created two-dimensional forms can be called up and adjusted. à à à à à 6.76.76.76.76.7 Creating and savingvirtual forms

The individual Effect Groups can be subdivided into fourfourfourfourfour different types:l Effect Group withwithwithwithwith assigned Fixtures or Dimmers (button of the Effect Group is displayed in pink)l Effect Group withoutwithoutwithoutwithoutwithout assigned Fixtures or Dimmers (button of the Effect Group is displayed in red)l Temporary Effect Group (buttons displayed in blue in the ALL RUNNING EFFECTS menu). If this Effect Group is not

saved after having been created, it will automatically be deleted after switching off.l Cuelist Effect Group (Effect Group button displayed in orange). A temporary effect will directly be saved in a Cue.

6.1.16.1.16.1.16.1.16.1.1Creating an Effect GroupCreating an Effect GroupCreating an Effect GroupCreating an Effect GroupCreating an Effect GroupCreate an EFFECT window. ààààà 3.1 Creating windows

6.1 Effect Pool


6 .26 .26 .26 .26 .2 Editing Effect GroupsEditing Effect GroupsEditing Effect GroupsEditing Effect GroupsEditing Effect GroupsWhen choosing an Effect Group from the Effect Pool, respective buttons will be displayed above the Encoders.Pressing the EDIT buttonEDIT buttonEDIT buttonEDIT buttonEDIT button for this Effect Group will open the EDIT EFFECT menu.

Or:Or:Or:Or:Or:

Make a right mouse click on a button in the Effect Pool. The EDIT EFFECT menu will appear in the right TFT display.

6.2.16.2.16.2.16.2.16.2.1 Editing EffectsEditing EffectsEditing EffectsEditing EffectsEditing EffectsIn the title bar, the Effect Group to be modified will be displayed with its number and name. In the second line, thecolumn functions are listed:● Sel (Selection): Displays the number of Fixtures or Dimmers assigned to this Effect. If the Fixtures� or

Dimmers� assignments are to be modified for an Effect, it has to be chosen first. If chosen,this will be indicated by a red background.

Pressing the SHOW SELECTION button once will select the assigned Fixtures and Dimmers (displayed inyellow).

Select those Fixtures and/or Dimmers (will be displayed in yellow) that are to be assigned tothis Effect. Now, press the TAKE SELECTION button once. The new number of Fixtures andDimmers will now be inserted and adopted. If an Effect Group without selection is to becreated, do notnotnotnotnot select Fixtures and Dimmers, but press the TAKE SELECTION button once.The cell will now display a �Zero�. The button of this Effect Group will be indicated in red inthe Effect Pool.

● Filter: Here, a filter can be set that limits the execution of the Effect either to the odd-numberedor to the even-numbered Fixtures. To assign a filter, select the cell. Press the Encoder rightof the display once. The SELECT FILTER window will open, where you can select a filter forthis Effect.

● Param (Parameter): Display of the assigned function, for which the respective Effect has an influence. To re-assign a function, select the cell. Press the Encoder right of the display once. The SELECTPARAMETER window will open, where you can select a different function for this Effect.

6.2 Editing Effect Groups



● Table: Here, the assigned Effect is indicated with its name.

To re-assign an Effect, select the cell. Press the Encoder right of the display once. The SELECTTABLE window will open, where you can select a different Effect for this function. The leftpart of the window displays the selected Effect. If the Effect Group has been started, theFixtures and Dimmers will be displayed on the Form.

PWM: Pulse width modulation. The pulse width can be defined as follows: Press theEFFECT SETUP button once (button has a dark background), press the PULSEWIDTH button once (button has a green background). Now, the pulse widthcan be modified using the Encoder below. The pulse width can be set to between0 and 100%. Pressing the Encoder once shortly will automatically set thewidth to 25, 50, or 75%. You can also use the ALIGN function to set this value.ààààà 3.4.1 3.4.1 3.4.1 3.4.1 3.4.1 ALIGN function

The values set for the respective Effects will be displayed in the WIDTH column.Press and holdPress and holdPress and holdPress and holdPress and hold the Encoder and turn to the right so that the focus (blue cellframe with red background) will be moved to the right. When moving the focusbeyond the right border, further columns will be displayed (WIDTH, BASE).

RANDOM: Random fade-ins of individual channels of the selected function. Die numberof channels faded in can be set.

SIN: Sinus functionCOS: Co-sinus functionLIN+: Saw tooth ascendingLIN�: Saw tooth descendingTRIANGLE: Triangle functionPHASE1/PHASE2/PHASE3: To create rainbow colors by means of the color mixing unit.

Setting one of the PHASES on one channel of the color mxing unit will createa rainbow color-blending when executing the effect.

By pressing the USER DEFINED button (turns dark gray), self-created two-dimensional formscan be selected for the PAN/TILT function. If a form is to be created or modified, press theNEW or EDIT button to open the EDIT FORMS menu. à à à à à 6.66.66.66.66.6 Creating and saving virtualforms

Pressing the SELECT button will adopt the function; the window will close discarding anymodifications when pressing CANCEL.

● Dir (direction): In this column, an arrow indicates in which direction the Effect will be executed. To reversethe direction, select the cell. Press the Encoder right of the display once.

● Size: In this column, each Effect is displayed with a separate value. The set value increases ordecreases the size of the selected function. The maximum limit for size modifications canbe set from �200 to +200%.

Before modifying the value of a size, select the Effect first. Press the SIZE button once (greenbackground). Now, you can set a different size using the Encoder below. Pressing the En-coder once shortly will automatically set the size to 100. Pressing the Encoder a secondtime, the value will increase to 200, and at the third time, it will be reset to �0�. You can alsouse the ALIGN function to set this value. ààààà 3.4.1 3.4.1 3.4.1 3.4.1 3.4.1 ALIGN function



● Modulator: In this column, you can assign an individual Modulator to each individual Size effect. Usinga Modulator, the effect size can automatically be altered.

To assign a Modulator for this effect, select this cell and shortly press the Encoder on theright side of the Display. The SELECT MODULATOR window will open, where you can now goto NEW MODULTOR by turning the Encoder and shortly pressing it to select this option. Anew modulator will now be generated in the lower part of the sheet.● Modulator: In this column, the modulators will be discerned by respective numbers.● Table: Here, the assigned effect for the modulator will be displayed by its name

(Assignment ààààà item TableTableTableTableTable, previous page).● From: Here, the starting point for the automatic modification is set.● To: Here, the end point for the automatic modification is set.● Phase: Here, an angle for moving individual modulators can be set.● Rate: Display of the set ratio between the speed for this individual Modulator as to

that of the whole Effect Group (Assignment ààààà item RateRateRateRateRate, below).● Base: You can also set an average value for each Effect using the BASE VALUE option. The set

value will overwrite all previously modified values of this function and by this, will controlall Fixtures/Dimmers evenly. The value can be set to between 0 and 100%.

Before modifying the BASE VALUE, select the Effect first. Press the BASE VALUE button once(green background). Now, you can set an average value using the Encoder below. Pressingthe Encoder once shortly will automatically set the value to 50% (default value). Pressingthe Encoder a second time, the value will be deleted and set to NONE (no BASE VALUE). If nononononoBASE VALUE ist set, the Cue �behind� or a direct access will take effect. You can also use theALIGN function to set this value. ààààà 3.4.1 3.4.1 3.4.1 3.4.1 3.4.1 ALIGN function

● Offset: Display of the set Offset for this Effect. By modifying the Offset, the starting points for theselected Fixtures and Dimmers will change. Default setting is between 0 and 100, i.e. thefirst Fixture/Dimmer starts with an offset of 0, the last with a maximum offset of 100%; allFixtures/Dimmers in between will be distributed evenly. The maximum limit for Offsetmodifications can be set from -100 to +100.

Before modifying the value of a size, select the Effect first. Press the OFFSET button once(green background). Now, you can set a different Offset using the Encoder below. Pressingthe Encoder once shortly will automatically set the value to 0. You can also use the ALIGNfunction to set this value. ààààà 3.4.1 3.4.1 3.4.1 3.4.1 3.4.1 ALIGN function

● Rate: Display of the set ratio between the speed for this individual Effect as to that of the wholeEffect Group. Possible settings range between 1:16 and 4:1. At a ratio of 16:1, the rate setfor the Effect Group will be divided by 16. If the setting is 4:1, the rate will be multiplied byfour.

Before modifying the ratio�s value, select the Effect first. Press the RATE FACTOR buttononce (green background). Now, you can set a different ratio using the Encoder below.Pressing the Encoder once shortly will automatically set the value to 1:1.

● Grp (Group): Display of the set number, by which the assigned Fixtures or Dimmers will be divided. In thesubdivided groups, the Effect will then fully be executed.

Before modifying the subdivision value, select the Effect first. Press the GROUPS buttononce (green background). Now, the subdivision of the Effect can be set using the Encoderbelow. Pressing the Encoder once shortly will automatically delete the set value.

● Wing: The set number will indicate, how often the assigned Fixtures or Dimmers and the Effect willbe mirrored. Possible settings range between �8 and +8.



Example: With a setting of 2, the assigned Fixtures/Dimmers will be divided in the middle.The set effect will now be executed in the first half forwards up to the middle, and in thesecond half, the Effect will be executed in reverse from the middle onto the last Fixture/Dimmer.

With a setting of -2, the assigned Fixtures/Dimmers will be divided in the middle. The seteffect will now be executed in the first half forwards up to the middle, and in the secondhalf, the Effect will be executed in reverse and phase-shifted by 180° from the middle ontothe last Fixture/Dimmer.

Before modifying the wing value, select the Effect first. Press the WINGS button once(green background). Now, the number of Effect wings can be set using the Encoder below.Pressing the Encoder once shortly will automatically delete the set value.

● AS (Adaptive Speed): If this function is activated, the speed will automatically be adjusted when the number ofFixtures or Dimmers changes. That means, the individual Effects of this Effect Group do notnotnotnotnotrun at different speeds when working with different numbers of Fixtures or Dimmers, butalways at the same step speed.

To activate the function, select the cell. Press the Encoder right of the display once.

Or:Or:Or:Or:Or:Activate by making a short right mouse click into the cell below AS. This will be indicated bya YES in this cell.

● Part (Partly): Display of the set sequential division of the respective Effect as to the whole Effect Group.The sequence of an Effect can be subdivided 16 times, and an Effect can then be assignedto one individualone individualone individualone individualone individual subdivision.

Example: With a setting of 1:2, the individual Effect would always be executed in the firsthalf of a Effect Group sequence. Before modifying the subdivision value, select the Effectfirst. Press the PART button once (green background). Now, you can set the subdivision ofthe Effect Group for the individual Effect by pressing and holdingpressing and holdingpressing and holdingpressing and holdingpressing and holding the Encoder below.After a subdivision is set, and when the Encoder is pressed, you cannotcannotcannotcannotcannot designate a sectionin which a particular Effect is to be executed.

Pressing the Encoder once shortly will set the value to ALWAYS and the Effect will beexecuted during the whole period.

6.2.26.2.26.2.26.2.26.2.2 Deleting individual EffectsDeleting individual EffectsDeleting individual EffectsDeleting individual EffectsDeleting individual EffectsSelect the Effect to be deleted.

Press the DELETE LINE button.


6 .36 .36 .36 .36 .3 Executing an Effect GroupExecuting an Effect GroupExecuting an Effect GroupExecuting an Effect GroupExecuting an Effect Group

Select the Effect Group from the Effect Pool. The Effect Group will be started automatically.

Or:Or:Or:Or:Or:

The names and playback buttons for the Effect Groups will be displayed in the right TFT display above the Encoders.The name of the currently selected Effect Group will appear above the left Encoder.

� Pressing the right arrow will start the complete Effect. The selected Fixtures or Dimmers will now form the Effect.

� Pressing the PAUSE button will stop or restart the complete Effect, respectively.

� You can switch off the Effect using the STOP button.

� By pressing the left arrow, the Effect will run backwards.

With the left INTENSITY Encoder, you can globally adjust the size of the whole Effect Group.

Pressing the Encoder while turning it will increase or decrease the Encoder�s resolution, depending on thesetup. When pressing an Encoder or the button above, this will bring up a Fader above the Encoder in thedisplay. Now, you can also use it to modify the value.

Use the SPEED encoder to set the speed for the whole Effect Group.

If you use the Encoder to increase the SOFTNESS value, the Effect will be faded in and out more softly. SOFTNESS canbe used for PWM-, RANDOM- and CHASE Effects.

Using the right FADE TIME Encoder, you can now globally set a fade in and fade out time for this Effect Group. Whenswitching the Effect Group on or off, this Fade Time will be faded in or out with the set duration.

Pressing the EDIT button will call up the Edit menu for this effect. ààààà 6.2 6.2 6.2 6.2 6.2 Editing Effects

Pressing the LIST button will open the VIEW ALL RUNNING EFFECTS window, where you have an overview on allcurrently active Effect Groups. à à à à à 6.6 6.6 6.6 6.6 6.6 View ALL RUNNING EFFECTS menu

6.3 Executing an Effect Group


6.4 Customizing an Effect Group

6 .46 .46 .46 .46 .4 Customizing an Effect GroupCustomizing an Effect GroupCustomizing an Effect GroupCustomizing an Effect GroupCustomizing an Effect GroupThe global settings like e.g. Bounce, BPM, Intensity, Speed etc., are automatically saved to the Effect Group.

You can customize the individual sequences of the Effect Groups by using the respective buttons.

Speed Scale: The current ratio of the SPEED setting will be displayed on the button. Pressing this button willopen the SPEED SCALE menu. Pressing a button will re-adjust the Speed setting. With MUL BY2 or MUL BY 4, the SPEED setting will by multiplied by 2 or 4, with DIV BY 2, 4 or 8, the SPEEDsetting will be divided by 2, 4 or 8. Pressing the 1:1 button will recall the default setting again.

Speed Group: The button will display the currently assigned SPEED group. Pressing this button will open theSPEED GROUP menu. By pressing a button, you can designate a SPEED Group. Using the Faderof the assigned SPEED Group, you can now adjust the speed for this Effect Group. ààààà 5.1.105.1.105.1.105.1.105.1.10Assigning Special Masters

If INDIVIDUAL is selected (default setting), you can adjust the speed only by using the SPEEDencoder.

Bounce: If this button is pressed (dark background), the whole Effect Group will first run forwards andthen backwards, etc.

BPM: If this button is pressed (dark background), the speed of the whole Effect Group will becontrolled by the automatic measure recognition. à à à à à 2.14 2.14 2.14 2.14 2.14 Setting Sound signals

Start Speed: Pressing this button once will save the currently set speed. The button will display the savedspeed. From now on, this Effect Group will be started with this speed, even if the speed waschanged during the execution. To delete the saved speed, use the Encoder to set the SPEED toSTOP and press the START SPEED button once. Now, no speed is saved and the button willdisplay NONE.

Off On Overwritten: This Effect Group will be switched off, when the OFF ON OVERWRITTEN button is pressed (darkbackground) and another Effect Group is started, in which the same Fixtures/Dimmers are tobe used (default setting).

If this function is disabled, the Effect Group will notnotnotnotnot be switched off. It is still active, but doesnot trigger any Fixture/Dimmer. The button of this Effect Group in the Effect Pool will displaya white/red flashing �2�. The number indicates, at what position this Group will be in relationto the other overwritten Effect Groups. If the otherotherotherotherother Effect Group that had overwritten thisGroup, is switched off, this Effect Group will again trigger the Fixtures/Dimmers. This functionis active by default when creating a new Effect Group.

Sync Start: If this button is pressed (dark background), and another Effect Group had already been started,thisthisthisthisthis Group will automatically be started at the same speed and position.

One Shot: If this button is pressed (dark background), the Effect Group will only be executed for one runand deactivated afterwards.


55555

44444

66666

6 .56 .56 .56 .56 .5 Effect Groups in CuesEffect Groups in CuesEffect Groups in CuesEffect Groups in CuesEffect Groups in CuesEffect Group calls can be saved in Cues, too.

In the Cues, the settings for call (GO, GO-, Pause and OFF), Intensity, SPEED, SOFTNESS and IN/OUT FADE TIME aresaved. No further settings from the Effect Group will be saved in the cues (function as with presets).

Or:Or:Or:Or:Or:

It is also possible to create Cues, to which an own Effect Group can be assigned. If temporary Effect Groups are usedwhen creating the Cues, a copy of the Cue will also be saved, i.e. it will not depend on the original Effect Groupanymore.

1 Start an Effect Group in the Effect Pool by selecting it.

2 Press the STORE button once.

3 Press the EXECUTOR button to which the call is to be saved. The Effect Group call will be saved in the Cue with allsettings mentioned above. If this Cue is called up, the Effect Group will be started.

When calling up Effect Groups, its size, speed and softness can be faded in or out.

If in the Effect Group a FADE TIME is set, the intensity and speed or softness of the Effect Group will automaticallybe faded in or out when this Group is started.

4 In the Executor Sheet or in Edit Sequence, press the EFFECT button (will be displayed dark gray). The window will bedivided into two halves. The upper part will display the Cue, the lower part the calls of the individual Effect Groupsfor the selected Cue, including the respective parameters.

5 Select a Cue in which calls or parameters of Effect Groups are to be modified (selected Cue will be displayed with ablue frame and a magenta background).

6 The lower chart displays all calls of Effect Groups from this Cue.

Select an individual call to be modified (will be displayed with a blue frame). In the right display, the setting will beadopted and displayed above the Encoders and can be customized at will. If intensity, speed or softness are to befaded in or out with the set Fade Time when the Effect Group is called up, make one right mouse click into the cellsbehind the value in column F (Fade). The column will show a Y for YES. Press UPDATE to confirm the modificationsand save them in the Cue.

You can modify the cell�s Name, Intens, Speed, F, Soft and Fade directly by a right mouse click.

6.5 Effect Groups in Cues


66666

55555

11111 22222

33333 44444

6.6 View ALL RUNNING EFFECTS

6 .66 .66 .66 .66 .6 View ALL RUNNING EFFECTS menuView ALL RUNNING EFFECTS menuView ALL RUNNING EFFECTS menuView ALL RUNNING EFFECTS menuView ALL RUNNING EFFECTS menuIn this menu, all currently active Effect Groups will be displayed.

Press the EFFECT button twice. (On older consoles, this button is not labeled and is positioned between the VIEW andGOTO buttons. An appropriate label can be ordered from MA.)

Or:Or:Or:Or:Or:

When choosing an Effect Group from the Effect Pool, respective buttons will be displayed above the Encoders. Pressthe LIST button.

1 By pressing the ALL OFF button, you can switch off all Effect Groups simultaneously.

2 You can leave the menu with the CLOSE button.

3 In the left part of the menu, all manually called-up Effect Groups will be displayed. Pressing the OFF button on theright side of MANUAL, all these Effect Groups will be switched off.

4 The middle part of the menu shows all Effect Groups that were called up via EXECUTOR faders. Pressing the OFFbutton right of the EXECUTOR will switch off these Effect Groups. ààààà 5.1.15.1.15.1.15.1.15.1.1 Assigning Effect Groups to EXECUTORfaders

5 The left part of the menu shows all Effect Groups that were called up by Cues. Pressing the OFF button on the rightside of CUELIST, all these Effect Groups will be switched off.

6 The lower part of the menu shows all Effect Group calls performed since last saving a Cue, including their respectiveparameters. When saving the next Cue, all calls in this Sheet will also be saved.

It is also possible to modify individual calls. To do so, select the respective call (will be displayed with a blue frame).The setting will be adopted, displayed above the Encoders and can be adjusted with them. You can delete a completecall by making a right mouse click into the NAME column. If you only want to delete a single parameter, make a rightmouse click on the parameter.


11111

6 .76 .76 .76 .76 .7 Creating and Saving Virtual Forms (EDIT FORMS)Creating and Saving Virtual Forms (EDIT FORMS)Creating and Saving Virtual Forms (EDIT FORMS)Creating and Saving Virtual Forms (EDIT FORMS)Creating and Saving Virtual Forms (EDIT FORMS)

6.7.16.7.16.7.16.7.16.7.1 Creating Virtual FormsCreating Virtual FormsCreating Virtual FormsCreating Virtual FormsCreating Virtual FormsFrom this menu, you can create two-dimensional forms for the PAN/TILT function. When creating Forms, themovements can directly be given out to the Fixtures. This serves mainly for testing the created forms and movements.The created Forms will automatically be saved to the Form Pool.

Calling up this menu: ààààà 6.1.1 6.1.1 6.1.1 6.1.1 6.1.1 Creating an Effect Group, item 3item 3item 3item 3item 3ààààà 6.2.1 6.2.1 6.2.1 6.2.1 6.2.1 Editing Effects, item Table item Table item Table item Table item Table

6.7 Creating and Saving Virtual Forms (EDIT FORMS)

1 Press the PREDEFINES button once. A window will open, where several prepared Forms will be displayed. Select oneof these Forms; this Form will now be drawn onto the black window.


44444

11111

22222

33333

44444

11111

22222

333335555555555

6666666666

Make a left mouse click on various positions of the marked form. With each click on the form, a new red dot will bedisplayed on that position. In order to delete one of the dots, make a middle mouse click on this dot.

To reshape the form, make another left mouse click and hold hold hold hold hold the mouse button on one of the red dots. If you clickthe right mouse button during the reshaping (while holding the left mouse button), you can define the reshapingeach time. ààààà item1

1 By pressing the button, you can program in which way the lines shall be drawn when reshaping the form:ANGLE: straight lineARC: outer arcARROW: inner arc

By reshaping the form, the lines will be expanded and, respectively, the extended positions of the form will bereported to the Fixture faster.

2 If the extended lines and, consequently, the longer ways for the Fixture are to be transmitted with the same speed,you have to press the EQUALIZE DOTS button once.

3 The form can be modified in its horizontal or vertical size using the Hori: and Vert: sliders. By pressing the dark-greybutton below the modified sliders shortly, both values can be set simultaneously. By pressing the �< >� button, bothsliders can be coupled, so that the size can be modified simultaneously.

4 Using the ROTATION slider, the form can be turned from 0° to 360°.

5 By pressing the MIRROR button, the form can be mirrored.

6 You can leave the EDIT menu with the CLOSE button.


6.7.26.7.26.7.26.7.26.7.2Modifying FormsModifying FormsModifying FormsModifying FormsModifying FormsThe EDIT FORMS window will open by pressing the EDIT button.


Make a left mouse click on the respective fields �now enter the formula via keyboard.

The form will be confirmed by pressing CONFIRM.


Syntax to enter a formula manually:

The standard display of mathematic formulas will be executed. The following is allowed:

● Mathematic Basic Operators: +, �, *, /

● Numerical constants: integers, floatingpoint numbers or exponential figures Example for valid numerical constants: 2.71818

1.2e � 20,4

● Other constants: pi corresponds to the circle figure p● Variables: x● Mathematical functions:

� sin(x) or sinus(x)� cos(x) or cosinus(x)� abs(x) corresponds to the absolute amount� sqrt(x) corresponds to the square root� pow(x; y) corresponds to the y Power of x

Arguments errors with x = 0 und y < = 0 or with x < 0 and y are no integers

Examples:sin(3 * x)sqrt(abs(x)) * sin(x)sin(x) * cos(3 * x) * pi/2(cos(x) * abs(x) + 1) / pow(x;2)(cos(0.5 * x) * abs(x) + 0.5) / 2

With good knowledge in maths, you can also use formulas for PAN and TILT.


7.1 Timecode

77777 Remote ControlRemote ControlRemote ControlRemote ControlRemote Control

7 .17 .17 .17 .17 .1 TimecodeTimecodeTimecodeTimecodeTimecodeAll programs of the grandMA can be synchronized by the LTC Timecode or MTC (Midi Timecode, Quader Frame, MTCFull Frame are not supported).

Timecode synchronization can be used to call up programs of one or more controllers to synchronize with agiven audio or video recording. SMPTE 24-, 25- and 30 Drop and Non-Drop Frames are encoded timeinformation, e.g. to be recorded on a separate track of a multitrack tape (frequency range of 1�2 kHz). Normally,this Timecode is already added when compiling the music, e.g. for presentations, but it can also be recordedafterwards making use of a regular recording studio. If the music is to be recorded in stereo, at least a thirdtrack is needed for the Timecode.All programs of the grandMA can be synchronized by the LTC Timecode.During the playback of the tape, the Timecode information is being transmitted to the connected controllers.Each controller has an internal memory that triggers the activation of a specific program at a given point oftime. On the grandMA, the EXTERNAL LTC Timecode can be connected via a jack socket and the MTC via MidiIN on the backside of the unit.

7.1.17.1.17.1.17.1.17.1.1 Introduction to the New TimecodeIntroduction to the New TimecodeIntroduction to the New TimecodeIntroduction to the New TimecodeIntroduction to the New TimecodeThe old timecode (up to version 2.20) had some disadvantages:

- Timecode was not controllable with the command line.- Recorded GOs were relative and not referring to absolute cue numbers.- Only the movement of the master-fader was recordable.- Loading and selecting of timecode shows was a bit difficult.- The way how timecode shows stayed in memory, and how they were linked to timecode windows was not easy

to understand.- The graphical representation was powerful and easy to look at, but for the inexperienced user not so easy to

work with.These points and others lead to the total reorganisation of dealing with timecode shows.

The good news first: You will not loose any old timecode shows. The new system will automatically convert allyour old shows into the new format.

Here the major advantages of the new Timecode Show:Here the major advantages of the new Timecode Show:Here the major advantages of the new Timecode Show:Here the major advantages of the new Timecode Show:Here the major advantages of the new Timecode Show:- Timecode shows are organised in a pool. So the basic handling of timecode shows like edit, copy, delete, etc. is

totally compliant with the rest of the desk.- Timecode shows are completely embedded into the command line. It is no problem now to start timecode show

number 5 from a macro.- GOTO commands are supported (and used as default when recording normal GOs), referring to absolute cue

numbers.- Cue names and numbers are displayed in the timecode show.- All kinds of executor fader movements are recordable. So you can now record the change of a chaser speed or

a crossfade.- Automatic fader data reduction, reducing the amount of recorded fader movements dramatically and allowing

easier manual editing afterwards.- Free choice of editing in graphic or text mode. Text mode is supporting filtering for watching only wanted

executors.- Blind programming.- No restrictions to the amount of timecode shows running at one time (memory of course).- No restrictions for �no mouse please, users�. The timecode show can be fully edited with encoders and/or

touchscreen.- Timecode shows can be �write-protected�. So if you only want to watch your show running, you will not

accidentally change something.- Copy / Paste function even between shows possible. Timecode shows can be merged together.- Autostart feature for timecode show, e.g. the show will automatically load and run upon detection of the

correct SMPTE signal.- Repeat function with definable number of repeats for timecode shows with internal synchronisation.


7.1 Timecode

7 . 1 . 27 . 1 . 27 . 1 . 27 . 1 . 27 . 1 . 2 Creating a Timecode ShowCreating a Timecode ShowCreating a Timecode ShowCreating a Timecode ShowCreating a Timecode ShowThe graphical way with touchscreen/mouse:The graphical way with touchscreen/mouse:The graphical way with touchscreen/mouse:The graphical way with touchscreen/mouse:The graphical way with touchscreen/mouse:

- Open a timecode pool window.- Touch one of the timecode show buttons, you will get the timecode control bar for this show in the display on

the right.- Enter the name for the timecode show using the PC keyboard.

- Press the EDIT field in the timecode control bar, and the timecode editor will appear.The command line way:The command line way:The command line way:The command line way:The command line way:

- EDIT TIMECODE X ENTER . Brings up the timecode editor and the timecode control bar for timecode show X. Thereis no hardware key for TIMECODE on the grandMA, but you can enter this in the command line or into a macro.

The mixed way:The mixed way:The mixed way:The mixed way:The mixed way:

- EDIT and then touch a button in the timecode pool.If the timecode show that you have chosen was empty, there is only the naked editor in front of you, and you shouldnow start recording or manual editing.

7.1.37.1.37.1.37.1.37.1.3 Playing back a Timecode ShowPlaying back a Timecode ShowPlaying back a Timecode ShowPlaying back a Timecode ShowPlaying back a Timecode ShowThe graphical way with touchscreen/mouse:The graphical way with touchscreen/mouse:The graphical way with touchscreen/mouse:The graphical way with touchscreen/mouse:The graphical way with touchscreen/mouse:

- Brings up a timecode control bar for the desired timecode show when touching a button in the timecode pool.- Use the cells with the cd player-like symbols to control the show playback.The command line way:The command line way:The command line way:The command line way:The command line way:

- COMMAND TIMECODE X ENTER. COMMAND is one of the executor commands that you will find above the pagebuttons. You can use GO+ , PAUSE, <<< , >>> , ON and OFF.

The mixed way:The mixed way:The mixed way:The mixed way:The mixed way:

- COMMAND (as described above) and then touch a button in the timecode pool.Description of playback commands:Description of playback commands:Description of playback commands:Description of playback commands:Description of playback commands:

StatusStatusStatusStatusStatus Command LineCommand LineCommand LineCommand LineCommand Line DescriptionDescriptionDescriptionDescriptionDescription

STOP OFF Show is stopped, no output is generated.

PAUSE PAUSE Show is stopped, output is generated for current time.

PLAY GO+ Show is running.

RECORD STORE Show is recording.

JUMP BACK <<< Show jumps to the next breakpoint before current time.

JUMP FORWARD >>> Show jumps to the next breakpoint after the current time.

If a show is generating output, the corresponding button in the timecode pool will show the current time. In case ofrecording, this button is also blinking red with the note �REC�.

External / Internal SyncExternal / Internal SyncExternal / Internal SyncExternal / Internal SyncExternal / Internal SyncPLAY and RECORD depend in their behaviour on the sync setting (in the options menu).

If sync is set to internal, time will be running continuously, based on the internal time base.

If sync is set to �SMPTE�, the current time of the timecode show depends on the SMPTE input signal. If MIDI is set,MTC (Midi Timecode) will be used.

In the headline of the timecode pool you find a SMPTE input indicator. Regardless of shows using SMPTE, it willalways display the current SMPTE input signal together with the SMPTE frame format.

If a show is using SMPTE (external synchronisation), the local time within the show can differ from the externalSMPTE time. By using the timecode offset in the options menu, you can set up a time offset, which is subtractedfrom the external SMPTE time.

Shows which are using internal sync can have a user definable repeat. These settings are also found in the optionsmenu.


7.1 Timecode

Pre Roll & After Roll, Dropout EliminationPre Roll & After Roll, Dropout EliminationPre Roll & After Roll, Dropout EliminationPre Roll & After Roll, Dropout EliminationPre Roll & After Roll, Dropout EliminationDue to the fact that SMPTE is an analogue signal, fluctuations can occur. Very often there are temporary errors inthe recorded SMPTE signal which are called dropouts.

As such misleading small errors should of course not affect the board, it filters out these errors automatically.Therefore the desk is filtering out these errors.

This filter is controlled by two values: PRE ROLLPRE ROLLPRE ROLLPRE ROLLPRE ROLL and AFTER ROLLAFTER ROLLAFTER ROLLAFTER ROLLAFTER ROLL.

PRE ROLLPRE ROLLPRE ROLLPRE ROLLPRE ROLL defines the time that a signal must be continuously good, before it is accepted by the console.

A small pre roll means that your console is reacting faster to incoming SMPTE signals.

AFTER ROLLAFTER ROLLAFTER ROLLAFTER ROLLAFTER ROLL is defining the time that a signal must be continuously bad or missing, before it is really assumed tobe off. During the after roll time, the console continues the show, using its internal time base.

A small after roll means that your console stops faster after a missing SMPTE signal, but it also reacts faster to errorsin the SMPTE signal.

The settings for pre roll and after roll can be found in the context menu of the timecode poolcontext menu of the timecode poolcontext menu of the timecode poolcontext menu of the timecode poolcontext menu of the timecode pool.

The names for pre roll and after roll have a historical reason. At the beginning of the timecode era , the huge tapesin the machines which contained timecode and audio signals where really visibly rolling .

Manually Changing Current TimeManually Changing Current TimeManually Changing Current TimeManually Changing Current TimeManually Changing Current TimeIf the show is playing back or recording with external sync, it is not possible to change the time manually.

There are many different ways to change the current time of your show:

With the mouse in graphic mode:With the mouse in graphic mode:With the mouse in graphic mode:With the mouse in graphic mode:With the mouse in graphic mode:

- left mouse click somewhere into the timelineWith the encoder:With the encoder:With the encoder:With the encoder:With the encoder:

- Turn the time encoder (leftmost) to change the current time. Each click on the encoder means one frame.- If you press and turn this encoder simultaneously, each click means one second.- If you press the encoder without turning, you can enter an absolute time.With the �jump to breakpoint� commands:With the �jump to breakpoint� commands:With the �jump to breakpoint� commands:With the �jump to breakpoint� commands:With the �jump to breakpoint� commands:

- You will find them as the outer playback symbols in the timecode control bar and as command line functions<<< and >>>.

- Time will jump to the next available breakpoint in the given direction.With the event encoder (second) in the bar:With the event encoder (second) in the bar:With the event encoder (second) in the bar:With the event encoder (second) in the bar:With the event encoder (second) in the bar:

- Whenever you select a new event , time is jumping to the exact time of that event.


7.1 Timecode

7.1.47.1.47.1.47.1.47.1.4 Recording a Timecode ShowRecording a Timecode ShowRecording a Timecode ShowRecording a Timecode ShowRecording a Timecode ShowRecording is only possible, if the timecode show is not write-protected (options menu).

Recording does always mean �live on stage�. It can be done in three ways:

a)a)a)a)a) Fully automatic recording with external synchronisation.Fully automatic recording with external synchronisation.Fully automatic recording with external synchronisation.Fully automatic recording with external synchronisation.Fully automatic recording with external synchronisation. The current time is given by the SMPTEsignal and every executor command or fader movement will be added to the timecode show until you stop or pausethe show. Your actions and things already in the show are live on stage. All that you do and all show data run liveon stage. You can repeat the recording step by step to add more and more details to your show.

b )b )b )b )b ) Fully automatic recording with internal synchronisation.Fully automatic recording with internal synchronisation.Fully automatic recording with internal synchronisation.Fully automatic recording with internal synchronisation.Fully automatic recording with internal synchronisation. Basically the same as with externalsync, time is running continuously, but you define yourself where to start and where to stop.

c )c )c )c )c ) Half automatic manual recording.Half automatic manual recording.Half automatic manual recording.Half automatic manual recording.Half automatic manual recording. In this mode time is not running, although your show is in recordingmode. Between each executor command that you want to be recorded, you can set the recording time manuallywith an encoder or by direct absolute input (simply press the first encoder). This is probably the best way of editingfor the experienced user, who already has a time table in front of him. Even fader commands can be recorded thisway.

Starting to record:Starting to record:Starting to record:Starting to record:Starting to record:

----- Automatic recordingAutomatic recordingAutomatic recordingAutomatic recordingAutomatic recording is started by pressing the record symbol in the timecode control bar (the red symbol).It then depends on the sync-setting (in options menu), whether you will record with internal or externalsynchronisation. It can also be started using the command line, similar to recording a macro: STORE TIMECODEX ENTER or STORE and press a button in the timecode pool.

----- Manual recordingManual recordingManual recordingManual recordingManual recording is started by pressing the MANUAL RECORD button in the timecode editor.Stop recording:Stop recording:Stop recording:Stop recording:Stop recording:

- Recording is stopped when you PAUSE or STOP the timecode show.- Automatic recording with internal sync is also interrupted if you enter a new time.- Recording is NOT stopped when you close the timecode editor. So pay attention to what is being recorded,

otherwise you will find a huge timecode show the other day �After recordingAfter recordingAfter recordingAfter recordingAfter recording, especially if you have recorded fader movements, it is always a good idea to use the DODODODODOFADER DATA REDUCTIONFADER DATA REDUCTIONFADER DATA REDUCTIONFADER DATA REDUCTIONFADER DATA REDUCTION (in the options menu). This keeps your show slim. The fader data reduction processguarantees, that the compressed signal will not differ more than 1 frame in time and 1% in value from the original.Usually recorded fader events will be reduced to 20% or less of the original amount.

The Length of the ShowThe Length of the ShowThe Length of the ShowThe Length of the ShowThe Length of the ShowDuring recording, the length of the show is automatically extended if needed. This also happens if you manually addevents after the current length (see manual editing).

The length of a show becomes very important if you plan to use it with internal sync and repeat. Also in combinationwith the �when reaching the end� setting (to be found in options menu), it is worth to make some considerationshow long your show should be.

The length of the timecode show can be changed in the options menu.

7.1.57.1.57.1.57.1.57.1.5 Manual Editing of a Timecode ShowManual Editing of a Timecode ShowManual Editing of a Timecode ShowManual Editing of a Timecode ShowManual Editing of a Timecode ShowEditing is only enabled, if the timecode show is NOT write-protected (options menu).

Track ManagementTrack ManagementTrack ManagementTrack ManagementTrack ManagementA timecode show consists of TRACKS:

A TRACK has a specific function. At the moment, only EXECUTOR TRACKSEXECUTOR TRACKSEXECUTOR TRACKSEXECUTOR TRACKSEXECUTOR TRACKS are implemented, but for the future,we could well think of implementing tracks for submasters, global speeds etc., too. This way, one track would alwaysrelate to one specific executor. It is not possible to have two tracks for the same executor.

A TRACK consists of SUBTRACKSSUBTRACKSSUBTRACKSSUBTRACKSSUBTRACKS:

A SUBTRACK has a specific function that relates to its �father track�. For example, a subtrack for an executor trackcould have the crossfade function. One subtrack always relates to one specific function. It is not possible to havetwo subtracks for the same function.

Every executor track has at least one subtrack for executor commands. Subtracks for fader movements are addedif needed.

A SUBTRACK contains EVENTSEVENTSEVENTSEVENTSEVENTS:

An EVENT contains a specific TIME and DATA. The DATA is interpreted according to the function of the assignedsubtrack.


7.1 Timecode

Adding TracksAdding TracksAdding TracksAdding TracksAdding TracksWhile recording, respective TRACKS are added automatically. But of course you can also add tracks manually:

- Press the TRACK FUNCTIONS button or make a right mouse click into the track display of the timecode showeditor (on the left side, below the sort button).

- Select ADD NEW TRACK.- Choose an executor from the list, or simply press a real executor button. You can even enter EXEC 17 ENTER in

the command line. An executor track for this executor will be added to your timecode show (if it did not existalready).

Changing the ExecutorChanging the ExecutorChanging the ExecutorChanging the ExecutorChanging the ExecutorChanging the executor of an already existing track is very similar to adding a new track:

- Choose the track that you want to change (with the track encoder or by touching it)- Press the TRACK FUNCTIONS button.

- Select CHANGE EXECUTOR from the list. The rest is similar to adding a new track.

Adding SubtracksAdding SubtracksAdding SubtracksAdding SubtracksAdding SubtracksIf needed while recording, respective SUBTRACKS are added automatically. But of course you can also add subtracksmanually. Subtracks can only be added to already existing tracks:

- Choose a track (with the track encoder in the bar or by touching it).- Press the TRACK FUNCTIONS button or make a right mouse click on the TRACK.- Select ADD NEW SUBTRACK.- Choose the type of the new subtrack from the list.

Deleting Tracks or SubtracksDeleting Tracks or SubtracksDeleting Tracks or SubtracksDeleting Tracks or SubtracksDeleting Tracks or Subtracks- Choose a track (with the track encoder in the bar or by touching it).- Press the TRACK FUNCTIONS button or make a right mouse click on the TRACK.- Select DELETE TRACK.- If the track contains events, you will be asked for a confirmation, otherwise the track is deleted immediately.- If you delete the first subtrack (like executor command track), the whole track with all its subtracks will be

deleted.

Expanding / Collapsing TracksExpanding / Collapsing TracksExpanding / Collapsing TracksExpanding / Collapsing TracksExpanding / Collapsing TracksTracks can be EXPANDED EXPANDED EXPANDED EXPANDED EXPANDED or COLLAPSEDCOLLAPSEDCOLLAPSEDCOLLAPSEDCOLLAPSED. An expanded track is showing all its subtracks, while a collapsedtrack is hiding all its subtracks beside the first one. For an executor track, the first subtrack is always the executorcommand subtrack.

This functionality is only affecting the display. �Hidden� subtracks are played back, too.

An expanded track is marked with a �+� in front of it, a collapsed track is showing a �-�.

Click on this mark to change the expand/collapse status of the track.

The TRACK FUNCTIONS menu contains functions to expand/collapse all tracks simultaneously.

Selecting TracksSelecting TracksSelecting TracksSelecting TracksSelecting TracksTracks can be SELECTED individually. A selected track is displayed darker.

Only selected tracks are shown in TEXT display modeOnly selected tracks are shown in TEXT display modeOnly selected tracks are shown in TEXT display modeOnly selected tracks are shown in TEXT display modeOnly selected tracks are shown in TEXT display mode. For some functions it is particularly important,whether a track is selected or not. But for normal operations in graphic display mode you do not really have to careabout this.

Click on the track name cell (maybe you have to do this twice, because the first click is choosing it as the currenttrack) or press the track encoder within the bar to change the selection status of a track.

The TRACK FUNCTIONS menu contains functions to select/deselect all tracks simultaneously. These functions arealso available as direct �R� (Reset all tracks to unselected) and �S� (Set all tracks to selected) buttons.

At the moment, selecting tracks does not affect the playback functionality, it is only a display and edit function. Forfuture versions, however, we plan to have that as a special playback mode, to enable playback output for selectedtracks only.


Sorting TracksSorting TracksSorting TracksSorting TracksSorting TracksMaybe you have a lot of tracks in your show, but at the moment you are only interested in some of them. Selectthese tracks and press the SORT button. The selected tracks will be sorted and displayed at the very top of the trackdisplay.

If you have selected all (or none) tracks and press SORT, they are sorted in their natural order, e.g. the order in whichthey appear on the console.

The sorting of tracks is part of the show and is saved with the show. It is only a display function and not affecting theplayback functionality.

Adding EventsAdding EventsAdding EventsAdding EventsAdding EventsWith the mouse in graphic mode:With the mouse in graphic mode:With the mouse in graphic mode:With the mouse in graphic mode:With the mouse in graphic mode:

- Choose the ADD mouse tool. The cursor will show an arrow with a big �+�.- Click anywhere into a track. At this very position, a new event will appear.- To edit this new event, make a right click on it.With encoder and buttons:With encoder and buttons:With encoder and buttons:With encoder and buttons:With encoder and buttons:

- Set the current time with the time encoder (first one) to where you want to add the event.- Use the track encoder (second one) to select the track on which you want to add the event.- Press the ADD HERE! button.- At the given position, a new event will appear, and you are directly going to edit the event.When you are adding events on an executor command track, the timecode editor is trying to be smart. It is trying tofigure out what would be the most likely command at the given place.

For example if you have an executor with a cuelist, containing 3 steps, and you simply add one event after the other,it is assuming:

GOTO STEP1 , GOTO STEP2 , GOTO STEP3 , OFF

Or if you are adding a new event after a FLASH UP ON command, it will of course offer the new event as FLASH UPOFF.

For chaser, the editor is never predicting GOTOs, instead it is using conventional Gos. The editor is also assuming,that you only want to switch the chase on, and then off again, regardless of how many steps the chase has.

Attention, mouse users:Attention, mouse users:Attention, mouse users:Attention, mouse users:Attention, mouse users:

Please be aware that if you have chosen the ADD mouse tool, this tool stays active. So wherever you click with themouse � something will be added. If you switch on �always reset mouse tool� in the options menu, the risk ofaccidentally adding something is reduced.

Selecting EventsSelecting EventsSelecting EventsSelecting EventsSelecting EventsEvents can be SELECTED individually. A selected event is displayed in red. All selected events together are called theselection. You can MOVE, DELETE or COPY this selection.

Selecting with the mouse in graphic mode:Selecting with the mouse in graphic mode:Selecting with the mouse in graphic mode:Selecting with the mouse in graphic mode:Selecting with the mouse in graphic mode:

- Choose the SELECT mouse tool. The cursor will show a selection frame.- Left mouse click anywhere into a track, keep mouse button pressed, and drag a frame.- Upon release of the mouse button, all events inside the frame are being selected.Selection with the mouse in text mode:Selection with the mouse in text mode:Selection with the mouse in text mode:Selection with the mouse in text mode:Selection with the mouse in text mode:

- Left mouse click anywhere into the list, keep mouse button pressed, and drag vertically a frame.- Upon release of the mouse button, all text lines (events) inside the frame are being selected.With the CREATE SELECTION function:With the CREATE SELECTION function:With the CREATE SELECTION function:With the CREATE SELECTION function:With the CREATE SELECTION function:

- Press the CREATE SELECTION button, the CREATE SELECTION menu appears.- Choose if you want to make a selection only on the current (green) track, or on all selected tracks.- Choose one of the three commands:- A) BEFORE TIME Events before the current time will be selected.- B) ALL All events on given tracks will be selected- C) AFTER TIME Events after the current time will be selected.

7.1 Timecode


Selecting the Current EventSelecting the Current EventSelecting the Current EventSelecting the Current EventSelecting the Current EventOne event can be defined as the current event. In graphic mode, this event is blinking. In text mode, this text line(event) is yellow. Its position is shown in the timecode control bar.

You can select the current event one way or the other:


- Choose the SELECT mouse tool.- Make a selection that contains only one event, or try to exactly pick one event.With the encoders in the bar:With the encoders in the bar:With the encoders in the bar:With the encoders in the bar:With the encoders in the bar:

- Select the track with the track encoder (second one).- Select the event with the event encoder (third one).With the XY-encoder in text mode:With the XY-encoder in text mode:With the XY-encoder in text mode:With the XY-encoder in text mode:With the XY-encoder in text mode:

- Simply scroll through the list.

Deleting EventsDeleting EventsDeleting EventsDeleting EventsDeleting EventsWith the mouse in graphic mode:With the mouse in graphic mode:With the mouse in graphic mode:With the mouse in graphic mode:With the mouse in graphic mode:

- Select the DELETE mouse tool. The cursor will show an arrow with a big �-�.- Drag a frame or click exactly on an event. Events that you pick or which are inside the frame will be deleted.With the DELETE SELECTION button:With the DELETE SELECTION button:With the DELETE SELECTION button:With the DELETE SELECTION button:With the DELETE SELECTION button:

- Make a selection or select the current event.- Then press DELETE SELECTION. If more than one event is going to be deleted, you will be asked to confirm that.Attention, mouse users:Attention, mouse users:Attention, mouse users:Attention, mouse users:Attention, mouse users:

Please be aware that if you have chosen the DELETE mouse tool, this tool stays active. So wherever you click withthe mouse � it will be deleted. If you switch on �always reset mouse tool� in the options menu, the risk ofaccidentally deleting something is reduced.

Moving EventsMoving EventsMoving EventsMoving EventsMoving EventsMove with the mouse in graphic mode:Move with the mouse in graphic mode:Move with the mouse in graphic mode:Move with the mouse in graphic mode:Move with the mouse in graphic mode:

- Choose the MOVE mouse tool. The cursor will show a hand with a little arrow. The corner of the arrow is the �hotspot� of the cursor.

- Left click INSIDE the selection or exactly on an event, keep mouse button pressed.- Pull mouse horizontally. The selection/current event will follow.With encoder within the bar:With encoder within the bar:With encoder within the bar:With encoder within the bar:With encoder within the bar:

- Make a selection or select the current event.- Turn the MOVE encoder (rightmost). For every click of the encoder, you will move the selection/current event

by one frame.- If you press and turn the encoder, every click moves one second.- If you press it without turning, you can enter a new starting time for your selection/current event. This input

can be a relative movement if you use signs ( �-1.5� will move your selection 1.5 seconds backwards in time).In text mode:In text mode:In text mode:In text mode:In text mode:

- Edit the Time column (by right click with the mouse or press the XY-encoder).- The movement will be relative if you use signs, otherwise it is absolute.

7.1 Timecode


Editing an EventEditing an EventEditing an EventEditing an EventEditing an EventYou can only edit an already existing event (see Adding Events).

Editing an event means to change its data. If you want to change its time, look for MOVING EVENTS.


- Right click exactly on an event. Edit menus appear accordingly to the type of the event.With the event encoder in the bar:With the event encoder in the bar:With the event encoder in the bar:With the event encoder in the bar:With the event encoder in the bar:

- Select current event with the track and event encoder.- Then press the event encoder. Edit menus will appear.In text mode:In text mode:In text mode:In text mode:In text mode:

- Scroll to the event that you are looking for.- Edit the appropriate column by a right click or pressing on the XY encoder. The parameter column is only

editable for GOTO commands and for fader events.Special fast edit for fader-events in graphic mode:Special fast edit for fader-events in graphic mode:Special fast edit for fader-events in graphic mode:Special fast edit for fader-events in graphic mode:Special fast edit for fader-events in graphic mode:

- This method is not exact enough for speeds, but for master fader events it is the recommended way.- Click with the middle mouse button exactly on an event and keep mouse button pressed.- Pull mouse vertically with pressed middle mouse button. You can see how the value of the fader event is

following.

7.1.67.1.67.1.67.1.67.1.6 Special ProceduresSpecial ProceduresSpecial ProceduresSpecial ProceduresSpecial Procedures

Recording CrossfadesRecording CrossfadesRecording CrossfadesRecording CrossfadesRecording CrossfadesCrossfades for executors are recorded as a combination of commands and fader movements.

These commands are:

XGoUpXGoUpXGoUpXGoUpXGoUp Crossfade will start upwards

XGoDnXGoDnXGoDnXGoDnXGoDn Crossfade will start downwards

XendXendXendXendXend Crossfade has ended

XGoUp and XGoDn have a cue number as parametercue number as parametercue number as parametercue number as parametercue number as parameter, just like a GOTO command, therefore a crossfade maystart on any cue, not only on the next one.

Try to record a crossfade and have a look at the outcome. You will see, that the global crossfade settingglobal crossfade settingglobal crossfade settingglobal crossfade settingglobal crossfade settingCROSSFADE PERMANENT / RELOAD is affecting the recording.

In the first case, a pattern of XGoUp, XgoDn, XGoUp� Xend is recorded, while in the second case only XGoUps arerecorded.

Nevertheless you can change the global crossfade mode afterwards without affecting the playback of your recordedtimecode show.

If you edit a crossfade manually, be aware that the crossfade fader movement alone does not do anythingfader movement alone does not do anythingfader movement alone does not do anythingfader movement alone does not do anythingfader movement alone does not do anything.Although faders are moving, no crossfade is started. You have to place the crossfade commands on the commandtrack to make the crossfade work.

Accordingly, if you want to move a crossfade in time, you have to move bothmove bothmove bothmove bothmove both, the fader events on the fader trackand the crossfade commands on the command track.

At first sight, this procedure of recording a crossfade may seem to be complicated, but it has a lot of advantages:

- The crossfade commands are displayed in text mode, making crossfades readable- Crossfades are relating to absolute cue numbers, like gotos.- Crossfades are not destroyed by fader data reduction- You can jump into the middle of a crossfade, or run backwards into a crossfade, and it will be correctly

initialised. (This will happen quite often when using external time code!)

7.1 Timecode


7 .27 .27 .27 .27 .2 Remote Control via TouchboardRemote Control via TouchboardRemote Control via TouchboardRemote Control via TouchboardRemote Control via TouchboardOn the back side of the grandMA, there is a 25-pin SUB-D socket (DC REMOTE CONTROL) to connect a standardTouchboard with up to 16 channels.PIN 1 ... 16: Input Channels 1 to 16PIN 21+22: +5 Volt (max. 100 mA)PIN 17+18 und 24+25: Earthing

The Touchboard input sockets only function as switches:0 bis +2 Volt: Off+5 bis +15 Volt: On

7.2.17.2.17.2.17.2.17.2.1 Assigning Playback buttonsAssigning Playback buttonsAssigning Playback buttonsAssigning Playback buttonsAssigning Playback buttonsPress the TOOLS button once.

7.2 Remote Control vial Touchboard

Call up the TOUCHBOARD REMOTE CONFIGURATION menu using the REMOTE button.

Press the STORE button once (LED is on).Press a button on the Touchboard, where a Playback button is to be assigned to, once.

Or:Or:Or:Or:Or:

Select a button in the REMOTE CONFIGURATION menu. Press the Playback button that you wantto assign. The selected button will now be assigned.

The assigned Playback buttons will be displayed on individual buttons. Only EXECUTOR buttonscan be assigned to the Touchboard.


7.2.27.2.27.2.27.2.27.2.2 Deleting AssignmentsDeleting AssignmentsDeleting AssignmentsDeleting AssignmentsDeleting AssignmentsTo delete an assigned Playback button, press the DELETE button once (LED is on).

7.2 Remote Control vial Touchboard

Press the Touchboard button or the appropriate button once.

In the TOOLS menu, you can switch the Touchboard function on or off using theON / OFF button.

If the Touchboard is activated, you can use all assigned buttons with the Touchboard.For optical convenience, the Button in the TOUCHBOARD REMOTE CONFIGURATIONmenu will have a red background when pressing a Touchboard button.

If REACT AS STORED ONLY is displayed, the assigned playback buttons will beexecuted directly.

Pressing this button will display COMBINED WITH COMMAND LINE COMMANDS.The assigned playback buttons will be executed in combination with the pre-selected commands.

Example: If an OFF button is programmed on a TOUCHBOARD button, but PAUSE isactivated (ààààà 1.71.71.71.71.7 Layout and Controls, item 11), not the OFF command, but thePAUSE command will be executed when pressing this button.


7.3 Remote Control by DMX IN

7 .37 .37 .37 .37 .3 Remote Control by DMX INRemote Control by DMX INRemote Control by DMX INRemote Control by DMX INRemote Control by DMX INDMX IN can be used to MERGE the signals of a second control board with those of the grandMA and transmit themto the stage via the same line. If, during this process, channels from the grandMA and from the second control boardare triggered, only the respective higher value will be transmitted. DMX IN will only be linked to DMX OUT A and willnot be given out to the Ethernet.

In the TOOLS menu, you can switch the MERGE function on or off by pressing the DMX-in MERGEbutton.

Via the DMX IN socket, assigned commands can be called up from an external DMX console. The DMX input has onlythe function of a switch that will release at approx. 10%.

7.3.17.3.17.3.17.3.17.3.1 Assigning Playback ButtonsAssigning Playback ButtonsAssigning Playback ButtonsAssigning Playback ButtonsAssigning Playback ButtonsPress the TOOLS button once.


Select a button in the DMX-IN REMOTE CONFIGURATION menu.

Press the Playback button that you want to assign. The selected button will now be assigned.

The assigned Playback buttons will be displayed on the individual buttons. Only EXECUTOR buttonscan be assigned to the respective DMX channel.

Call up the DMX-IN REMOTE CONFIGURATION menu using the REMOTE button.


7.3 Remote Control by DMX IN

7.3.27.3.27.3.27.3.27.3.2 Assigning DMX ChannelsAssigning DMX ChannelsAssigning DMX ChannelsAssigning DMX ChannelsAssigning DMX ChannelsMake a right mouse click on the button. A menu will open in which you can assign one of the 512 DMX channelsto this button. Identical DMX channels can be assigned to more than one button.

By pressing the PAGE 1 button, you can open another page (PAGE 2) with buttons.

7.3.37.3.37.3.37.3.37.3.3 Deleting AssignmentsDeleting AssignmentsDeleting AssignmentsDeleting AssignmentsDeleting AssignmentsTo delete an assigned Playback button, press the DELETE button once (LED is on). Press the respectiveDMX IN button once.

7.3.47.3.47.3.47.3.47.3.4 Using the DMX InputUsing the DMX InputUsing the DMX InputUsing the DMX InputUsing the DMX InputIn the TOOLS menu, you can switch the DMX input function on or off using the ON /OFF button.

If the DMX input is activated, you can use the assigned buttons by switching on the respective DMX input. Foroptical convenience, the buttons in the DMX-IN REMOTE CONFIGURATION menu will have a red background whenswitching on the respective DMX channel.



Example: If an OFF button is programmed on a DMX-IN, but PAUSE is activated (ààààà1.71.71.71.71.7 Layout and Controls, item 11), not the OFF command, but the PAUSE com-mand will be executed when calling up this DMX-IN channel.


7.4 Remote Control by MIDI

7 .47 .47 .47 .47 .4 Remote Control by MIDIRemote Control by MIDIRemote Control by MIDIRemote Control by MIDIRemote Control by MIDIOn the backside of the grandMA, you will find the MIDI IN, MIDI THRU and MIDI OUT sockets. Assigned commandscan be called up using e.g. an external MIDI keyboard or sequencer. Devices like these can be plugged into the MidiIN socket. Only note commands will be processed. The incoming signals will be automatically transferred toMÍDI THRU. Also Midi Show Control (MSC) can be processed or sent.

7 . 4 . 17 . 4 . 17 . 4 . 17 . 4 . 17 . 4 . 1Midi Show ControlMidi Show ControlMidi Show ControlMidi Show ControlMidi Show ControlUsing the console as receiver, the received MSC commands can be used only for the Master sequence.

Push the button �Midi Show Control� within the Tools menu; the menu Configuraton Midi Show Control will beopened.

To receive MSC, set the device or the groups into the window �Midi IN�. You can switch between Midi Enabled andMidi via Ethernet via the button below the window �Midi IN�. After pushing the button �Save� all settings will besaved and the function will be started

To send MSC, set the device or the group into the window �Midi OUT�. By the button �Send� you can change betweensending Device, Group oder ALL.. You can switch between Midi Enabled and Midi via Ethernet via the button belowthe window �Midi OUT�. After pushing the button �Save� all settings will be saved and the function will be started.

7 . 4 . 27 . 4 . 27 . 4 . 27 . 4 . 27 . 4 . 2Assigning Playback ButtonsAssigning Playback ButtonsAssigning Playback ButtonsAssigning Playback ButtonsAssigning Playback ButtonsPress the TOOLS button once.

Call up the MIDI REMOTE CONFIGURATION menu using the REMOTE button.


Select a button in the MIDI REMOTE CONFIGURATION menu.

Press the Playback button that you want to assign. The selected button will now be assigned.

The assigned Playback buttons will be displayed on the individual buttons of the MIDI REMOTECONFIGURATION menu. Only EXECUTOR buttons can be assigned to the respective MIDI note.


7.4 Remote Control by MIDI

7.4.37.4.37.4.37.4.37.4.3 Selecting the MIDI ChannelSelecting the MIDI ChannelSelecting the MIDI ChannelSelecting the MIDI ChannelSelecting the MIDI ChannelPressing the Channel button will open a menu in which you can select one of the 16 Midi channels by a simplemouse click.

7.4.47.4.47.4.47.4.47.4.4 Assigning the PitchAssigning the PitchAssigning the PitchAssigning the PitchAssigning the PitchBy pressing the KEY OFFSET button, you can transpose the incoming notes by one octave downwards. This can beset for up to three octaves.

7.4.57.4.57.4.57.4.57.4.5 Deleting AssignmentsDeleting AssignmentsDeleting AssignmentsDeleting AssignmentsDeleting AssignmentsTo delete an assigned Playback button, press the DELETE button once (LED is on). Press the Buttononce.

7.4.67.4.67.4.67.4.67.4.6 Using the MIDI InputUsing the MIDI InputUsing the MIDI InputUsing the MIDI InputUsing the MIDI InputIn the TOOLS menu, you can switch the MIDI input function on or off using the ON /OFF Button.

If the MIDI input is active, you can call up the assigned buttons by pressing the respective note keys on the MIDIkeyboard. For optical convenience, the button in the MIDI REMOTE CONFIGURATION menu will have a red backgroundwhen pressing a note key.



Example: If an OFF button is programmed on a DMX-IN, but PAUSE is activated (ààààà1.71.71.71.71.7 Layout and Controls, item 11), not the OFF command, but the PAUSE com-mand will be executed when calling up this DMX-IN channel.


88888 Macros und QUIKEYSMacros und QUIKEYSMacros und QUIKEYSMacros und QUIKEYSMacros und QUIKEYS

8.1 Programming and creating Macros

8.1.18.1.18.1.18.1.18.1.1 Activating MacrosActivating MacrosActivating MacrosActivating MacrosActivating MacrosPress the MACRO button once (LED is on). The SELECT MACRO window will open. Activate a Macroby a left mouse click.

Or:Or:Or:Or:Or:

Press the MACRO button once (LED is on). The SELECT Macro window will open. Enter the numberof a Macro via keypad and confirm with ENTER.

Or:Or:Or:Or:Or:

Make a right mouse click on one of the VIEW buttons.

The SELECT window will open � select your MACRO here.

The SELECT MACRO window will open. Select the Macro by a left mouse click.

Now the Macro has been assigned to the VIEW button and can be activated at any time.

Press the MACRO button once (LED is on). The SELECT MACRO window will open.

Enter a name for the Macro using the keyboard.

Press the TIMED button (will turn dark-gray) if the Macro shall not be executed as fast as possible,but within the set time frame.

Confirm with ENTER.

LED in the MACRO button flashes.

Now, enter all operational steps to be executed by this Macro.

After input of the last step, press the STORE button first first first first first, after thatafter thatafter thatafter thatafter that press the MACRO button,and lastlastlastlastlast press ENTER (LED in the MACRO button is now off).

This completes the MACRO Programming procedure.

8.1.28.1.28.1.28.1.28.1.2 Macro PMacro PMacro PMacro PMacro PoolooloolooloolIn the Macro Pool, you can call up Macros directly by selection.

Make a right mouse click on an �empty� position on one of the three TFT displays or on an external monitor. TheCREATE A WINDOW menu will open. ààààà 3.13.13.13.13.1 Creating Windows.

Select MACROS. The MACRO window will open. Make a right mouse click on one of the buttons; the MACROOPTIONS window will open.

Clicking on one of the macros, this macro will be assigned to a button.

Now the macro has been assigned to a certain button and can be activated at any time.

8 .18 .18 .18 .18 .1 Creating MacrosCreating MacrosCreating MacrosCreating MacrosCreating MacrosWith macros, you can combine several processes in one batch. These can be e.g.:

● Playback buttons (e.g. GO, Fader, Pause, etc., incl. number of the Executor)● Call-ups of Views● Call-ups of Delete operations● Other Macro calls● Call-ups of Clear operations



8 . 1 . 38 . 1 . 38 . 1 . 38 . 1 . 38 . 1 . 3Editing MacrosEditing MacrosEditing MacrosEditing MacrosEditing MacrosPress the EDIT button once. Select a Macro from the MACRO Pool.

Or:Or:Or:Or:Or:

Press the EDIT button once. Press the MACRO button once, enter the Macro number and confirm with ENTER. TheEDIT MACRO window will open.

8.1 Programming and creating Macros

� In the LINE column, the individual calls are numbered.� In the COMMAND column, all saved calls are displayed one by one.� For each call, a time frame, during which the call was entered, will be displayed in the DELAY column.

Pressing the ADD LINE button will insert a step in front of the chosen position. Now, you can enter a call. If you wantto use a Delay time when performing a call, click into the cell, enter a time using the keyboard, and confirm withENTER.

To delete a call, select one and press the DELETE LINE(S) button.

To modify a call, select one and press the EDIT LINE button. Now, you can enter a new call.

If you want to modify the Delay time, click into the cell, enter a different time using the keyboard, and confirm withENTER.

Pressing the EDIT MACRO NAME will open the EDIT NAME window. Now, you can enter a new name using thekeyboard and confirm this with ENTER.

If the TIMED button is switched on, the calls of this Macro will be executed with the set DELAY times. Pressing thisbutton once will switch the display to NO TIMED. In the Sheet, the DELAY times will be displayed on a darkbackground, and the Macro will be executed without time limit.

You can leave the menu with the CLOSE button.


8 .28 .28 .28 .28 .2 Assigning and Activating QUIKEYSAssigning and Activating QUIKEYSAssigning and Activating QUIKEYSAssigning and Activating QUIKEYSAssigning and Activating QUIKEYSYou can display and call up various operation buttons and functions in the QUIKEY window (Display Softkeys).

Create a QUIKEY window ààààà 3.13.13.13.13.1 Creating a Window

Press the EDIT button briefly and click on a button in the QUIKEY window.


Make a right mouse click on a button. The QUIKEY OPTIONS window will open.

Clicking on one of the functions will assign this one to the button.

This function can be called up any time by clicking on it.

List of functions:List of functions:List of functions:List of functions:List of functions:ALIGN OFF: Switches off the ALIGN function.ALIGN LEFT: ALIGN button pressed onceALIGN RIGHT: ALIGN button pressed twiceALIGN BOTH: ALIGN button pressed three timesALIGN SYM: ALIGN button pressed four timesCLEAR SELECTION: CLEAR button pressed onceCLEAR ACTIVE: CLEAR button pressed twiceCLEAR RELEASE: CLEAR button pressed three timesVALUES MODE: Switches the FIXTURE and CHANNEL SHEET to the VALUES modeFADE MODE: Switches the FIXTURE and CHANNEL SHEET to the FADE time modeDELAY MODE: Switches the FIXTURE and CHANNEL SHEET to the DELAY time modeASSIGN: ASSIGN buttonEMPTY: Creates an empty buttonFLIP: l Head Fixtures:

� Pressing 1x: The head will be turned and the light beam be directed to the same targetposition.

� Pressing 2x: The head will be turned again and the beam be directed to the last identicalposition. (This is only possible for fixtures that have a PAN value of more than 360°,otherwise, only 2 positions are possible.)

� Pressing 3x: The head will be turned to the first position.When using head Fixtures, the FIXTURE SHEET will show a yellow square left of the PANvalue, symbolizing the current head position.

l Mirror Fitxures:The PAN/TILT value will be inverted, the mirror will be positioned in opposition.

� (minus): Minus keySTORE: STORE buttonEDIT: EDIT buttonUPDATE: UPDATE buttonESCAPE: ESCAPE buttonENTER: ENTER buttonALL SELECTION: Selects allallallallall FIXTURES and CHANNELS (this can be necessary after using the NEXT/PREV).ODD SELECTION: Selects all odd FIXTURES and CHANNELSEVEN SELECTION: Selects all even FIXTURES and CHANNELSINVERT SELECTION: Allows to invert the selection.

- If fixture/dimmer values are activated, but only part of those fixtures/dimmers are selected,you can delete the current selection and select the other fixtures/dimmers by pushing theINVERT SELECTION button and ENTER.

- When selecting a group, you can exchange the current selection for that made by the group(all prior selections will be deleted, even the ones, which might be in the newly selectedgroup).

DELETE: Delete buttonMOVE: MOVE buttonCOPY: COPY buttonBACKUP: BACKUP buttonSETUP: SETUP buttonTOOLS: TOOLS buttonPREVIOUS: PREV. buttonNEXT: NEXT buttonTRACKBALL SPEED: Toggles the TRACKBALL between coarse and fine.ENCODER SPEED: Toggles the ENCODER between coarse and fine; further toggling is achieved by pressing on the

ENCODER.

8.2 Assigning and Activating QUIKEYS


44444

11111

22222

33333

8.3 Agenda Menu8.3 Agenda Menu8.3 Agenda Menu8.3 Agenda Menu8.3 Agenda MenuHere you can execute Macros at a certain time and date or at sunrise or sunset.

1 You can choose a different Edit Date by help of the encoders or the buttons on top.

2 Pressing this button, you can switch between day, week, month or year in this display.

3 If DAY is chosen, the ADD, DEL and EDIT buttons will be displayed.Pressing the ADD button will include a new column in the sheet, where you can set the programming for automaticcontrol.If a column is selected, you can delete it by pressing the DEL button.If a cell is selected, you can change the function / time by pressing the EDIT button.

4 All created automatic sequences will be displayed in this sheet.

Selecting a cell within a column and pressing the encoder briefly, will open a window to enter the following:

Start: Absolute: The Macro will be started at the set time.Dawn: The Macro will be started at the calculated dawn.Sunrise: The Macro will be started at the calculated sunrise.Sunset: The Macro will be started at the calculated sunset.Dusk: The Macro will be started at the calculated dusk.ààààà 2.17 2.17 2.17 2.17 2.17 Menu TIME & DATE item 2

Time: If ABSOLUTE is selected in this line under �Start�, a time can be set for the Macro to start.If DAWN, SUNRISE, SUNSET or DUSK is selected in the start column, you can enter between -1 to +1hour. Consequently, the Macro will be started either 1 hour earlier or later than the calculated time.

Duration: If the unit is powered up later than the time necessary for automatic control, a time setting within thiscolumn (up to 8 hours) can delay the start of the Macro after power-up (delay of up to 8 hours).

8.3 Menü Agenda


55555

Repeat: NONE will execute this programming only one time.DAILY, WEEKLY, MONTHLY or YEARLY will execute the programming according to the set �rhythm�.

Link: Here you have to create a Macro, which will be started at the given times.

You can enter a comment, using the keyboard.

First: If a programming is displayed with black background in the sheet, this programming will be repeated onthe current day. This cell shows the date, on which the programming has first been executed.

Last: Here, ou can enter a date for the programming to be executed for the last time. If a programming isdisplayed with black background in the sheet, this programming would be repeated on the current day.This cell shows the date, on which the programming will be executed for the last time.

Agenda OptionsAgenda OptionsAgenda OptionsAgenda OptionsAgenda OptionsTouch the touch screen on the left corner of the title bar.

Or:Or:Or:Or:Or:

With a right mouse click on the title bar, you can open the Agenda Options window.

8.3 Menü Agenda

5 The table will show all created Sequences. The respective entry will be triggered automatically when selected.


99999 Command lineCommand lineCommand lineCommand lineCommand line

9.19.19.19.19.1 IntroductionIntroductionIntroductionIntroductionIntroductionThis document is trying to describe all functionality of the grandMA desk family that can be done with commandline operation.The meaning of �command line operation� is, that you need no mouse or touchscreen. Instead you are using the�hard keys� for entering commands.

9.1.19.1.19.1.19.1.19.1.1 QuikeysQuikeysQuikeysQuikeysQuikeysOn some machines like the grandMA replay unit, you may not find all of the described hard keys. In spite of this littledisadvantage, you can create a QUIKEY pool window on the screen and arrange the wanted but missing functionsthere. Then simply use these �soft keys� instead of the hard keys.

9.1.29.1.29.1.29.1.29.1.2 Double functions of hard keysDouble functions of hard keysDouble functions of hard keysDouble functions of hard keysDouble functions of hard keysBecause there is not enough space for each function to have its own key, some hard keys have an alternativefunction at the second or even the third push. These keys are

Hard keyHard keyHard keyHard keyHard key First pressFirst pressFirst pressFirst pressFirst press Second pressSecond pressSecond pressSecond pressSecond press Third pressThird pressThird pressThird pressThird pressASSIGN ASSIGN LABEL

CHANNEL CHANNEL DMX

EXEC EXEC FADER

GOTO GOTO LOAD

IF IF IFOUTPUT

MOVE MOVE INSERT

PRESET PRESET FEATURE

TIME FADE DELAY VALUE

VIEW VIEW VIEWBUTTON

EFFECT EFFECT Call effect view

GROUP GROUP Call submaster view

PAGE PAGE Call total page view

9.1.39.1.39.1.39.1.39.1.3 MessagesMessagesMessagesMessagesMessagesSometimes the command line is asking you something upon execution, or it is informing you about something thatwent wrong.If such a message or a question window appears on the screen, use the NEXT and PREVIOUS hard keys to select theappropriate answer ( the button with the thick blue border) and then hit ENTER. Also ESC is working fine for simplemessages or warnings. If there is a more complex question and you hit ESC, the action is considered to be CANCELED.Every command line action that succeeds will appear in the history of all command line windows. A failure will onlyproduce an error beep.

9.1.49.1.49.1.49.1.49.1.4 Command line windowCommand line windowCommand line windowCommand line windowCommand line windowOf course you want to see the commands that you give to your desk. Open a command line window on the screen.There you can see what you enter.

9.1.59.1.59.1.59.1.59.1.5 Using the PC keyboardUsing the PC keyboardUsing the PC keyboardUsing the PC keyboardUsing the PC keyboardSome users may find it convenient to use the PC keyboard for command line input. Open a command line windowon the screen. Whenever this window has the input focus (title is shown in deep blue), all keystrokes of the PCkeyboard go into the command line. If the input focus goes somewhere else, the PC keyboard will no more work withthe command line. Touching the title or the bottom line of the command line window will give the input focus backto it.For permanent use of the PC keyboard as command line input, press the SCROLL LOCK key. You will hear a little beep,the SCROLL LOCK lamp is on, indicating that the PC keyboard is now locked to command line operation.If the PC keyboard is locked, you can not use it for other operations like naming presets etc. But another push of theSCROLL LOCK key will unlock it.

9 Command Line


If you are using the PC keyboard as command line input, you can only enter valid commands and values. If you tryto enter FIQQQ the command line starts screaming upon the first Q because until there it could be FIXTURE or FIXbut it does not know any word that continues with Q.In most cases it is not necessary to enter the full name of a keyword, like F would be totally sufficient for FIXTURE.You can find all keywords and their shortest form in section 9.2 command overview.

9 . 1 . 69 . 1 . 69 . 1 . 69 . 1 . 69 . 1 . 6 Using command line historyUsing command line historyUsing command line historyUsing command line historyUsing command line historyIt is possible to bring back old command from the history into the current command line.There they can be changed and executed again.

a) - Click into the history of a command line window- Or scroll with the XY encoder if the command line window has the focus- Or use the UP and DOWN cursor keys on the PC keyboard if the command line window has the focus (or the PCkeyboard is locked to the command line).b) Edit the command line if you wantc) Press ENTER. The command line will be executed.

9.1 Command Line


9.2 Command Overview

9 .29 .29 .29 .29 .2 Command OverviewCommand OverviewCommand OverviewCommand OverviewCommand OverviewHere comes the complete list of all possible keywords in the command line.

Keyword:Keyword:Keyword:Keyword:Keyword: Shortcut:Shortcut:Shortcut:Shortcut:Shortcut: Hard key:Hard key:Hard key:Hard key:Hard key: Operation:Operation:Operation:Operation:Operation:As it appears in Shortest possible formHow to enter the Rough description of the meaning.the command line. of the keyword when keyword into the For a real explanation see chapter 3.

using PC keyboard. command line.

+ + + Plus

- - - Minus

<<< < <<< Go Back Fast

>>> > >>> Go Forward Fast

ALL ALL QUIKEY All selection (with ODD/EVEN)

ALL_CHASES ALL_C CONSOLE Accessing all executors with chases

ALL_SEQUENCES ALL_S CONSOLE Accessing all executors with sequences

ASSIGN AS ASSIGN Assign <source> <destination>

AT A AT At , give value

CHANNEL C CHANNEL Channel

CLEAR CL CLEAR Progressively clear programmer

CLEAR_ACTIVE CLEAR_A QUIKEY Deactivate programmer

CLEAR_ALL CLEAR_ALL QUIKEY Total clear of programmer

CLEAR_SELECTION CLEAR_S QUIKEY Clear selection

COPY CO COPY Copy <source> at <destination>

CUE CU CUE Cue

DEF_GO DEF Yellow GO Go forward for default executor

DEF_GO- DEF_GO- Yellow GO- Go back for default executor

DEF_PAUSE DEF_P Yellow Pause Pause for default executor

DELAY DELA 2 x TIME Enter delay mode or give delay time

DELETE D DELETE Delete <destination>

DMX DMX DMX DMX address

DMX_BTN DM CONSOLE Remote DMX button

EDIT ED EDIT Edit <destination>

EFFECT EF EFFECT Effect

ESC ES ESCAPE Escape , close dialogs

EVEN EV QUIKEY Even selection (with ALL/ODD)

EXEC E EXECUTOR Executor

FADE FADE 1 x TIME Enter fade mode or give fade time

FADER FADER 2 x EXEC Fader, access executor faders

FADERBUTTON1 FADERBUTTON1 Hit Executor Middle button of executor section

FADERBUTTON2 FADERBUTTON2 Hit Executor Lower button of executor section

FADERBUTTON3 FADERBUTTON3 Hit Executor Upper button of executor section

FEATURE FE 2 x PRESET Single feature like PAN

FIX FIX FIX Fixing executors

FIXTURE F FIXTURE Fixture

FLASH_DOWN FLASH_D CONSOLE Downflash executor

FLASH_DOWN_OFF FLASH_DOWN_O CONSOLE End of Downflash


9.2 Command Overview

FLASH_UP FLASH_U CONSOLE Upflash executor

FLASH_UP_OFF FLASH_UP_O CONSOLE End of Upflash

FORM FO CONSOLE Form, used by effects

FULL FU FULL Full, equals 100%

GO GO GO Go forward

GO- GO- GO- Go backwards

GOTO GOT GOTO Goto <cue>

GROUP G GROUP Group

IF IF IF If (logical AND for selections)

IFOUTPUT IFO 2 x IF If Output, create selection from output

INSERT I 2 x MOVE Insert <source> at <destination>

INVERT INV QUIKEY Invert <destination> , inverting selection

LABEL LA 2 x ASSIGN Label <destination> �Name� give a name

LEARN L LEARN Learn, change speed of running programs

LOAD LO 2 x GOTO Load <Cue>

MACRO M MACRO Macro

MIDI_BTN MI CONSOLE Remote Midi Button

MOVE MO MOVE Move <source> at <destination>

NEXT N NEXT Next device of current selection

ODD OD QUIKEY ODD selection (with ALL/EVEN)

OFF OF OFF Off, switch something off

ON ON ON On, switch something on

OOPS O OOPS Oops, I made a mistake -> Undo

PAGE PA PAGE Page

PAUSE PAU PAUSE Pause something

PRESET PR PRESET Preset type or Preset

PREVIEW PREV PREVIEW Preview something

PREVIOUS P PREVIOUS Previous device of current selection

SELECT SE SELECT Select <executor> , select default executor

SEQU S SEQU Sequence (Cuelist)

STORE ST STORE Store

SWOP SW CONSOLE Swop executor

SWOP_OFF SWOP_O CONSOLE End of swop

TEMP TE TEMP Temporary run executor

THRU T THRU Through, to enter ranges

TIMECODE TI CONSOLE Timecode show

TOGGLE TOG CONSOLE Toggle running status of executor

TOP TOP TOP Call first cue of executor

TOUCH_BTN TO CONSOLE Remote Analog input button

UNPRESS UN CONSOLE Release of command

UPDATE U UPDATE Update

VALUE VA 3 x TIME return to value mode

VIEW V VIEW View, contents of one or multiple screens

VIEWBTN VIEWB 2 x VIEW Viewbutton, hardkey beside screens


9.3 Command Reference

9 .39 .39 .39 .39 .3 Command ReferenceCommand ReferenceCommand ReferenceCommand ReferenceCommand ReferenceIn this chapter, all commands are explained with their exact syntax, demonstrating all possibilities. For instructionson complete procedures, like how to create a sequence and then run it, you have to look into the following chapters.

9.3.19.3.19.3.19.3.19.3.1 Key word classificationsKey word classificationsKey word classificationsKey word classificationsKey word classificationsIn the following descriptions, the term starting keyword will appear very often.

This �starting keyword� is every keyword that you start a new command line operation with.

Basic operational keywordsBasic operational keywordsBasic operational keywordsBasic operational keywordsBasic operational keywordsA basic operational keyword in the command line is determining a basic operation.

These keywords can only appear as starting keyword in the command line.

The only exception from this rule is the AT command. AT can follow a list of objectThe only exception from this rule is the AT command. AT can follow a list of objectThe only exception from this rule is the AT command. AT can follow a list of objectThe only exception from this rule is the AT command. AT can follow a list of objectThe only exception from this rule is the AT command. AT can follow a list of objectkeywords and will still be interpreted as operational keyword.keywords and will still be interpreted as operational keyword.keywords and will still be interpreted as operational keyword.keywords and will still be interpreted as operational keyword.keywords and will still be interpreted as operational keyword.

Operational keywords expect object keywords as targets for their operation, using helping keywords sometimes.

KeywordKeywordKeywordKeywordKeyword Operat ionOperat ionOperat ionOperat ionOperat ionASSIGN Assign one object to another, like assigning a sequence to an executor.

AT (operational form) Set a value to something.

COPY Make a copy of an object.

DELETE Delete an object.

EDIT Edit an object.

IFOUTPUT Create a selection depending on an objects stage output.

INSERT Insert an object at another location.

INVERT Invert the selection.

LABEL Change name of an object

MOVE Move an object to another location.

PREVIEW Have a look at an object without stage output.

STORE Store data into an object.

UPDATE Update data of active object. Active objects create stage output.

Executing KeywordsExecuting KeywordsExecuting KeywordsExecuting KeywordsExecuting KeywordsExecuting keywords may be used as starting keywords, or as source in an assign operation.As starting keywords they expect object keywords as targets for their operations.

KeywordKeywordKeywordKeywordKeyword Operat ionOperat ionOperat ionOperat ionOperat ion<<< Go fast backwards

>>> Go fast forward

FIX Fix an executor. This executor will ignore page changes.

FLASH_DOWN ~_OFF Temporary down flash of executor.

FLASH_UP ~_OFF Temporary up flash of executor

GO Go forward.

GO- Go backwards

GOTO Goto cue

LEARN Learn speed

LOAD Prepare next step of executor, wait for GO.

OFF Switch off something.

ON Switch on something.


9.3 Command Reference

PAUSE Pause

SELECT Select default executor.

SWOP ~_OFF Temporary up flash for executor and downflash for all others.

TEMP Temporarily run an executor.

TOGGLE Toggle executor on and off.

TOP Goto first cue.

Object KeywordsObject KeywordsObject KeywordsObject KeywordsObject KeywordsObject keywords are used as targets by basic operational keywords and by executing keywords. They are representingdata, that can be manipulated.

KeywordKeywordKeywordKeywordKeyword MeaningMeaningMeaningMeaningMeaningALL_CHASES All executors assigned as chasers.

ALL_SEQUENCES All executors assigned as sequence.

CHANNEL A conventional light.

CUE One step or memory of a cuelist.

DMX A DMX channel.

DMX_BTN A Remote triggered by incoming DMX signals.

EFFECT An freely editable effect generator.

EXEC An executor is the physical front end for executing sequences etc.

FADER One of the 20 executor faders.

FADERBUTTON1 The middle button of an executor colum.

FADERBUTTON2 The lower button of an executor colum.

FADERBUTTON3 The upper button of an executor colum.

FIXTURE A complex light that has more than just a dimmer channel.

FEATURE A feature inside a fixture, like PAN or IRIS.

FORM A 1 or 2 dimensional path, used by effects.

GROUP A collection of fixtures and channels.

MACRO Can do complex command line operations.

MDI_BTN A Remote triggered by incoming MIDI signals.

PAGE A page is one set of visible executors.

PRESET A memory that can be used indirectly as a placeholder.

SEQU A sequence consists of one or more cues.

TIMECODE A timecode show consists of many timed playback instructions for executors. Can besynchronised with incoming SMPTE or MIDI signals.

TOUCH_BTN A Remote triggered by hardwired analogue 0/10 V inputs.

VIEW Stores a display arrangement.

VIEWBTN A physical button that can call views and macros.


9..3 Command Reference

Helping keywordsHelping keywordsHelping keywordsHelping keywordsHelping keywordsThe meaning of helping keywords depends very much upon the context in which they are used.

KeywordKeywordKeywordKeywordKeyword Used �Used �Used �Used �Used �+ Everywhere �

- Everywhere �

AT (helping form) by COPY/MOVE etc.

DELAY In executing commands ,AT, STORE etc

FADE In executing commands, AT,STORE etc

FULL As value 100 %

IF In selections

THRU In ranges

UNPRESS After executing keywords

Immediate KeywordsImmediate KeywordsImmediate KeywordsImmediate KeywordsImmediate KeywordsThese keywords expect no parameters.

KeywordKeywordKeywordKeywordKeyword Operat ionOperat ionOperat ionOperat ionOperat ionALL Restores selection after ODD/EVEN NEXT/PREVIOUS.

CLEAR Progressively clear the programmer.

CLEAR_ACTIVE Clear the values in the programmer.

CLEAR_ALL Totally clear programmer at once.

CLEAR_SELECTION Clear the current selection.

DEF_GO Go forward for default executor

DEF_GO- Go back for default executor

DEF_PAUSE Pause the default executor.

ESC Escape from input or menu.

EVEN Select even devices inside current selection.

NEXT Select next device inside current selection.

ODD Select odd devices inside current selection.

OOPS Oops, I mad a mistake -> Undo

PREVIOUS Select previous device inside current selection

VALUE Switch back from fade or delay to value mode.

UPDATE Update data of active object. Active objects create stage output.

The DEFAULT keywordThe DEFAULT keywordThe DEFAULT keywordThe DEFAULT keywordThe DEFAULT keywordThe command line has a so called DEFAULT keyword.Whenever you start a new command line with numeric values, this default keyword will be put in front.

Assuming that the default keyword is CHANNEL. Then you are typing in:1 ENTER. In the command line will appear CHANNEL 1 ENTER.

If the command line is empty, the current default keyword is shown by:a) the according LED of the hard keyb) the command line window

The following keywords can be the default keyword:The following keywords can be the default keyword:The following keywords can be the default keyword:The following keywords can be the default keyword:The following keywords can be the default keyword:CHANNEL * PAGE

FIXTURE * MACRO



GROUP PRESET

SEQU VIEW

CUE EFFECT

EXEC

The default keyword is also used by operational keywords.

Assuming that the default keyword is GROUP. Then you are typing in:

DELETE 1 ENTER. As a result, GROUP 1 will be deleted !

An exception to this are the keywords CHANNEL and FIXTURE. If they are the default keywords, operationalkeywords will use CUE as default keyword !

If CHANNEL is the default keyword. STORE 5 ENTER will do STORE CUE 5 !



9 . 3 . 29 . 3 . 29 . 3 . 29 . 3 . 29 . 3 . 2 Ranges and Range ListsRanges and Range ListsRanges and Range ListsRanges and Range ListsRanges and Range ListsMany commands are able to operate on a list of objects.

Instead of typing

DELETE SEQU 1 ENTER

DELETE SEQU 2 ENTER

DELETE SEQU 10 ENTER

you can write

DELETE SEQU 1 THRU 2 +10 ENTER.

A range can have the following formats:A range can have the following formats:A range can have the following formats:A range can have the following formats:A range can have the following formats:

X only object X

X THRU Y from object X to object Y

X THRU from object X to the last object

THRU Y from the first object to object Y

THRU all objects

Please note, that ranges have a direction. Especially when creating selection, it makes a big difference if you typeFIXTURE 1 THRU 10 or if you type FIXTURE 10 THRU 1.

Ranges can be combined to Range Lists:Ranges can be combined to Range Lists:Ranges can be combined to Range Lists:Ranges can be combined to Range Lists:Ranges can be combined to Range Lists:

OBJECT_KEYWORD Range1 +/- [OBJECT_KEYWORD] Range2 �

It is not necessary to repeat the OBJECT_KEYWORD in the range list.

9.3.39.3.39.3.39.3.39.3.3 Detailed keyword listDetailed keyword listDetailed keyword listDetailed keyword listDetailed keyword list

+ (Plus )+ (Plus )+ (Plus )+ (Plus )+ (Plus )

ClassificationClassificationClassificationClassificationClassification : helping keyword

a)a)a)a)a) As starting keywordAs starting keywordAs starting keywordAs starting keywordAs starting keyword, + enlarges the current selection. Everything that follows after the plus will beinterpreted as a selection:

+ CHANNEL,FIXTURE,GROUP,SEQU,CUE,EXEC,PRESET,EFFECT

b )b )b )b )b ) In object listsIn object listsIn object listsIn object listsIn object lists it is including objects:

� OBJECT 1 + OBJECT 2 �.

c )c )c )c )c ) In front of valuesIn front of valuesIn front of valuesIn front of valuesIn front of values it is changing the value to a positive relative value:

CHANNEL 1 AT +10 ENTER will increase the dimmer value by 10%.

d )d )d )d )d ) As a starting keywordAs a starting keywordAs a starting keywordAs a starting keywordAs a starting keyword, and permanently repeatedrepeatedrepeatedrepeatedrepeated, + is increasing the dimmer values of the currentselection by 10% every time you press +.

- (Minus)- (Minus)- (Minus)- (Minus)- (Minus)


a)a)a)a)a) As starting keywordAs starting keywordAs starting keywordAs starting keywordAs starting keyword, - reduces the current selection. Everything that follows after the minus will beinterpreted as a selection:

- CHANNEL/FIXTURE/GROUP/SEQU/CUE/EXEC/PRESET/EFFECT

b )b )b )b )b ) In object listsIn object listsIn object listsIn object listsIn object lists it is excluding objects:

� OBJECT 1 THRU 10 - OBJECT 2 �.

c )c )c )c )c ) In front of valuesIn front of valuesIn front of valuesIn front of valuesIn front of values it is changing the value to a negative relative value:

CHANNEL 1 AT -10 ENTER will decrease the dimmer value by 10%.

As a starting keywordAs a starting keywordAs a starting keywordAs a starting keywordAs a starting keyword, and permanently repeatedrepeatedrepeatedrepeatedrepeated, - is decreasing the dimmer values of the currentselection by 10% every time you press -.



<<< (Go fast backwards)<<< (Go fast backwards)<<< (Go fast backwards)<<< (Go fast backwards)<<< (Go fast backwards)

ClassificationClassificationClassificationClassificationClassification : executing keyword

a) As starting keywordAs starting keywordAs starting keywordAs starting keywordAs starting keyword, every object that follows after the <<< will try to go backgo backgo backgo backgo back one step with zero fadezero fadezero fadezero fadezero fadetimetimetimetimetime .

<<< (target object list) [ENTER]

Target typeTarget typeTarget typeTarget typeTarget type Operat ionOperat ionOperat ionOperat ionOperat ionEXEC Go backwards one step with no fade time

EFFECT Start running backwards without fading in

TIMECODE Jump to the previous breakpoint

PAGE Does <<< on all its executors.

SPEEDMASTER Does <<< on all programs using this speed master(executor assignedto a speed master)

b) In an assign command, this function can be put on an executor button (see ASSIGN).

>>> (Go fast forward)>>> (Go fast forward)>>> (Go fast forward)>>> (Go fast forward)>>> (Go fast forward)


c) As starting keyword, every object that follows after the >>> will try to go forward one step with zero fadetime.

>>> (target object list) [ENTER]

Target typeTarget typeTarget typeTarget typeTarget type Operat ionOperat ionOperat ionOperat ionOperat ionEXEC Go forward one step with no fade time

EFFECT Start running forward without fading in

TIMECODE Jump to the next breakpoint

PAGE Does >>> on all its executors.

SPEEDMASTER Does >> on all programs using this speed master(executor assignedto a speed master)

d) In an assign commandIn an assign commandIn an assign commandIn an assign commandIn an assign command, this function can be put on an executor button (see ASSIGN).

ALLALLALLALLALL

ClassificationClassificationClassificationClassificationClassification : immediate keyword

ALL is clearing any sub-selection made with ODD EVEN NEXT and PREVOIUS.

ALL_CHASESALL_CHASESALL_CHASESALL_CHASESALL_CHASES

ClassificationClassificationClassificationClassificationClassification : object keyword

ALL_CHASES is an alias for the expression ALL EXECUTORS THAT ARE ASSIGNED AS CHASES. It can be used whereverEXEC could be used. Example:

PAUSE ALL_CHASES ENTER

ALL_SEQUENCESALL_SEQUENCESALL_SEQUENCESALL_SEQUENCESALL_SEQUENCES


ALL_SEQUENCES is an alias for the expression ALL EXECUTORS THAT ARE ASSIGNED AS SEQUENCE. It can be usedwherever EXEC could be used. Example:

OFF ALL_SEQUENCES ENTER



ASSIGNASSIGNASSIGNASSIGNASSIGN

ClassificationClassificationClassificationClassificationClassification : operational keyword

ASSIGN (source objects) (destination objects) [ ENTER ]

Source objects : a list of objects which are all of the same type.

Destination objects: a list of objects which are all of the same type

Source object typeSource object typeSource object typeSource object typeSource object type PPPPPossible destination object typeossible destination object typeossible destination object typeossible destination object typeossible destination object typeExecuting keyword EXEC,FADERBUTTON1/2/3

SEQUENCE EXEC,FADERBUTTON1/2/3

GROUP EXEC,FADERBUTTON1/2/3

EFFECT EXEC,FADERBUTTON1/2/3

VIEW VIEWBTN

MACRO VIEWBTN

Executor buttons and view buttons as hard keys automatically do the ENTER.

ATATATATAT

ClassificationClassificationClassificationClassificationClassification : operational and helping keyword

a) As operational keyword:

AT TYPE 1: Giving dimmer values directlyAT TYPE 1: Giving dimmer values directlyAT TYPE 1: Giving dimmer values directlyAT TYPE 1: Giving dimmer values directlyAT TYPE 1: Giving dimmer values directly

[ (destination objects) ] AT values [ FADE fades] [ DELAY delays] ENTER

Destination objects: A list of objects that can create selections. Usable keywords are:CHANNEL,FIXTURE,GROUP,SEQU,CUE,PRESET,EFFECT.If no destination objects are given, the current selection will be used.

Values: VALUE_X [THRU VALUE_Y] in percent

Fades: FADE_X [THRU FADE_Y ] in seconds

Delays: DELAY_X [THRU DELAY_Y] in secondsValues, fades and delays are decimal numbers with dots ( e.g. FADE 1.5 ).

Examples:CHANNEL 1 THRU 10 AT 20 FADE 2.5 DELAY 0 THRU 5 ENTERTry to find out yourself what this operation does �

CUE 1 AT FULL ENTERThis will set the dimmer of all devices contained in CUE 1 of the default executor to 100%.

AT TYPE 2: Copying values with filtering:AT TYPE 2: Copying values with filtering:AT TYPE 2: Copying values with filtering:AT TYPE 2: Copying values with filtering:AT TYPE 2: Copying values with filtering:

[ (destination objects) ] AT [set AT filtering] (source objects) ENTER

Destination objects: Same as above.

Source objects: A list of objects that can supply values. Usable keywords are:CHANNEL,FIXTURE,GROUP,SEQU,CUE,PRESET.

Set AT filtering: Keep AT pressed. After half a second the AT filter menu will appear. Change the filtering whileyou keep AT pressed.

If the source objects are CHANNEL, FIXTURE or GROUP, the operation will be a

FILTEREDFILTEREDFILTEREDFILTEREDFILTERED COPY INSIDE THECOPY INSIDE THECOPY INSIDE THECOPY INSIDE THECOPY INSIDE THE PROGRAMMERPROGRAMMERPROGRAMMERPROGRAMMERPROGRAMMERAll values except default values will be copied if they pass the filter !All values except default values will be copied if they pass the filter !All values except default values will be copied if they pass the filter !All values except default values will be copied if they pass the filter !All values except default values will be copied if they pass the filter !



Examples:FIXTURE 2 THRU 10 AT ( select CMY colour mixing) FIXTURE 1 ENTERThis command will copy the CMY colour of fixture 1 to fixtures 2 THRU 10.

You can copy patterns: Set fixture 1 to BLUE and fixture 2 to GREEN.FIXTURE 3 THRU 10 AT (select colour) FIXTURE 1 THRU 2 ENTERFixture 3 will be BLUE, 4 is GREEN, 5 is BLUE, 6 is GREEN �

Source and destination devices can overlap:FIXTURE 1 THRU 10 AT (select all features) FIXTURE 2 THRU 10 + 1 ENTERThis will perform a circular copy, shifting the values from device to device.

If the source objects are SEQU,CUE or PRESET, the operation will be a

FILTERED EXTRACTION TO THE PROGRAMMERFILTERED EXTRACTION TO THE PROGRAMMERFILTERED EXTRACTION TO THE PROGRAMMERFILTERED EXTRACTION TO THE PROGRAMMERFILTERED EXTRACTION TO THE PROGRAMMERAll values that exist in the source for the destination devices will be copied if theyAll values that exist in the source for the destination devices will be copied if theyAll values that exist in the source for the destination devices will be copied if theyAll values that exist in the source for the destination devices will be copied if theyAll values that exist in the source for the destination devices will be copied if theypass the filter !pass the filter !pass the filter !pass the filter !pass the filter !

Examples:FIXTURE THRU AT (select PAN/TILT) CUE 1 ENTER.This will bring all PAN/TILT information contained in CUE 1 of the default executoractive into the programmer.

CUE 5 AT (select GOBO) CUE 4 ENTER.Devices of cue 5 get the gobos of cue 4 (of course only if the gobos were programmed intocue 4).

CUE 5 AT (select GOBO) CUE THRU 4 ENTERDevices of cue 5 get the gobos of the STATUSof the STATUSof the STATUSof the STATUSof the STATUS of cue 4 ! This is a big difference to thelast example !!!

b) As helping keywordAs helping keywordAs helping keywordAs helping keywordAs helping keyword: See COPY MOVE and INSERT.

CHANNELCHANNELCHANNELCHANNELCHANNEL


a) as starting keywordas starting keywordas starting keywordas starting keywordas starting keyword:

CHANNEL ENTERCHANNEL becomes the DEFAULT KEYWORD.

CHANNEL (range list) ENTERSelect channels in range list.

CHANNEL (range list) AT � (see AT)Apply values to channels in range list.

Channel numbers in the range list must be in the interval [ 1 � 9999].

b) as target for the following executing commandsas target for the following executing commandsas target for the following executing commandsas target for the following executing commandsas target for the following executing commands:

ON activate dimmer value in programmer.

OFF deactivate dimmer value in programmer and deselect channel.

PAUSE PARK dimmer value of channel.

GO UNPARK dimmer value of channel.

CLEARCLEARCLEARCLEARCLEAR


Progressively performs:

1) If there is a selection -> CLEAR_SELECTION

2) If there is an activation -> CLEAR_ACTIVE

3) If there is stage output from programmer -> CLEAR_ALL

CLEAR_ACTIVECLEAR_ACTIVECLEAR_ACTIVECLEAR_ACTIVECLEAR_ACTIVE


Clears the activation in the programmer without destroying stage output.



CLEAR_ALLCLEAR_ALLCLEAR_ALLCLEAR_ALLCLEAR_ALL


Clears the selection.Clears the activation.Clears the programmer totally, all values set to default values.ODD/EVEN/Sub-selection is reset to ALL.

CLEAR_SELECTIONCLEAR_SELECTIONCLEAR_SELECTIONCLEAR_SELECTIONCLEAR_SELECTION


Clears the selection. No device is selected.ODD/EVEN/Sub-selection is reset to ALL.

COPYCOPYCOPYCOPYCOPY


COPY (source objects) AT (destination objects) [ ENTER ]

Source objects : a range list of objects which are all of type X.Destination objects: a range list of objects which are all of type Y

Object types X and Y must be equal or compatible.

Source object typesSource object typesSource object typesSource object typesSource object types Compatible destination object typesCompatible destination object typesCompatible destination object typesCompatible destination object typesCompatible destination object typesEXEC EXEC

FADERBUTTON/123 FADERBUTTON/1/2/3

DMX_BUTTON DMX_BUTTON

MIDI_BUTTON MIDI_BUTTON

TOUCH_BTN TOUCH_BTN

In this software version, there are some limitations for copying CUES:In this software version, there are some limitations for copying CUES:In this software version, there are some limitations for copying CUES:In this software version, there are some limitations for copying CUES:In this software version, there are some limitations for copying CUES:1) A range list of cues can be

a. A single cue e.g. CUE 1b. A range of cues. e.g. CUE 1 THRU 10

2) Also the destination object must be a CUE.Therefore the syntax COPY CUE 1 SEQU 1 AT SEQU 2 ENTER is not allowed.Instead you must write COPY CUE 1 SEQU 1 AT CUE 2 SEQU 2 ENTER.

Please note, that CUE 1 SEQU 1 equals the term SEQU 1 CUE 1. Whenever the term contains CUE, you arecopying CUES !

CUECUECUECUECUE


General Format:General Format:General Format:General Format:General Format:

Express ionExpress ionExpress ionExpress ionExpress ion Normal meaningNormal meaningNormal meaningNormal meaningNormal meaning In case of STOREIn case of STOREIn case of STOREIn case of STOREIn case of STORECUE Current active cue of running default executor New cue at the end in default executor

CUE X Cue X of default executor

CUE X SEQU Y Cue X of sequence Y

SEQU Y CUE X Same as above !

CUE EXEC Z Current active cue of running executor Z New cue at the end in executor Z

CUE X EXEC Z Cue X of executor Z



X Cue number in format A.B with intervals [ 0�999].[0�999] , B is optional.�CUE 0� is invalid, but �CUE 0.5� is valid.

Y Sequence number in interval [ 1 � 999 ]

Z Executor number in format PAGE.INDEX with intervals [ 1 � 64].[1�60] ,or in format INDEX with interval [1�60] using current page.

Either X or Y,Z can be range lists. Range lists with X and Y,Z are not allowed. Therefore:CUE 1 THRU 10 SEQU 1 is validCUE 1 TRUE 10 SEQU 1 THRU 5 is invalid

a) as starting keywordas starting keywordas starting keywordas starting keywordas starting keyword:

CUE ENTER

CUE becomes the DEFAULT KEYWORD.

CUE (range list) ENTER

Select devices included in cue(s).

CUE (range list) AT � (see AT)

Apply values to devices included in cue(s).

b) as target for the following operational commandsas target for the following operational commandsas target for the following operational commandsas target for the following operational commandsas target for the following operational commands:

AT Extract data from cue

COPY Copy one cue to another

DELETE Delete a cue

EDIT Edit a cue

IF Deselect devices which are not part of the cue.

IFOUTPUT Search for stage output of cue

INVERT Invert selection of cue

LABEL Change name of cue

MOVE Move cue to another position

PREVIEW Preview cue

c) as target for the following executing commandsas target for the following executing commandsas target for the following executing commandsas target for the following executing commandsas target for the following executing commands:

ON activates content of cue in programmer.

OFF deactivate content of cue in programmer.

PAUSE PARK all features included in cue.

GO UNPARK all features included in cue.

LOAD Prepare cue X as next cue for executor Z.

GOTO Executor Z is calling cue X

DEF_GODEF_GODEF_GODEF_GODEF_GO

Classification : immediate keyword

Is performing a GO on the default executor.

DEF_GO-DEF_GO-DEF_GO-DEF_GO-DEF_GO-Classification : immediate keyword

Is performing a GO- on the default executor.

DEF_PAUSEDEF_PAUSEDEF_PAUSEDEF_PAUSEDEF_PAUSE

Classification : immediate keyword

Is performing a PAUSE on the default executor.



DELADELADELADELADELAYYYYY


a)a)a)a)a) With executing keywords and executorsWith executing keywords and executorsWith executing keywords and executorsWith executing keywords and executorsWith executing keywords and executors(Executing keyword) (Executor List) DELAY X.X ENTER(Executing keyword) (Executor List) DELAY X.X ENTER(Executing keyword) (Executor List) DELAY X.X ENTER(Executing keyword) (Executor List) DELAY X.X ENTER(Executing keyword) (Executor List) DELAY X.X ENTERThe execution command is performed on all listed executors with a snap delay overwrite of X.X seconds. Does notwork with PAUSE or flashing commands.

b )b )b )b )b ) Giving individual delay times to fixtures or channels:Giving individual delay times to fixtures or channels:Giving individual delay times to fixtures or channels:Giving individual delay times to fixtures or channels:Giving individual delay times to fixtures or channels:[Selection] A[Selection] A[Selection] A[Selection] A[Selection] AT DELAT DELAT DELAT DELAT DELAY X.X [TRHU YY X.X [TRHU YY X.X [TRHU YY X.X [TRHU YY X.X [TRHU Y.Y] ENTER.Y] ENTER.Y] ENTER.Y] ENTER.Y] ENTERIndividual delays for the feature shown in the presetbar will be set to X.X seconds.If no selection is given, the current selection is used.Please note that the given delay may be a range. In this case, delays will be aligned over the given selection.The given delays can be signed, which will result in relative changes of individual delays.Giving individual delays can be combined with giving individual fades and values into one AT command.

c )c )c )c )c ) Clearing individual delays:Clearing individual delays:Clearing individual delays:Clearing individual delays:Clearing individual delays:[SELECTION] AT DELAY ENTER[SELECTION] AT DELAY ENTER[SELECTION] AT DELAY ENTER[SELECTION] AT DELAY ENTER[SELECTION] AT DELAY ENTERWorks very much like b), but no value for the delay is given.

d )d )d )d )d ) Setting default snap delay:Setting default snap delay:Setting default snap delay:Setting default snap delay:Setting default snap delay:(No selection present) DELAY X.X ENTER(No selection present) DELAY X.X ENTER(No selection present) DELAY X.X ENTER(No selection present) DELAY X.X ENTER(No selection present) DELAY X.X ENTERThe next cue will be stored with X.X seconds snap delay default for all snap channels.

e)e)e)e)e) As snap delay when storing a cue:As snap delay when storing a cue:As snap delay when storing a cue:As snap delay when storing a cue:As snap delay when storing a cue:STORE (List of Cues) DELAY X.Y ENTERSTORE (List of Cues) DELAY X.Y ENTERSTORE (List of Cues) DELAY X.Y ENTERSTORE (List of Cues) DELAY X.Y ENTERSTORE (List of Cues) DELAY X.Y ENTERThe given cues will be stored with a snap delay default of X.Y seconds for all snap channels.

f )f )f )f )f ) Switching to delay display mode:Switching to delay display mode:Switching to delay display mode:Switching to delay display mode:Switching to delay display mode:DELAY ENTERDELAY ENTERDELAY ENTERDELAY ENTERDELAY ENTERAll sheets wich are set to AUTO display mode, will display delays instead of values. This effect is only temporary.All sheets will switch back to value mode upon ending of the next command line operation.

DELETEDELETEDELETEDELETEDELETE


DELETE (object list) ENTER

Some forms of delete will need no ENTER in the end:DELETE (hit button in a pool)DELETE [CUE] X (hit executor button)DELETE (hit viewbutton)

All objects in the list must be of the same type. You can not delete a preset and a cue at one time.Deleting an object that is assigned to an executor will also delete the executor.Deleting an object that is assigned to a viewbutton will also delete the viewbutton.

Objec tOb jec tOb jec tOb jec tOb jec t CommentCommentCommentCommentCommentCUE If no sequence or executor is specified, the sequence of the default executor is used. If the

last cue of a sequence is deleted, the whole sequence is deleted.

DMX_BTN

EFFECT Do not delete effects which are used by sequences.

EXEC Deleting an executor does not delete the sequence, group etc. assigned to it.

FORM Do not delete forms which are still in use by effects.

GROUP Deleting a group will also kill its submaster functionality.

MACRO You can not delete a macro that is currently recording.

MIDI_BTN

PAGE Deleting a page will delete all executors on that page.

PRESET Deleting single presets is done with the syntax PRESET X.Y with X=preset type and Y=presetnumber. DELETE PRESET X will ask for confirmation and delete all presets of the given type.

SEQU

TIMECODE



TOUCH_BTN

VIEW

VIEWBTN

DMXDMXDMXDMXDMX


NONONONONOT IMPLEMENTED YETT IMPLEMENTED YETT IMPLEMENTED YETT IMPLEMENTED YETT IMPLEMENTED YET.....

DMXDMXDMXDMXDMX is accessing directly a DMX address.

DMX_BTNDMX_BTNDMX_BTNDMX_BTNDMX_BTN


A DMX_BTN (dmx button) is a remote function triggert by incoming DMX signals.The DMX_BTN simulates an executor keypress, therefore it is working only in combination with an assignedexecutor. DMX_BTNs can be seen under TOOLS / REMOTE DMX menu.

Calling a DMX_BTN manually:Calling a DMX_BTN manually:Calling a DMX_BTN manually:Calling a DMX_BTN manually:Calling a DMX_BTN manually:DMX_BTN X ENTERDMX_BTN X ENTERDMX_BTN X ENTERDMX_BTN X ENTERDMX_BTN X ENTER

Linking a DMX_BTN to an executor:Linking a DMX_BTN to an executor:Linking a DMX_BTN to an executor:Linking a DMX_BTN to an executor:Linking a DMX_BTN to an executor:STSTSTSTSTORE DMX_BORE DMX_BORE DMX_BORE DMX_BORE DMX_BTN X EXEC/FADEREBUTTTN X EXEC/FADEREBUTTTN X EXEC/FADEREBUTTTN X EXEC/FADEREBUTTTN X EXEC/FADEREBUTTON1/2/3 YON1/2/3 YON1/2/3 YON1/2/3 YON1/2/3 Y.Z ENTER.Z ENTER.Z ENTER.Z ENTER.Z ENTERUsing EXEC in this command will always link the remote to the middle executor button.

X must be in the range from 1 to 96.

EDITEDITEDITEDITEDIT


a)a)a)a)a) Simulating a right-mouse-click for editing an input field or a cell in a grid:Simulating a right-mouse-click for editing an input field or a cell in a grid:Simulating a right-mouse-click for editing an input field or a cell in a grid:Simulating a right-mouse-click for editing an input field or a cell in a grid:Simulating a right-mouse-click for editing an input field or a cell in a grid:

EDIT (use touchscreen to click somewhere) or

EDIT (left-mouse-click somewhere)

b )b )b )b )b ) Starting EDIT / UPDATE procedure:Starting EDIT / UPDATE procedure:Starting EDIT / UPDATE procedure:Starting EDIT / UPDATE procedure:Starting EDIT / UPDATE procedure:

The whole procedure works as follows:

- EDIT object ENTEROnly one object can be edited at one time. If the edit / update procedure is still running for another object, youwill be asked to update the old one first.

- Programmer is cleared, and the values and selection of the object is loaded into the programmer.

- All titles of fixture and channel sheet will show the name of the �edit object�.

- Change values and selection in the programmer as you want.

- If you changed something, UPDATE starts flashing.

- Hit UPDATE. You will be asked for a confirmation and then changed values and selection is stored back into theobject.

- ESC will quit the EDIT / UPDATE procedure without updating the object at any time.

Objects that can be edited in this way are:Objects that can be edited in this way are:Objects that can be edited in this way are:Objects that can be edited in this way are:Objects that can be edited in this way are:

Syntax , start with EDIT �Syntax , start with EDIT �Syntax , start with EDIT �Syntax , start with EDIT �Syntax , start with EDIT � CommentCommentCommentCommentCommentCUE ENTER Edit active cue of default executor

[CUE] X ENTER Edit cue X of default executor

CUE X SEQUENCE Y ENTER

CUE X EXEC Y.Z ENTER

CUE X (hit executor)

SEQUENCE X ENTER or hit button in Will edit first cue of sequence Xsequence pool window



GROUP X ENTER or hit button in Although a group has no values, the selection can be edited.group pool window

PRESET X ENTER or hit preset type in Will edit first non-empty preset of type Xpreset control bar of fixture sheet.

PRESET X.Y ENTER or hit button inpreset pool window

c )c )c )c )c ) Continue EDIT / UPDATE procedure with NEXT / PREVIOUS object:Continue EDIT / UPDATE procedure with NEXT / PREVIOUS object:Continue EDIT / UPDATE procedure with NEXT / PREVIOUS object:Continue EDIT / UPDATE procedure with NEXT / PREVIOUS object:Continue EDIT / UPDATE procedure with NEXT / PREVIOUS object:

EDIT NEXT [ENTER]EDIT PREVIOUS [ENTER]If you use the NEXT and PREVIOUS hard-keys, ENTER is not necessary.Next and previous will continue edit/update with the next/previous non-empty object in the context of the current�edit object�.Examples:

- EDIT PRESET 1 ENTER. Starts edit/update for first non-empty PAN/TILT preset.EDIT NEXT goes on to the next non-empty PAN/TILT preset.

- EDIT SEQUENCE 1 ENTER. Starts edit/update for first cue.EDIT NEXT goes on to second cue.

Together with the HIGHLITE function, EDIT NEXT is probably the most powerful tool to check your stage presets orthings like that.

d )d )d )d )d ) Opening an edit screen:Opening an edit screen:Opening an edit screen:Opening an edit screen:Opening an edit screen:

Some objects can not be edited in the programmer. They have edit screens to manipulate them. Only one edit menufor only object can be open at one time. If you open an edit menu for an object, all other edit menus will close. Editmenus can be closed with the ESC button.

EDIT EFFECT X ENTER or EDIT (hit button in effect pool)

EDIT EXEC X.Y ENTER or EDIT (hit executor)

EDIT FORM X ENTER or EDIT (hit button in form pool)

EDIT MACRO X ENTER or EDIT (hit button in macro pool)

EDIT TIMECODE X ENTER or EDIT (hit button in timecode pool)

EFFECTEFFECTEFFECTEFFECTEFFECT


a)a)a)a)a) as starting keyword:as starting keyword:as starting keyword:as starting keyword:as starting keyword:

EFFECT ENTEREFFECT becomes the DEFAULT KEYWORD.

EFFECT (range list) ENTERStart effects in range list.

Effect numbers in the range list must be in the interval [ 1 � 999].

Effects are numbered in a certain way:Effects are numbered in a certain way:Effects are numbered in a certain way:Effects are numbered in a certain way:Effects are numbered in a certain way:

RangeRangeRangeRangeRange MeaningMeaningMeaningMeaningMeaning 1 � upwards User created effects

899 � downwards Automatic created effects used by cuelists

900 � upwards Temporary effects, created from preset effects. These effects are not visible in pools.

c )c )c )c )c ) as target for the following operational keywords:as target for the following operational keywords:as target for the following operational keywords:as target for the following operational keywords:as target for the following operational keywords:

ASSIGN Assign an effect to an executor

COPY Copy one effect to another

DELETE Delete an effect

EDIT Open edit menu for effect

IF Deselect devices that are not included in effect

IFOUTPUT Select devices that have stage output from the effect



INSERT/MOVE Change visible number of effect

LABEL Change name of effect

c )c )c )c )c ) as target for the following executing commands:as target for the following executing commands:as target for the following executing commands:as target for the following executing commands:as target for the following executing commands:

GO Run forward, start with fade in

GO- Run backwards, start with fade in

>>> Run forward, no fade in

<<< Run backwards, no fade in

PAUSE Pause, stand still

OFF Switch off, fading out

ESCESCESCESCESC


ESCESCESCESCESC (Escape) will progressively perform the following actions:

a) Is there something in the command line ? Yes -> clear commandline !

b) Is edit/update procedure running ? Yes -> cancel edit update

c) Is there an open window or a message box ? Yes -> close it !

d) Is there an edit menu open ? Yes -> close it !

EVENEVENEVENEVENEVEN


EVEN is creating a sub-selection from the current selection.

If you have selected 10 fixtures and the say EVENEVENEVENEVENEVEN, only the 2nd, 4th,6th,8th and 10th fixture in this selection stays�really selected�. The others become �a little bit selected�, waiting to be fully selected again by the ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL command.

EXECEXECEXECEXECEXEC


FormatFormatFormatFormatFormat MeaningMeaningMeaningMeaningMeaningEXEC X [THRU [Y]] Executors X to Y of current page

EXEC P.X [THRU [Q.Y]] Executors X of page P to exec Y of page Q

EXEC X [THRU [Y]] PAGE P [THRU [Q]] Executor X to Y of page P to Q

- Executor number X/Y must be in the range of [ 1 .. 60 ] where

[1..20] is adressing the motorized fader executors and

[21 .. 60] is adressing the button executors.

- Page numbers P/Q must be in the range of [1 .. 64 ].


EXEC ENTEREXEC becomes the DEFAULT KEYWORD.

EXEC (range list) ENTERSelect devices included in objects to given executors.

EXEC (range list) AT � (see AT)Apply values to devices included in objects assigned to given executors.



a)a)a)a)a) as target for the following operational commands:as target for the following operational commands:as target for the following operational commands:as target for the following operational commands:as target for the following operational commands:

ASSIGN SEQUENCE,GROUP and EFFECT objects can be assigned with the command line to an executor.EXECUTING COMMANDS can be assigned with the command line to an executor´s button.For fader executors, the keyword EXEC is specifying the middle button.

COPY Copy one executor to another

DELETE Delete an executor. This does not destroy the object that is assigned to the executor.

EDIT Start to edit the object that is assigned to the executor.

IF Deselect devices which are not part of executor´s object´s selection.

IFOUTPUT Select devices which have stage output from this executor

INVERT Invert current selection by the selection of executor´s object.

LABEL Change name of executor´s object.

MOVE Move executor to another position

PREVIEW Preview executors object. If the object is a sequence, and the executor is running, the nextcue will be previewed.

b )b )b )b )b ) as target for ALL executing commands.as target for ALL executing commands.as target for ALL executing commands.as target for ALL executing commands.as target for ALL executing commands.

Please look at 9.3.19.3.19.3.19.3.19.3.1 Executing Keywords Executing Keywords Executing Keywords Executing Keywords Executing Keywords for a summary or look at those keywords for details.

FADEFADEFADEFADEFADE


a)a)a)a)a) With executing keywords and executorsWith executing keywords and executorsWith executing keywords and executorsWith executing keywords and executorsWith executing keywords and executors(Executing keyword) (Executor List) FADE X.X ENTER(Executing keyword) (Executor List) FADE X.X ENTER(Executing keyword) (Executor List) FADE X.X ENTER(Executing keyword) (Executor List) FADE X.X ENTER(Executing keyword) (Executor List) FADE X.X ENTERThe execution command is performed on all listed executors with a fade overwrite of X.X seconds. Does not workwith PAUSE or flashing commands.

b )b )b )b )b ) Giving individual fade times to fixtures or channels:Giving individual fade times to fixtures or channels:Giving individual fade times to fixtures or channels:Giving individual fade times to fixtures or channels:Giving individual fade times to fixtures or channels:[Selection] A[Selection] A[Selection] A[Selection] A[Selection] AT FADE X.X [TRHU YT FADE X.X [TRHU YT FADE X.X [TRHU YT FADE X.X [TRHU YT FADE X.X [TRHU Y.Y] ENTER.Y] ENTER.Y] ENTER.Y] ENTER.Y] ENTERIndividual fades for the feature shown in the presetbar will be set to X.X seconds.If no selection is given, the current selection is used.Please note that the given fade may be a range. In this case, fades will be aligned over the given selection.The given fades can be signed, which will result in relative changes of individual fades.Giving individual fades can be combined with giving individual delays and values into one AT command.

c )c )c )c )c ) Clearing individual fades:Clearing individual fades:Clearing individual fades:Clearing individual fades:Clearing individual fades:[SELECTION] AT FADE ENTER[SELECTION] AT FADE ENTER[SELECTION] AT FADE ENTER[SELECTION] AT FADE ENTER[SELECTION] AT FADE ENTERWorks very much like b), but no value for the fade is given.

d )d )d )d )d ) Setting default in & outfade:Setting default in & outfade:Setting default in & outfade:Setting default in & outfade:Setting default in & outfade:(No selection present) FADE X.X ENTER(No selection present) FADE X.X ENTER(No selection present) FADE X.X ENTER(No selection present) FADE X.X ENTER(No selection present) FADE X.X ENTERThe next cue will be stored with X.X seconds basic fade and outfade for all non-snap channels.

e)e)e)e)e) As in & outfade when storing a cue:As in & outfade when storing a cue:As in & outfade when storing a cue:As in & outfade when storing a cue:As in & outfade when storing a cue:STORE (List of Cues) FADE X.Y ENTERSTORE (List of Cues) FADE X.Y ENTERSTORE (List of Cues) FADE X.Y ENTERSTORE (List of Cues) FADE X.Y ENTERSTORE (List of Cues) FADE X.Y ENTERThe given cues will be stored with a basic fade and outfade of X.Y seconds for all non-snap channels.

f )f )f )f )f ) Switching to fade display mode:Switching to fade display mode:Switching to fade display mode:Switching to fade display mode:Switching to fade display mode:FADE ENTERFADE ENTERFADE ENTERFADE ENTERFADE ENTERAll sheets wich are set to AUTO display mode, will display fades instead of values. This effect is only temporary. Allsheets will switch back to value mode upon ending of the next command line operation.

FADERFADERFADERFADERFADER


FormatFormatFormatFormatFormat MeaningMeaningMeaningMeaningMeaningFADER X [THRU [Y]] Fader X to Y of current page

FADER P.X [THRU [Q.Y]] Fader X of page P to fader Y of page Q

FADER X [THRU [Y]] PAGE P [THRU [Q]] Fader X to Y of page P to Q



- Fader number X/Y must be in the range of [ 1 .. 20 ]

- Page numbers P/Q must be in the range of [1 .. 64 ].

Only one command is implemented for the fader keyword:

FADER (list of faders) AT (value list) [ENTER]FADER (list of faders) AT (value list) [ENTER]FADER (list of faders) AT (value list) [ENTER]FADER (list of faders) AT (value list) [ENTER]FADER (list of faders) AT (value list) [ENTER]

This command will set the motorized faders to the given values.

FADERBUTTON1FADERBUTTON1FADERBUTTON1FADERBUTTON1FADERBUTTON1


The same as EXEC, but in case of ASSIGNMENTS it is excplicitely pointing to the MIDDLE button.



The same as EXEC, but in case of ASSIGNMENTS it is excplicitely pointing to the LOWER button.



The same as EXEC, but in case of ASSIGNMENTS it is excplicitely pointing to the UPPER button.

FEATUREFEATUREFEATUREFEATUREFEATURE


NONONONONOT IMPLEMENTED YETT IMPLEMENTED YETT IMPLEMENTED YETT IMPLEMENTED YETT IMPLEMENTED YET.....

FEATUREFEATUREFEATUREFEATUREFEATURE is accessing a FEATURE inside a FIXTURE, like PAN or IRIS.

FIXFIXFIXFIXFIX


a) As starting keywordAs starting keywordAs starting keywordAs starting keywordAs starting keyword, it is used to fix / unfix EXECUTORSEXECUTORSEXECUTORSEXECUTORSEXECUTORS. A fixed executor is physically present on allpages.

FIX (executor list) [ENTER]FIX (executor list) [ENTER]FIX (executor list) [ENTER]FIX (executor list) [ENTER]FIX (executor list) [ENTER]

b )b )b )b )b ) In an assign commandIn an assign commandIn an assign commandIn an assign commandIn an assign command, this function can be put on an executor button (see ASSIGN).

FIXTUREFIXTUREFIXTUREFIXTUREFIXTURE



FIXTURE ENTERFIXTURE becomes the DEFAULT KEYWORD.

FIXTURE (range list) ENTERSelect fixtures in range list.

FIXTURE (range list) AT � (see AT)Apply values to fixtures in range list.

Fixture numbers in the range list must be in the interval [ 1 � 9999].

b )b )b )b )b ) as target for the following executing commands:as target for the following executing commands:as target for the following executing commands:as target for the following executing commands:as target for the following executing commands:

ON activate all feature values in programmer.

OFF deactivate all feature values in programmer and deselect fixture.

PAUSE PARK all features of fixture.

GO UNPARK all features of fixture.



FLASH_DOWNFLASH_DOWNFLASH_DOWNFLASH_DOWNFLASH_DOWN


a)a)a)a)a) As starting keywordAs starting keywordAs starting keywordAs starting keywordAs starting keyword, every executor that follows after FLASH_DOWN is starting a black out.

FLASH_DOWN (executor list) [ENTER]FLASH_DOWN (executor list) [ENTER]FLASH_DOWN (executor list) [ENTER]FLASH_DOWN (executor list) [ENTER]FLASH_DOWN (executor list) [ENTER]

b )b )b )b )b ) As starting keywordAs starting keywordAs starting keywordAs starting keywordAs starting keyword combined with UNPRESSUNPRESSUNPRESSUNPRESSUNPRESS, every executor that follows after FLASH_DOWN is endinga black out.

FLASH_DOWN (executor list) UNPRESS [ENTER]FLASH_DOWN (executor list) UNPRESS [ENTER]FLASH_DOWN (executor list) UNPRESS [ENTER]FLASH_DOWN (executor list) UNPRESS [ENTER]FLASH_DOWN (executor list) UNPRESS [ENTER]

a)a)a)a)a) In an assign commandIn an assign commandIn an assign commandIn an assign commandIn an assign command, this function can NOT NOT NOT NOT NOT be used. You have to use the Assign menu for putting it onan executor button. It is simply called FLASH FLASH FLASH FLASH FLASH there.

Note: It is nearly impossible to use this command by typing it into the command line. Rather use it when it isassigned to a button !

FLASH_DOWN_OFFFLASH_DOWN_OFFFLASH_DOWN_OFFFLASH_DOWN_OFFFLASH_DOWN_OFF


Same as FLASH_DOWN � UNPRESS.Please look at the FLASH_DOWN command description.

FLASH_UPFLASH_UPFLASH_UPFLASH_UPFLASH_UP


a)a)a)a)a) As starting keywordAs starting keywordAs starting keywordAs starting keywordAs starting keyword, every executor that follows after FLASH_UP is starting a full flash.

FLASH_UP (executor list) [ENTER]FLASH_UP (executor list) [ENTER]FLASH_UP (executor list) [ENTER]FLASH_UP (executor list) [ENTER]FLASH_UP (executor list) [ENTER]

b )b )b )b )b ) As starting keywordAs starting keywordAs starting keywordAs starting keywordAs starting keyword combined with UNPRESSUNPRESSUNPRESSUNPRESSUNPRESS, every executor that follows after FLASH_UP is ending a fullflash.

FLASH_UP (executor list) UNPRESS [ENTER]FLASH_UP (executor list) UNPRESS [ENTER]FLASH_UP (executor list) UNPRESS [ENTER]FLASH_UP (executor list) UNPRESS [ENTER]FLASH_UP (executor list) UNPRESS [ENTER]

c )c )c )c )c ) In an assign commandIn an assign commandIn an assign commandIn an assign commandIn an assign command, this function can NOT NOT NOT NOT NOT be used. You have to use the Assign menu for putting it onan executor button. It is simply called OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT there.

Note: It is nearly impossible to use this command by typing it into the command line. Rather use it when it isassigned to a button !

FLASH_UP_OFFFLASH_UP_OFFFLASH_UP_OFFFLASH_UP_OFFFLASH_UP_OFF


Same as FLASH_UP � UNPRESS.Please look at the FLASH_UP command description.

FORMFORMFORMFORMFORM


a)a)a)a)a) as starting keyword it has no function.as starting keyword it has no function.as starting keyword it has no function.as starting keyword it has no function.as starting keyword it has no function.

FORM (range list) ENTER

Form numbers in the range list must be in the interval [ 1 � 999].

b )b )b )b )b ) as target for the following commands:as target for the following commands:as target for the following commands:as target for the following commands:as target for the following commands:

COPY Copy one form to another

DELETE Delete a form

EDIT Open edit menu for form

INSERT/MOVE Change visible number of form.



FULLFULLFULLFULLFULL


Full is an alias for 100% dimmer value (open).

a) As starting keyword, it is immediate, opening all dimmers of the current selection:

FULL

b) After the AT command in value ranges like:

... AT FULL ENTER... AT FULL ENTER... AT FULL ENTER... AT FULL ENTER... AT FULL ENTER

... AT 0 THRU FULL ENTER... AT 0 THRU FULL ENTER... AT 0 THRU FULL ENTER... AT 0 THRU FULL ENTER... AT 0 THRU FULL ENTER

GOGOGOGOGO


a)a)a)a)a) As starting keywordAs starting keywordAs starting keywordAs starting keywordAs starting keyword, every object that follows after the GO will try to go forwardgo forwardgo forwardgo forwardgo forward one step.

GO (target object list) [FADE X] [DELAY Y] [ENTER]GO (target object list) [FADE X] [DELAY Y] [ENTER]GO (target object list) [FADE X] [DELAY Y] [ENTER]GO (target object list) [FADE X] [DELAY Y] [ENTER]GO (target object list) [FADE X] [DELAY Y] [ENTER]

If fade or delay are given, they overwrite the pre-programmed times.

Target typeTarget typeTarget typeTarget typeTarget type Operat ionOperat ionOperat ionOperat ionOperat ionEXEC Go forward one step

EFFECT Start running forward

TIMECODE Start playing forward

PAGE Does GO on all its executors.

SPEEDMASTER Does GO on all programs using this speed master(executor assigned to a speed master)SUBMASTER Unpark all channels involved in this group.

CHANNEL, FIXTURE, GROUP Unpark devices.

PRESET X (Preset Type) Unpark all channels of current selection of that preset type.


GO-GO-GO-GO-GO-


a)a)a)a)a) As starting keywordAs starting keywordAs starting keywordAs starting keywordAs starting keyword, every object that follows after the GO will try to go backwardsgo backwardsgo backwardsgo backwardsgo backwards one step.

GO- (target object list) [FADE X] [DELAY Y] [ENTER]GO- (target object list) [FADE X] [DELAY Y] [ENTER]GO- (target object list) [FADE X] [DELAY Y] [ENTER]GO- (target object list) [FADE X] [DELAY Y] [ENTER]GO- (target object list) [FADE X] [DELAY Y] [ENTER]

If fade or delay are given, they overwrite the default GO- times.

The default GO- times can be changed in the SETUP / DEFAULTS menu.

Target typeTarget typeTarget typeTarget typeTarget type Operat ionOperat ionOperat ionOperat ionOperat ionEXEC Go backwards one step

EFFECT Start running backwards

PAGE Does GO- on all its executors.

SPEEDMASTER Does GO- on all programs using this speed master(executor assigned to a speed master)




GOTOGOTOGOTOGOTOGOTO


a)a)a)a)a) As starting keywordAs starting keywordAs starting keywordAs starting keywordAs starting keyword, every executor that follows after the GOTO will try to go directly to a givengo directly to a givengo directly to a givengo directly to a givengo directly to a givenstep.step.step.step.step.

GOTO [CUE] [W] [EXEC X] [FADE Y] [DELAY Z] [ENTER]GOTO [CUE] [W] [EXEC X] [FADE Y] [DELAY Z] [ENTER]GOTO [CUE] [W] [EXEC X] [FADE Y] [DELAY Z] [ENTER]GOTO [CUE] [W] [EXEC X] [FADE Y] [DELAY Z] [ENTER]GOTO [CUE] [W] [EXEC X] [FADE Y] [DELAY Z] [ENTER]

Giving the keyword CUE is optional.If W (cue number) is not given, you will be prompted for it.If executor is not given, default executor will be used.If fade or delay are given, they overwrite the default GOTO times.The default GOTO times can be changed in the SETUP / DEFAULTS menu.

b )b )b )b )b ) In an assign commandIn an assign commandIn an assign commandIn an assign commandIn an assign command, this function can be put on an executor button (see ASSIGN).In fact you will end up with an LOAD assigned to the executor button, because it has to ask for the cue anyway.

GROUPGROUPGROUPGROUPGROUP



GROUP ENTERGROUP becomes the DEFAULT KEYWORD.

GROUP (range list) ENTERSelect groups in range list.

GROUP (range list) AT � (see AT)Apply values to groups in range list.

Group numbers in the range list must be in the interval [ 1 � 999].

b )b )b )b )b ) as target for the following executing commands:as target for the following executing commands:as target for the following executing commands:as target for the following executing commands:as target for the following executing commands:

ON activate devices contained in group.OFF deactivate and deselect devices contained in group.PAUSE PARK all devices of group.GO UNPARK all devices of group.

I FI FI FI FI F


IFIFIFIFIF is performing a logical AND within selections. It is never enlarging the current selection. It leaves only thosedevices selected which are included in to different selections:

Assuming that we have two groups (we will use real names to make it clearer):PAR64 includes ALL PAR64 lampsFRONT_TRUSS includes ALL lamps on the front truss.

PAR64 IF FRONT_TRUSS ENTERPAR64 IF FRONT_TRUSS ENTERPAR64 IF FRONT_TRUSS ENTERPAR64 IF FRONT_TRUSS ENTERPAR64 IF FRONT_TRUSS ENTER will therefore select all PAR64 which are on the front truss !

General Syntax:[ (selection1) ] IF (selection2) ENTER[ (selection1) ] IF (selection2) ENTER[ (selection1) ] IF (selection2) ENTER[ (selection1) ] IF (selection2) ENTER[ (selection1) ] IF (selection2) ENTERIf selection1 is not given, the current selection will be used.

IFOUTPUTIFOUTPUTIFOUTPUTIFOUTPUTIFOUTPUT


IFOUTPUT IFOUTPUT IFOUTPUT IFOUTPUT IFOUTPUT is selecting devices depending on the current stage output.

General syntax:IFOUTPUT (object list) [ENTER]IFOUTPUT (object list) [ENTER]IFOUTPUT (object list) [ENTER]IFOUTPUT (object list) [ENTER]IFOUTPUT (object list) [ENTER]If the object list is a hit on an executor´s button, or a click into an object pool window, ENTER is not needed.

Examples:

IFOUTPUT EXEC 1 ENTERIFOUTPUT EXEC 1 ENTERIFOUTPUT EXEC 1 ENTERIFOUTPUT EXEC 1 ENTERIFOUTPUT EXEC 1 ENTER All devices which have stage output from executor 1 will be selected.

IFOUTPUT PRESET 1.1 ENTERIFOUTPUT PRESET 1.1 ENTERIFOUTPUT PRESET 1.1 ENTERIFOUTPUT PRESET 1.1 ENTERIFOUTPUT PRESET 1.1 ENTER All devices which have the preset 1.1 active on stage will become selected.Very nice for selecting all fixtures that have a �blue star� currently on stage.



IFOUTPUT (selection) ENTERIFOUTPUT (selection) ENTERIFOUTPUT (selection) ENTERIFOUTPUT (selection) ENTERIFOUTPUT (selection) ENTER All devices of the given selection that have a stage output at the momentbecome selected.

IFOUTPUT CUE/SEQUENCE/EFFECTIFOUTPUT CUE/SEQUENCE/EFFECTIFOUTPUT CUE/SEQUENCE/EFFECTIFOUTPUT CUE/SEQUENCE/EFFECTIFOUTPUT CUE/SEQUENCE/EFFECT works accordingly.

INSERTINSERTINSERTINSERTINSERT


INSERT (source objects) AT (destination ) [ ENTER ]

Example: INSERT GROUP 10 THRU 15 + 20 AT 1 ENTER

Insert is working ONLY with SORTABLE objects.Sortable objects are:PRESET, GROUP,MACRO,VIEW,EFFECT,FORM,TIMECODE,SEQUENCE

Insert will try to make sufficient free space at the given destination by moving away non-empty objects.

INVERTINVERTINVERTINVERTINVERT


INVERT (selection) [ENTER]INVERT (selection) [ENTER]INVERT (selection) [ENTER]INVERT (selection) [ENTER]INVERT (selection) [ENTER]

INVERT is inverting the selected status of devices.

Example1:

Fixtures 1 through 5 are already selected.INVERT FIXTURE 1 THRU 10 ENTERFixtures 6 through 10 are selected.

Example2:

All even fixtures of GROUP X are already selected.INVERT GROUP X ENTERAll odd fixtures of GROUP X are selected.

Special case:

INVERT ENTERThe selected status of all devices that have ACTIVE channels in the programmer is inverted.

LABELLABELLABELLABELLABEL


LABEL (object list) [�NEW NAME�] ENTERLABEL (object list) [�NEW NAME�] ENTERLABEL (object list) [�NEW NAME�] ENTERLABEL (object list) [�NEW NAME�] ENTERLABEL (object list) [�NEW NAME�] ENTER

All objects in the object list will be renamed to �NEW NAME�.

Directly entering the new name is only possible with the PC keyboard.If the name is not given directly within the command, you will be prompted for it.If more than one object is to be labeled, the given name will be enumerated for every object:LABEL PRESET 4.1 THRU �COLOUR1� ENTERLABEL PRESET 4.1 THRU �COLOUR1� ENTERLABEL PRESET 4.1 THRU �COLOUR1� ENTERLABEL PRESET 4.1 THRU �COLOUR1� ENTERLABEL PRESET 4.1 THRU �COLOUR1� ENTERPreset 4.1 is named �COLOUR1�Preset 4.2 is named �COLOUR2� and so on.

Please note that executors do not have a name of their own. Instead they are showing the name of the objectassigned to it. In this way, labeling of an executor does not change the name of the executor, but of its object.Labeling of executors is fastly done:LABEL hit executorLABEL hit executorLABEL hit executorLABEL hit executorLABEL hit executor, enter new name., enter new name., enter new name., enter new name., enter new name.

Of course you can not change the name of an empty executor.



LEARNLEARNLEARNLEARNLEARN


a) As starting keyword, every executor that follows after LEARN will try to learn a new speed.

LEARN (executor list) ENTERLEARN (executor list) ENTERLEARN (executor list) ENTERLEARN (executor list) ENTERLEARN (executor list) ENTER


The LEARN function is working with CHASERS ( a sequence assigned to an executor in chaser mode) and withEFFECTS (regardless if they are assigned to an executor or not).Note: It makes absolutely no sense to use this function by typing it into the command line. The LEARN function willcalculate the timing between 2 to 4 LEARN commands, average the result, and adapt its speed to that.

LOADLOADLOADLOADLOAD


a)a)a)a)a) As starting keywordAs starting keywordAs starting keywordAs starting keywordAs starting keyword, every executor that follows after the LOAD will go to a given step upon thego to a given step upon thego to a given step upon thego to a given step upon thego to a given step upon thenext MANUAL GO command.next MANUAL GO command.next MANUAL GO command.next MANUAL GO command.next MANUAL GO command.

LOAD [CUE] [W] [EXEC X] [ENTER]LOAD [CUE] [W] [EXEC X] [ENTER]LOAD [CUE] [W] [EXEC X] [ENTER]LOAD [CUE] [W] [EXEC X] [ENTER]LOAD [CUE] [W] [EXEC X] [ENTER]

Giving the keyword CUE is optional.If W (cue number) is not given, you will be prompted for it.If executor is not given, default executor will be used.


MACROMACROMACROMACROMACRO


a)a)a)a)a) as starting keyword , given macros will be executed.as starting keyword , given macros will be executed.as starting keyword , given macros will be executed.as starting keyword , given macros will be executed.as starting keyword , given macros will be executed.

MACRO (range list) ENTER

Macro numbers in the range list must be in the interval [ 1 � 999].


ASSIGN A macro can be assigned to a VIEWBTN

COPY Copy one macro to another

DELETE Delete a macro

EDIT Open edit menu for macro

INSERT/MOVE Change visible number of macro

STORE Start to record a macro from live actions. Macro recoring is indicated by a flashing macrobutton. Macro recording is stopped with the command STORE MACRO ENTER..

Macros can be timed.Macros can be timed.Macros can be timed.Macros can be timed.Macros can be timed.A timed macro plays back with the same timing as it was recorded.Non-timed macros execute completely at once.

MIDI_BTNMIDI_BTNMIDI_BTNMIDI_BTNMIDI_BTN


A MIDI_BTN (midi button) is a remote function triggert by incoming midi note on/note off signals.

The MIDI_BTN simulates an executor keypress, therefore it is working only in combination with an assignedexecutor. MIDI_BTNs can be seen under TOOLS / REMOTE MIDI menu.

Calling a MIDI_BTN manually:MIDI_BTN X ENTERMIDI_BTN X ENTERMIDI_BTN X ENTERMIDI_BTN X ENTERMIDI_BTN X ENTER

Linking a MIDI_BTN to an executor:Linking a MIDI_BTN to an executor:Linking a MIDI_BTN to an executor:Linking a MIDI_BTN to an executor:Linking a MIDI_BTN to an executor:STSTSTSTSTORE MIDI_BORE MIDI_BORE MIDI_BORE MIDI_BORE MIDI_BTN X EXEC/FADEREBUTTTN X EXEC/FADEREBUTTTN X EXEC/FADEREBUTTTN X EXEC/FADEREBUTTTN X EXEC/FADEREBUTTON1/2/3 YON1/2/3 YON1/2/3 YON1/2/3 YON1/2/3 Y.Z ENTER.Z ENTER.Z ENTER.Z ENTER.Z ENTERUsing EXEC in this command will always link the remote to the middle executor button.




MOVEMOVEMOVEMOVEMOVE


MOVE (source objects) AT (destination objects) [ ENTER ]

Source objects : a range list of objects which are all of type X.Destination objects: a range list of objects which are all of type Y

Object types X and Y must be equal or compatible (see COPY)

If object type is sortable, MOVE object_a AT object_bMOVE object_a AT object_bMOVE object_a AT object_bMOVE object_a AT object_bMOVE object_a AT object_b will exchange objects.If object type in not sortable, object_b will be overwritten with object_a, then the original object_a will be deleted.

Sortable objects areSortable objects areSortable objects areSortable objects areSortable objects are:PRESET, GROUP,MACRO,VIEW,EFFECT,FORM,TIMECODE,SEQUENCE

Nonsortable objects are:Nonsortable objects are:Nonsortable objects are:Nonsortable objects are:Nonsortable objects are:EXEC,CUE,PAGE,VIEWBTN,DMXBTN,MIDIBTN,TOUCHBTN

The following objects can not be movedThe following objects can not be movedThe following objects can not be movedThe following objects can not be movedThe following objects can not be moved:CHANNEL,FIXTURE,DMX,FEATURE,FADER

NEXTNEXTNEXTNEXTNEXT


a) Create a subselection from the current selection:If you have selected more than one fixture and then say NEXTNEXTNEXTNEXTNEXT, only the first fixture stays �really selected�. Theothers become �a little bit selected�.The next time you say NEXTNEXTNEXTNEXTNEXT, only the 2nd fixture within the current selection is �really selected� and so on. TheALL ALL ALL ALL ALL command will clear this subselection.

b )b )b )b )b ) Continue EDIT / UPDATE procedure with NEXT object:Continue EDIT / UPDATE procedure with NEXT object:Continue EDIT / UPDATE procedure with NEXT object:Continue EDIT / UPDATE procedure with NEXT object:Continue EDIT / UPDATE procedure with NEXT object:See EDITEDITEDITEDITEDIT.

c )c )c )c )c ) Cursor Right in open dialog windows.Cursor Right in open dialog windows.Cursor Right in open dialog windows.Cursor Right in open dialog windows.Cursor Right in open dialog windows.In all temporary dialog windows and message boxes, you can use the NEXT NEXT NEXT NEXT NEXT key to move the input focus in thatwindow to the right. Together with PREVIOUS PREVIOUS PREVIOUS PREVIOUS PREVIOUS and ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER you can , for example , choose the appropriateanswer in a message box.

ODDODDODDODDODD


ODD ODD ODD ODD ODD is creating a sub-selection from the current selection.

If you have selected 10 fixtures and the say ODDODDODDODDODD, only the 1st , 3th,5th,7th and 9th fixture in this selection stays�really selected�. The others become �a little bit selected�, waiting to be fully selected again by the ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL command.

OFFOFFOFFOFFOFF


a)a)a)a)a) As starting keywordAs starting keywordAs starting keywordAs starting keywordAs starting keyword, every object that follows after the OFF will be switched OFF.

OFF (target object list) [FADE X] [DELAY Y] [ENTER]OFF (target object list) [FADE X] [DELAY Y] [ENTER]OFF (target object list) [FADE X] [DELAY Y] [ENTER]OFF (target object list) [FADE X] [DELAY Y] [ENTER]OFF (target object list) [FADE X] [DELAY Y] [ENTER]

If fade or delay are given, they overwrite the default OFF time.The default OFF times can be changed in the SETUP / DEFAULTS menu.

Target typeTarget typeTarget typeTarget typeTarget type Operat ionOperat ionOperat ionOperat ionOperat ionEXEC Switch off executor

EFFECT Switch off effect (fading out)

TIMECODE Stop timedode show

PAGE Does OFF on all its executors.

SPEEDMASTER Does OFF on all programs using this speed master(executor assigned to a speed master)

SUBMASTER �Knock out� all channels involved in this group.



CHANNEL,FIXTURE and GROUP �Knock out� all given devices.

PRESET X (Preset Type) �Knock out� all channels of current selection of that preset type.

�Knock out� means to clear the programmer completely for a channel.


ONONONONON


a)a)a)a)a) As starting keywordAs starting keywordAs starting keywordAs starting keywordAs starting keyword, every object that follows after the ON will be switched ON without changing thecurrent step.

ON (target object list) [FADE X] [DELAY Y] [ENTER]ON (target object list) [FADE X] [DELAY Y] [ENTER]ON (target object list) [FADE X] [DELAY Y] [ENTER]ON (target object list) [FADE X] [DELAY Y] [ENTER]ON (target object list) [FADE X] [DELAY Y] [ENTER]

If fade or delay are given, they overwrite the pre-programmed times.

Target typeTarget typeTarget typeTarget typeTarget type Operat ionOperat ionOperat ionOperat ionOperat ionEXEC Switch on executor

EFFECT Switch on effect (fading in in last direction)

PAGE Does On on all its executors.

SPEEDMASTER Does On on all programs using this speed master(executor assigned to a speed master)

SUBMASTER �Knock in� all channels involved in this group.

CHANNEL,FIXTURE and GROUP �Knock in� all given devices.

PRESET X (Preset Type) �Knock in� all channels of current selection of that preset type.

�Knock in� means to activate the programmer for a channel with its current value. This function can also be usedto make �snapshots� of running programs.


OOPSOOPSOOPSOOPSOOPSClassification : immediate keyword

OOPS , I made a mistake ! Undo !OOPS , I made a mistake ! Undo !OOPS , I made a mistake ! Undo !OOPS , I made a mistake ! Undo !OOPS , I made a mistake ! Undo !

OOPS is progressively performing:OOPS is progressively performing:OOPS is progressively performing:OOPS is progressively performing:OOPS is progressively performing:----- If the command line is not emptyIf the command line is not emptyIf the command line is not emptyIf the command line is not emptyIf the command line is not empty, a backspace in the command line., a backspace in the command line., a backspace in the command line., a backspace in the command line., a backspace in the command line.----- If the undo stack is not emptyIf the undo stack is not emptyIf the undo stack is not emptyIf the undo stack is not emptyIf the undo stack is not empty, an undo operation., an undo operation., an undo operation., an undo operation., an undo operation.

Undos are created for programming actions only like storing a cue.You can not do an undo for playback actions like starting an executor.

The undo stack contains the last 10 programming operations, therefore you can go back exactly 10 undos.Nevertheless a command like DELETE SEQU 1 THRU 10 (delete 10 sequences) will create only one undo on the stack.

Working with undos can give you security during your programming, but for performance reasons it can beswitched off ( see SETUP / UNDO menu) .

PAGEPAGEPAGEPAGEPAGE


a)a)a)a)a) As staring keyword, the given page will become the current page.As staring keyword, the given page will become the current page.As staring keyword, the given page will become the current page.As staring keyword, the given page will become the current page.As staring keyword, the given page will become the current page.

PPPPPAGE TAGE TAGE TAGE TAGE T.X ENTER.X ENTER.X ENTER.X ENTER.X ENTER

T Type of page in range [1..3]Type 1 means Dimmer pagesType 2 means Fader executor pagesType 3 means Button executor pages

XXXXX For dimmer pages in range [ 1.. amount dimmers divided by 20 ]For executor pages in range [1..64]

PAGE X ENTERPAGE X ENTERPAGE X ENTERPAGE X ENTERPAGE X ENTER Will select fader and button executor page together



b )b )b )b )b ) As target for the following operational commands:As target for the following operational commands:As target for the following operational commands:As target for the following operational commands:As target for the following operational commands:COPY Copy one page to anotherDELETE Delete a pageMOVE Move a page to a different location

c )c )c )c )c ) As target for all execution commands.As target for all execution commands.As target for all execution commands.As target for all execution commands.As target for all execution commands.The page will redirect the given commands to all its executors.

PAUSEPAUSEPAUSEPAUSEPAUSE


a)a)a)a)a) As starting keywordAs starting keywordAs starting keywordAs starting keywordAs starting keyword, every object that follows after the PAUSE will be paused.

PAUSE (target object list) [ENTER]PAUSE (target object list) [ENTER]PAUSE (target object list) [ENTER]PAUSE (target object list) [ENTER]PAUSE (target object list) [ENTER]

Target typeTarget typeTarget typeTarget typeTarget type Operat ionOperat ionOperat ionOperat ionOperat ionEXEC Pause executor

EFFECT Pause effect

PAGE Does Pause on all its executors.

SPEEDMASTER Does Pause on all programs using this speed master(executor assigned to a speed master)

SUBMASTER �Park� all channels involved in this group.

CHANNEL,FIXTURE and GROUP �Park� all given devices.

PRESET X (Preset Type) �Park� all channels of current selection of that preset type.

�Park� means to freeze the output for a channel with its current value. Parked channels are shown with a brightblue background in the sheets. Although a channel is parked, it can still be used normally for programmingpurposes.


PRESETPRESETPRESETPRESETPRESET



PRESET ENTERPRESET ENTERPRESET ENTERPRESET ENTERPRESET ENTERPRESET becomes the DEFAULT KEYWORD.

PRESET TPRESET TPRESET TPRESET TPRESET T.X ENTER.X ENTER.X ENTER.X ENTER.X ENTERCall Preset X of type T.

X Preset number in range [ 1�999]T Preset type in range [1�9]

b )b )b )b )b ) as target for the following operational commands:as target for the following operational commands:as target for the following operational commands:as target for the following operational commands:as target for the following operational commands:

COPY Copy one preset to another

DELETE Delete a preset

EDIT Start edit / update procedure for preset

IF Deselect devices which are not part of the preset.

IFOUTPUT Search for stage output of preset

LABEL Change name of preset

MOVE/INSERT Move preset to another position



PREVIEWPREVIEWPREVIEWPREVIEWPREVIEW


PREVIEW (object) [ENTER]

Only one object can be previewed at one time.Preview will show the content of the object in the programmer without creating stage output (blind). The originalcontent of the programmer is not destroyed.

Preview will be indicated by all sheets, showing PREVIEW in their titles.

Preview is cancelled by the next command line operation.

PREVIOUSPREVIOUSPREVIOUSPREVIOUSPREVIOUS


a)a)a)a)a) Create a subselection from the current selection:Create a subselection from the current selection:Create a subselection from the current selection:Create a subselection from the current selection:Create a subselection from the current selection:If you have selected more than one fixture and then say PREVIOUS, only the last fixture of the selection stays�really selected�. The others become �a little bit selected�. The next time you say PREVIOUS, only the 2nd lastfixture within the current selection is �really selected� and so on. The ALL command will clear this subselection.

b )b )b )b )b ) Continue EDIT / UPDATE procedure with PREVIOUS object:Continue EDIT / UPDATE procedure with PREVIOUS object:Continue EDIT / UPDATE procedure with PREVIOUS object:Continue EDIT / UPDATE procedure with PREVIOUS object:Continue EDIT / UPDATE procedure with PREVIOUS object:See EDIT.

c )c )c )c )c ) Cursor Left in open dialog windows.Cursor Left in open dialog windows.Cursor Left in open dialog windows.Cursor Left in open dialog windows.Cursor Left in open dialog windows.In all temporary dialog windows and message boxes, you can use the PREVIOUS key to move the input focus inthat window to the left. Together with NEXT and ENTER you can , for example , choose the appropriate answer ina message box.

SELECTSELECTSELECTSELECTSELECT


a)a)a)a)a) As starting keywordAs starting keywordAs starting keywordAs starting keywordAs starting keyword, it is used to select the DEFAULT EXECUTOR.

SELECT hit executorSELECT hit executorSELECT hit executorSELECT hit executorSELECT hit executorSELECT EXEC X ENTERSELECT EXEC X ENTERSELECT EXEC X ENTERSELECT EXEC X ENTERSELECT EXEC X ENTER

The default executor can be identified by its green title in the executor mini displays.The default executor is reacting to the DEF_GO,DEF_GO- and DEF_PAUSE commands and to their physical counterpart,the three big yellow buttons.During programming it can be very convenient to make the executor you are working on the default one. Manycommands assume to work with the default executor if no other executor is given.b )b )b )b )b ) In an assign commandIn an assign commandIn an assign commandIn an assign commandIn an assign command, this function can be put on an executor button (see ASSIGN).

Pushing this button will select the executor of the button as default executor.

SEQUSEQUSEQUSEQUSEQU



SEQU ENTERSEQU becomes the DEFAULT KEYWORD.

SEQU (range list) ENTER

Select devices included in sequences.

Sequence numbers must be in the range of [ 1�999]

SEQU (range list) AT � (see AT)Apply values to devices included in sequences.

b )b )b )b )b ) as target for the following operational commands:as target for the following operational commands:as target for the following operational commands:as target for the following operational commands:as target for the following operational commands:

COPY Copy one sequence to another

DELETE Delete a sequence,also unassignes executors

EDIT Opens edit menu for sequence

IF Deselect devices which are not part of the sequence.



IFOUTPUT Search for stage output of sequence

INVERT Invert selection of sequence

LABEL Change name of sequence

MOVE Move sequence to another position


ON �Knock in� all devices contained in sequence.

OFF �Knock out� all devices contained in sequence.

PAUSE PARK all devices contained in sequence.

GO UNPARK all devices contained in sequence.

STORESTORESTORESTORESTORE


STORE (object list) [ENTER]STORE (object list) [ENTER]STORE (object list) [ENTER]STORE (object list) [ENTER]STORE (object list) [ENTER]

All objects in the object list must be of the same type.If no object is given, a new cue is stored into the default executor.

If the destination of the store command is not empty, you will be asked for confirmation.In case of storing over existing cues, you will furthermore be asked about the desired store mode like merge oroverwrite.

If you start storing by pressing the STIf you start storing by pressing the STIf you start storing by pressing the STIf you start storing by pressing the STIf you start storing by pressing the STORE hard keyORE hard keyORE hard keyORE hard keyORE hard key, a temporary window will appear, a temporary window will appear, a temporary window will appear, a temporary window will appear, a temporary window will appear.....The settings in this window affect the way , the store command is handled.Defaults for these store options can be found in SETUP / DEFAULTS menu.

SWOPSWOPSWOPSWOPSWOP


a)a)a)a)a) As starting keywordAs starting keywordAs starting keywordAs starting keywordAs starting keyword, every executor that follows after SWOP is starting a full flash, doing a BLACKOUT onall other executors ( if they are not protected againts swop).

SWOP (executor list) [ENTER]SWOP (executor list) [ENTER]SWOP (executor list) [ENTER]SWOP (executor list) [ENTER]SWOP (executor list) [ENTER]

b )b )b )b )b ) As starting keywordAs starting keywordAs starting keywordAs starting keywordAs starting keyword combined with UNPRESSUNPRESSUNPRESSUNPRESSUNPRESS, every executor that follows after SWOP is ending its fullflash, bringing up again oll other executors.

SWOP (executor list) UNPRESS [ENTER]

c )c )c )c )c ) In an assign commandIn an assign commandIn an assign commandIn an assign commandIn an assign command, this function can NOTNOTNOTNOTNOT be used. You have to use the Assign menu for putting it onan executor´s button.

Note: It is nearly impossible to use this command by typing it into the command line. Rather use it when it isassigned to a button!

SWOP_OFFSWOP_OFFSWOP_OFFSWOP_OFFSWOP_OFF

ClassificationClassificationClassificationClassificationClassification : executing keywordSame as SWOP � UNPRESS.SWOP � UNPRESS.SWOP � UNPRESS.SWOP � UNPRESS.SWOP � UNPRESS.

Please look at the SWOP SWOP SWOP SWOP SWOP command description.

TEMPTEMPTEMPTEMPTEMP


a)a)a)a)a) As starting keywordAs starting keywordAs starting keywordAs starting keywordAs starting keyword, every executor that follows after TEMP is performing a GO if it wasn´t running..

TEMP (executor list) [ENTER]

b )b )b )b )b ) As starting keywordAs starting keywordAs starting keywordAs starting keywordAs starting keyword combined with UNPRESSUNPRESSUNPRESSUNPRESSUNPRESS, every executor that follows after TEMP is switched OFF.

TEMP (executor list) UNPRESS [ENTER]

c )c )c )c )c ) In an assign commandIn an assign commandIn an assign commandIn an assign commandIn an assign command, this function can be assigned to an executor´s button.

ASSIGN TEMP (executor list) ENTERASSIGN TEMP (executor list) ENTERASSIGN TEMP (executor list) ENTERASSIGN TEMP (executor list) ENTERASSIGN TEMP (executor list) ENTER



Note: It is nearly impossible to use this command by typing it into the command line. Rather use it when it isassigned to a button ! TEMP does not really exist as a function. It is always translated into a pair of GO/OFFcommands. You will see that if you record TEMP in a timecode show.

THRUTHRUTHRUTHRUTHRU


THRUTHRUTHRUTHRUTHRU can only be used within other commands to create ranges.

XXXXX THRU YTHRU YTHRU YTHRU YTHRU Y Range from X to Y

XXXXX THRUTHRUTHRUTHRUTHRU Range from X to the end

THRU YTHRU YTHRU YTHRU YTHRU Y Range from the beginning to Y

THRUTHRUTHRUTHRUTHRU Range from the beginning up to the end.

The meaning of �beginning� and �end� depend on the context likeFIXTURE 10 THRU ENTERFIXTURE 10 THRU ENTERFIXTURE 10 THRU ENTERFIXTURE 10 THRU ENTERFIXTURE 10 THRU ENTER will select all fixtures from 10 upwards.

Thru can of course also be used to create ranges of values like

CHANNEL 1 THRU 10 AT 0 THRU FULL ENTERCHANNEL 1 THRU 10 AT 0 THRU FULL ENTERCHANNEL 1 THRU 10 AT 0 THRU FULL ENTERCHANNEL 1 THRU 10 AT 0 THRU FULL ENTERCHANNEL 1 THRU 10 AT 0 THRU FULL ENTERo ro ro ro ro rCHANNEL 1 THRU 10 AT FULL FADE 1 DELAY 0 THRU 5 ENTERCHANNEL 1 THRU 10 AT FULL FADE 1 DELAY 0 THRU 5 ENTERCHANNEL 1 THRU 10 AT FULL FADE 1 DELAY 0 THRU 5 ENTERCHANNEL 1 THRU 10 AT FULL FADE 1 DELAY 0 THRU 5 ENTERCHANNEL 1 THRU 10 AT FULL FADE 1 DELAY 0 THRU 5 ENTER

TIMECODETIMECODETIMECODETIMECODETIMECODE



TIMECODE ENTERTIMECODE becomes the DEFAULT KEYWORD.

TIMECODE (range list) ENTERDoes nothing.Timercode numbers in the range list must be in the interval [ 1 � 200].

b )b )b )b )b ) as target for the following operational keywords:as target for the following operational keywords:as target for the following operational keywords:as target for the following operational keywords:as target for the following operational keywords:

COPY Copy one timecode show to another

DELETE Delete a timecode show

EDIT Open edit menu for timecode show

INSERT/MOVE Change visible number of timecode show

LABEL Change name of timecode show


GO Start playback

PAUSE Pause playback, keep output

OFF Switch off, release output

>> Jump forward to next breakpoint in show

<< Jump backwards to last breakpoint in show

Please look at the separate timecode manual for details about dealing with timecode.

TOGGLETOGGLETOGGLETOGGLETOGGLE


a)a)a)a)a) As starting keywordAs starting keywordAs starting keywordAs starting keywordAs starting keyword, every executor that follows after TOGGLE is performing a GO if it wasn´t running or anOFF if it was running.

TOGGLE (executor list) [ENTER]TOGGLE (executor list) [ENTER]TOGGLE (executor list) [ENTER]TOGGLE (executor list) [ENTER]TOGGLE (executor list) [ENTER]

b )b )b )b )b ) In an assign commandIn an assign commandIn an assign commandIn an assign commandIn an assign command, this function can be assigned to an executor´s button.

ASSIGN TOGGLE (executor list) ENTERASSIGN TOGGLE (executor list) ENTERASSIGN TOGGLE (executor list) ENTERASSIGN TOGGLE (executor list) ENTERASSIGN TOGGLE (executor list) ENTER



TOPTOPTOPTOPTOP


a)a)a)a)a) As starting keywordAs starting keywordAs starting keywordAs starting keywordAs starting keyword, every executor that follows after TOP is performing a GOTO FIRST STEP.

TOP (executor list) [ENTER]TOP (executor list) [ENTER]TOP (executor list) [ENTER]TOP (executor list) [ENTER]TOP (executor list) [ENTER]

b )b )b )b )b ) In an assign commandIn an assign commandIn an assign commandIn an assign commandIn an assign command, this function can be assigned to an executor´s button.

ASSIGN TOP (executor list) ENTERASSIGN TOP (executor list) ENTERASSIGN TOP (executor list) ENTERASSIGN TOP (executor list) ENTERASSIGN TOP (executor list) ENTER

TOUCH_BTNTOUCH_BTNTOUCH_BTNTOUCH_BTNTOUCH_BTN


A TOUCH_BTN (touch button) is a remote function triggert by incoming 0-10V signals.The TOUCH_BTN simulates an executor keypress, therefore it is working only in combination with an assignedexecutor. TOUCH_BTNs can be seen under TOOLS / REMOTE TOUCH menu.

Calling a TOUCH_BTN manually:TOUCH_BTN X ENTERTOUCH_BTN X ENTERTOUCH_BTN X ENTERTOUCH_BTN X ENTERTOUCH_BTN X ENTER

Linking a TOUCH_BTN to an executor:Linking a TOUCH_BTN to an executor:Linking a TOUCH_BTN to an executor:Linking a TOUCH_BTN to an executor:Linking a TOUCH_BTN to an executor:STSTSTSTSTORE TORE TORE TORE TORE TOUCH_BOUCH_BOUCH_BOUCH_BOUCH_BTN X EXEC/FADEREBUTTTN X EXEC/FADEREBUTTTN X EXEC/FADEREBUTTTN X EXEC/FADEREBUTTTN X EXEC/FADEREBUTTON1/2/3 YON1/2/3 YON1/2/3 YON1/2/3 YON1/2/3 Y.Z ENTER.Z ENTER.Z ENTER.Z ENTER.Z ENTERUsing EXEC in this command will always link the remote to the middle executor button.


UNPRESSUNPRESSUNPRESSUNPRESSUNPRESS


UNPRESS is used only in combination with functions of executor´s buttons that cause an action upon unpress.These functions are FLASH_UP,FLASH_DOWN,SWOP,and TEMP.Please look at these commands for details about UNPRESS.

UPDATEUPDATEUPDATEUPDATEUPDATE


UPDATE does the following things, sorted by priority:

a) If the UPDATE dialog is open, it closes the UPDATE dialog.

b) If the EDIT / UPDATE procedure is active, the edited object is updated, and EDIT / UPDATE procedure is finished.

c) It loads the UPDATE dialog , where you can update changed PRESETS and CUES.

VALUEVALUEVALUEVALUEVALUE


VALUE has no other meaning than switching back to value mode if desk is in a time mode like FADE or DELAY.

VIEWVIEWVIEWVIEWVIEW


a)a)a)a)a) as starting keyword , given views will be called.as starting keyword , given views will be called.as starting keyword , given views will be called.as starting keyword , given views will be called.as starting keyword , given views will be called.

VIEW (range list) ENTER

View numbers in the range list must be in the interval [ 1 � 999].


ASSIGN A view can be assigned to a VIEWBTN

COPY Copy one view to another

DELETE Delete a view

INSERT/MOVE Change visible number of view

STORE Store a view. You will be asked for the screens that should be contained in the view.



Views can store and restore the window arrangement on the screens of your desk.Views can store and restore the window arrangement on the screens of your desk.Views can store and restore the window arrangement on the screens of your desk.Views can store and restore the window arrangement on the screens of your desk.Views can store and restore the window arrangement on the screens of your desk.

- A View can contain one screen or multiple screens.

- Views that contain single screens can be called back also on other screens.

- Views that contain multiple screens will be called back on the original screens.

- Views that contain single screens from external monitors can not be called back on the build in system screens( because of higher resolution).

- Views which are called by the command line ( and not by the push of a VIEWBTN) are called back on the originalscreens.

VIEWBTNVIEWBTNVIEWBTNVIEWBTNVIEWBTN


a)a)a)a)a) as starting keyword, given view buttons will be called.as starting keyword, given view buttons will be called.as starting keyword, given view buttons will be called.as starting keyword, given view buttons will be called.as starting keyword, given view buttons will be called.

VIEWBTN (range list) ENTERVIEWBTN (range list) ENTERVIEWBTN (range list) ENTERVIEWBTN (range list) ENTERVIEWBTN (range list) ENTER

Viewbutton numbers in the range list must be in the interval [ 1..30 ]

Each screen has 6 view buttons. 3 build in and 2 external monitors make a total of 30 view buttons.


ASSIGN Assign a view or a macro to a view button. Syntax is:

ASSIGN VIEW X VIEWBTN Y ENTER

ASSIGN MACRO X VIEWBTN Y ENTER

COPY Copy one view button to another

DELETE Delete (Empty) a view button.

MOVE Move one view button to another

STORE STORE a view and assign it to the view button.


1111100000 Saving and Loading a Show Saving and Loading a Show Saving and Loading a Show Saving and Loading a Show Saving and Loading a ShowBy pressing the BACKUP button, you will open the Backup menu.

Pressing the BACKUP button twice will save the current Show and makes a backup (ààààà below).

The processes of saving and loading shows is being organized in the BACKUP menu. The current SHOW (currentlyloaded Show) can be named and saved on the internal harddisk or additionally on floppy disk.

With the AUTOSAVE button, you can set an automatic save according to the time displayed on the button.

Furthermore, a BACKUP of the Show will be made with each saving operation (max. 10). These backups can be usedto restore previously saved Shows. You can display the backups using the SHOW BACKUP button.

1111100000.1.1.1.1.1 Saving the Current Show on the internal harddiskSaving the Current Show on the internal harddiskSaving the Current Show on the internal harddiskSaving the Current Show on the internal harddiskSaving the Current Show on the internal harddiskProceed with a left mouse click on the title bar (Edit line). Name the show using the keyboard.

Continue with a left mouse click on the SAVE SHOW button. The SAVING ACTSHOW/COPYING ACTSHOW windowwill appear. The SHOW will be saved as soon as this window has automatically closed.

1111100000.2.2.2.2.2 Loading a Show from the internal harddiskLoading a Show from the internal harddiskLoading a Show from the internal harddiskLoading a Show from the internal harddiskLoading a Show from the internal harddiskClick on the desired SHOW in the list (indicated by its red line). In the top line, the name of the Show will appear.Press on the LOAD SHOW button.

The QUESTION window (save the current show first) with the following options will open:YES To save the current Show before loading the new one.NO To load the new Show without saving the current one.CANCEL To abort this process.

The show will be loaded and the console will automatically reboot.

10 Saving and Loading a Show


1111100000.3.3.3.3.3 Loading an Empty ShowLoading an Empty ShowLoading an Empty ShowLoading an Empty ShowLoading an Empty ShowTo create a completely new Show, first click on the top line and enter a name that had not been used for otherShows. Press the LOAD SHOW button. The QUESTION window (save the actual show first) will open.

Pressing the YES button will save the current Show.Pressing the NO button will discard the current Show.

The new show will be loaded and the console will automatically reboot.

Additionally, you can save an �empty� Show to hard disk or floppy so that you can use them later when needed. Thisway, you can also transfer demo shows, standard settings, etc. to others.

1111100000.4.4.4.4.4 Deleting the Current ShowDeleting the Current ShowDeleting the Current ShowDeleting the Current ShowDeleting the Current Show

The currently loaded Show can not be deleted! In order to delete the currently loaded Show, you have to loadanother Show first.

111110.50.50.50.50.5 Deleting a Show from the internal harddiskDeleting a Show from the internal harddiskDeleting a Show from the internal harddiskDeleting a Show from the internal harddiskDeleting a Show from the internal harddiskIn the list, make a left mouse click on the Show to be deleted (indicated by a red line). Press the DELETE SHOWbutton. The QUESTION window (delete the show first from harddisk) with the following options will open:

YES Will delete the selected Show.NO Will abort the process.

The hard disk has a capacity of at least 2,000 Megabytes so that you can save lots of Shows to the grandMA�shard disk.

1111100000.6.6.6.6.6 Saving the Current Show on floppy diskSaving the Current Show on floppy diskSaving the Current Show on floppy diskSaving the Current Show on floppy diskSaving the Current Show on floppy diskAll data necessary for the SHOW are being saved on floppy disk (even all Fixtures to be used in the show and all userswith all settings for this show). Thus, you can transfer the whole show to another grandMA console or put the datato the archives.

Proceed with a left mouse click on title bar. Enter the name of the show via keyboard.

Continue with a left mouse click on the SAVE FLOPPY button. The SAVING ACTSHOW/COPYING ACTSHOW windowwill appear. After just a few seconds, the SAVING COMPRESSED SHOW window will open.

Insert an empty IBM/PC formatted 3,5� disk and remove the write protection (small tongue on the disk must beclosedclosedclosedclosedclosed). Now press the OK button.

The show will be saved after the window has closed. This procedure might take a few minutes.

Remove the disk from the drive afterwards.

1111100000.7.7.7.7.7 Loading a Show from floppy diskLoading a Show from floppy diskLoading a Show from floppy diskLoading a Show from floppy diskLoading a Show from floppy diskPress the LOAD FLOPPY button. The window LOADING COMPRESSED SHOW will open. Insert the disk containing theshow. Now press the OK button (might take a few minutes).

The show will be loaded and the console will automatically reboot.

Remove the disk from the drive afterwards.

TIPTIPTIPTIPTIP Please make sure to frequently save the current show on harddisk during the programming procedure. A back-up onfloppy disk is always reasonable.

10 Saving and Loading a Show


1111111111 Software UpdateSoftware UpdateSoftware UpdateSoftware UpdateSoftware UpdateOpen the SETUP menu with the SETUP button.

10 Software Update

Open the UPDATE menu by pressing the UPDATE SOFTWARE button. If this is not possible (e.g.an update had not been completed correctly), you can open the menu with the F4 key.

Do not update the Do not update the Do not update the Do not update the Do not update the grandMAgrandMAgrandMAgrandMAgrandMA before running a Show! before running a Show! before running a Show! before running a Show! before running a Show!

To update the grandMA software, insert the current UPDATE disk labeled �LAST DISK� and press the respectivebutton.

1: UPDATE DESK PROCESSOR FIRMWARE: Will update the program for the second built-in computer (Motorola).The current version is displayed above the button. Pressing this buttonwill open a menu. There, you can either load the data for this updatefrom floppy disk or the data on the HDD will be displayed and can beupdated by selecting them.

2: UPDATE Grand MA MAIN PROGRAM: Will update the �main program� (PC).UPDATE FIXTURE LIBRARY: Will delete and update the internal MA-FIXTURE library. Self-created

Fixtures will be kept and not be overwritten.ààààà 2.2.2.2.2.111111.3 Updating1.3 Updating1.3 Updating1.3 Updating1.3 Updatingthe Fixtures Librarythe Fixtures Librarythe Fixtures Librarythe Fixtures Librarythe Fixtures Library

Before changing disks, make sure that the green LED on the floppy disk drive is off.Before changing disks, make sure that the green LED on the floppy disk drive is off.Before changing disks, make sure that the green LED on the floppy disk drive is off.Before changing disks, make sure that the green LED on the floppy disk drive is off.Before changing disks, make sure that the green LED on the floppy disk drive is off.The Update procedure can take between 2 and 10 minutes. After updating the main program, it is necessaryto reset the console.

All three UPDATES should be installed in the indicated sequence.

By pressing the buttonBy pressing the buttonBy pressing the buttonBy pressing the buttonBy pressing the button VERSION INFO VERSION INFO VERSION INFO VERSION INFO VERSION INFO youyouyouyouyou can find relevant information about the updatecan find relevant information about the updatecan find relevant information about the updatecan find relevant information about the updatecan find relevant information about the update(after update is completed)!(after update is completed)!(after update is completed)!(after update is completed)!(after update is completed)!

You can only download the update from our HOMEPAGE (www.malighting.de) using an IBM compatible PC. Thenyou have to have to have to have to have to unzip the files with the original WINZiporiginal WINZiporiginal WINZiporiginal WINZiporiginal WINZip program (www.winzip.com); proceed by copying thisdata on a 3.5� disk. The disk must not contain any data!


1212121212 Utility MenuUtility MenuUtility MenuUtility MenuUtility MenuYou will need this menu, if the main program or the actual show is damaged due to a crash or some othererror. For the grandMA light and ultra-light you need an external keyboard.

In the Utility Menu, you can load or delete an old grandMA operating system. You can also delete shows here. You candelete the current show (this show is automatically loaded upon power-up of the console). You can renew the Firm-ware for the second built-in Computer (Motorola) and you can also renew the grandMA operating system via disk.

During the Boot-up process you will see all loaded program segments (blue background) on the right TFT display. Inorder to access the Utility Menu you have to push any button as soon as the message:??? TO ENTER UTILITY MENU PRESS ANY KEY ?????? TO ENTER UTILITY MENU PRESS ANY KEY ?????? TO ENTER UTILITY MENU PRESS ANY KEY ?????? TO ENTER UTILITY MENU PRESS ANY KEY ?????? TO ENTER UTILITY MENU PRESS ANY KEY ??? is displayed with red background during the boot-up process.The menu will open after approx. 10-20 seconds.

Press 1: Restore grandMA operating system If you press the �1� button on the keyboard, you will see a list with allsystems existing on the harddisk. By pressing one of the displayed buttons(a, b, c...) the respective system will be installed. You have to confirminstallation by pressing �o�. As soon as the installation is completed, thedisplay will show UPDATE DONE next to STATUS. You can start the consoleby pressing the �ESC� button two times.

Press 2: Delete grandMA operating system Upon every update, a safety copy of the system will be automaticallycreated on harddisk. In order to delete an older system from harddisk,press �2� on the keyboard. You will see a list with all systems existing onthe harddisk. By pressing one of the displayed buttons (a, b, c...) therespective system will be deleted. You have to confirm the delete processby pressing �o�. After deletion is completed, the display will show DELETEDONE next to STATUS. You can start the console by pressing the �ESC�button two times.

Press 3: Delete grandMA shows Upon every update, a new folder for the shows will automatically becreated on the harddisk. During every update, the console will save allold shows, converted to suite the new system software, in the youngestfolder. From the time of the update, all new created shows will beautomatically saved in this folder, too.In order to delete shows from an older system version from the harddisk,press �3� on the keyboard. You will see a list with all shows in all systemversions existing on this harddisk. By pressing one of the displayed buttons(a, b, c...) the respective shows will be deleted. You have to confirm thedelete process by pressing �o�. After deletion is completed, the displaywill show DELETE DONE next to STATUS. You can start the console bypressing the �ESC� button two times.

Press 4: Delete current show If you press �4� on the keyboard, the current show (this show will beautomatically loaded upon power-up of the console) will be deleted. Youhave to confirm the delete process by pressing �o�. After the deletion iscompleted, the display will show DELETE DONE next to STATUS. You canstart the console by pressing the �ESC� button two times.

Press 5: Update firmware with display If you press �5� on the keyboard, you can renew the Firmware for thesecond built-in Computer (Motorola). In order to update the software:insert the current update disk labeled �LAST DISK�. You have to confirmthe update process by pressing �o�. As soon as the update is completed,the display will show UPDATE DONE next to STATUS. You can start theconsole by pressing the �ESC� button two times.

Press 6: Update grandMA In order to update the software: insert the current update disk labeled�LAST DISK�. You have to confirm the update process by pressing �o�.Shortly after, you will be asked for �DISK 1�. Now insert this disk andconfirm by pressing �o�. The disk will be read (might take a little while).Following that, you will be asked for �DISK 2�. Insert disk 2 and confirmagain with �o� (this will take a little longer now). As soon as the updateprocess is completed, the display shows UPDATE DONE, PLEASE REBOOTnext to STATUS. Now please reboot the console by using the combinationCTRL-ALT-DEL or the RESET button on the backside of the console.


1

2

3

4

5 6

78

9

10

11

1213

14

13 Layout and Controls 13 Layout and Controls 13 Layout and Controls 13 Layout and Controls 13 Layout and Controls grandMA grandMA grandMA grandMA grandMA replay unitreplay unitreplay unitreplay unitreplay unit

13.1 Introduction13.1 Introduction13.1 Introduction13.1 Introduction13.1 IntroductionThe grandMA Replay Unit is a small rack mount controller unit that performs nearly all of the functions of the Awardwinning grandMA console. At 19� x 17� x 5�, it only requires a very small space, while offering 100% compatibilityto the bigger consoles.

The grandMA Replay Unit is designed to perform as a stand-alone show controller on exhibitions, in theme parks orother venues. In conjunction with one of the grandMA consoles, it also becomes a most powerful backup systemwhich can run a complete show in full tracking despite its reduced hardware.

11111 Floppy ButtonFloppy ButtonFloppy ButtonFloppy ButtonFloppy ButtonFast loading of a show from floppy disk. This button complies with the following steps on the grandMA: �Backup-Load Floppy�. If monitor and mouse are connected, you can follow the instructions in chapter ààààà 111110.6 0.6 0.6 0.6 0.6 Saving orloading a SHOW. Without these, you would go ahead as follows: Confirm, if you wish to save the actual show on theinternal harddisk in advance by pressing the page buttons / button no. 1 to 3.Button no. 1: Save actual show on harddisk before loading show from floppy.Button no. 2: Do not save on harddisk before loading show from floppy.Button no. 3: Cancels the actual load task.Without a floppy disk inserted, you will get an error message on the display. Confirm with button no. 1.This procedure is also valid for many other �Pop Up menus� of the grandMA.

22222 Floppy DriveFloppy DriveFloppy DriveFloppy DriveFloppy DriveThe floppy drive will take all 3.5� 1.44MB HD disks and will serve to save shows or single fixtures from the library.

33333 Off ButtonOff ButtonOff ButtonOff ButtonOff ButtonThe �Off Button� has the same function as the �Off Button� of the grandMA. Together with the Executor Buttons orthe appearing menu on the monitor, you can switch off active executors. You can switch off the executor bysimultaneously pressing the �Off Button� and the respective �Executor Button�. ààààà 5.6 OFF menu

44444 Executor FaderExecutor FaderExecutor FaderExecutor FaderExecutor FaderThere are 5 Executor Faders available. These five faders correspond to the faders no. 1 to 5 on the grandMA. Fadersno. 6 to 20 (Faders 6 to 10 on the grandMA light) are not available. This becomes especially important whenprogramming the show on the grandMA and �running� the show afterwards with the Replay Unit. These faders arenot motorized, so that the actual values have to be �grabbed� after switching pages. If the faders are not located atthe actual value, the respective LEDs within the buttons will flash, until the value has been reached by moving thefader. Channel faders are not available.

55555 Executor Fader ButtonExecutor Fader ButtonExecutor Fader ButtonExecutor Fader ButtonExecutor Fader ButtonThree Executor Buttons are available for each Executor Fader (as on the grandMA). These 15 Executor Fader Buttonscorrespond with the Fader Buttons no. 1 to 5 on the grandMA. Fader Button no. 6 to 20 (Fader Button no. 6 to 10 onthe grandMA light) are not available. This becomes especially important when programming the show on thegrandMA and �running� the show afterwards with the Replay Unit.

66666 Mode ButtonMode ButtonMode ButtonMode ButtonMode ButtonHas no function yet. This button is being held for possible special functions to be activated later on.

77777 Reset ButtonReset ButtonReset ButtonReset ButtonReset ButtonThis button stands for a �hard� reset. This button shall only be used in the non-probable case of a computer freeze.The same button is located once again on the rear panel. ààààà 1.8.1 Basics1.8.1 Basics1.8.1 Basics1.8.1 Basics1.8.1 Basics

13 Layout and Controls grandMA replay unit


88888 Executor ButtonsExecutor ButtonsExecutor ButtonsExecutor ButtonsExecutor ButtonsThere are 5 Executor Buttons (no. 6 to 10) available (as on the grandMA). These buttons correspond with theExecutor Buttons no. 21 to 25 on the grandMA. Buttons no. 26 to 40 (no. 16 to 20 on the grandMA light) are notavailable. This becomes especially important when programming the show on the grandMA and �running� the showafterwards on the Replay Unit.

99999 Executor Fader PExecutor Fader PExecutor Fader PExecutor Fader PExecutor Fader Page Up / Button no. 1age Up / Button no. 1age Up / Button no. 1age Up / Button no. 1age Up / Button no. 1This button has 2 functions.Switching pages for the Executor Faders (Page up)Confirm button no. 1 (the respective command appears as running text on the display)

1010101010 Executor Fader PExecutor Fader PExecutor Fader PExecutor Fader PExecutor Fader Page Down / Button no. 2age Down / Button no. 2age Down / Button no. 2age Down / Button no. 2age Down / Button no. 2This button has 2 functions.Switching pages for the Executor Faders (Page down)Confirm button no. 2 (the respective command appears as running text on the display)

1111111111 Executor Button PExecutor Button PExecutor Button PExecutor Button PExecutor Button Page Up / Button no. 3age Up / Button no. 3age Up / Button no. 3age Up / Button no. 3age Up / Button no. 3This button has 2 functions.Switching pages for the Executor Buttons (Page up)Confirm button no. 3 (the respective command appears as running text on the display)

1212121212 Executor Button PExecutor Button PExecutor Button PExecutor Button PExecutor Button Page Down / Button no. 4age Down / Button no. 4age Down / Button no. 4age Down / Button no. 4age Down / Button no. 4This button has 2 functions.Switching pages for the Executor Buttons (Page down)Confirm button no. 4 (the respective command appears as running text on the display)

1313131313 DisplayDisplayDisplayDisplayDisplayPop-up messages will appear on the display of the TFT monitor, which have to be confirmed (as on the grandMA).NOTE: If these messages are not being respectively confirmed, you might not be able to continue in the process. Ifmonitor and mouse are being connected, you can also confirm the messages with these tools.

1414141414 PPPPPower Supplyower Supplyower Supplyower Supplyower Supplyààààà 1.5.5 Battery1.5.5 Battery1.5.5 Battery1.5.5 Battery1.5.5 Battery



13.2 General Instructions13.2 General Instructions13.2 General Instructions13.2 General Instructions13.2 General Instructions

13.2.113.2.113.2.113.2.113.2.1 Differences between Replay Unit and the Differences between Replay Unit and the Differences between Replay Unit and the Differences between Replay Unit and the Differences between Replay Unit and the grandMAgrandMAgrandMAgrandMAgrandMA or or or or or grandMAgrandMAgrandMAgrandMAgrandMA light light light light lightThe Software is identical for all units. But only 1 external monitor can be connected. The UPS Function as wellas the 2048/4096 channels are being fully supported as on the grandMA or grandMA light.

Connectors for external keyboard, mouse and monitor are located on the back of the unit (these are not includedin the delivery volume).

Encoder, Trackerball, Wheel, more than 5 Executor Faders and 5 Executor Buttons as well as quite a few otherbuttons on the grandMA and grandMA light are not available with this unit. Nevertheless most of the functions(except for the executors) can be reached and activated via mouse.

13.2.213.2.213.2.213.2.213.2.2 Working with Mouse, Keyboard and MonitorWorking with Mouse, Keyboard and MonitorWorking with Mouse, Keyboard and MonitorWorking with Mouse, Keyboard and MonitorWorking with Mouse, Keyboard and MonitorWith these tools almost all functions of the grandMA can be operated on this unit also. The 3 buttons of themouse will take on the functions of the buttons on the console. All needed buttons (such as CUE, COPY, NEXT,a.s.o.) have to be set as �Quikeys� in advance (ààààà 8.2 8.2 8.2 8.2 8.2 Assigning and Activating QUIKEYS), so that they can beoperated via the mouse. Values within the fixture or channel sheets can be modified with the middle mousebutton. A Command Field will appear on the monitor when clicking on those fields above the (non-existing)encoders. You can operate this Command Field with the mouse also.

13.2.313.2.313.2.313.2.313.2.3 Working in Stand Alone Mode (Playback)Working in Stand Alone Mode (Playback)Working in Stand Alone Mode (Playback)Working in Stand Alone Mode (Playback)Working in Stand Alone Mode (Playback)This means working with the Replay Unit without the use of external mouse, keyboard and monitor. In this modeyou can only activate Playback via the existing elements on the front of the unit. Please note, that you will onlyhave 5 Executor Faders and 5 Executor Buttons available. These Executors correspond with the first 5 Executorson the grandMA and grandMA light. There is no access to any of the other Executors. This becomes especiallyimportant when programming the show on the grandMA but �running� the show afterwards with the ReplayUnit.

13.2.413.2.413.2.413.2.413.2.4 Working in True Tracking Backup ModeWorking in True Tracking Backup ModeWorking in True Tracking Backup ModeWorking in True Tracking Backup ModeWorking in True Tracking Backup ModeThe Replay Unit can be run as �Slave� or as �Master� in the so-called �True Tracking Backup Mode�. ààààà 1414141414 TrueTracking Backup and Playback on grandMA consoles. In this mode, the �Slave� can not be accessed directly; thisis being achieved via the �Master�.

13.2.513.2.513.2.513.2.513.2.5 Working in True Tracking Backup Mode with the �Offline Editor� as Ma-Working in True Tracking Backup Mode with the �Offline Editor� as Ma-Working in True Tracking Backup Mode with the �Offline Editor� as Ma-Working in True Tracking Backup Mode with the �Offline Editor� as Ma-Working in True Tracking Backup Mode with the �Offline Editor� as Ma-sterstersterstersterThe Offline Editor can be operated as Master together with the Replay Unit (Slave) in Full Tracking Backup Mode.This offers special advantages as the Offline Editor can for example show more monitors of the grandMA ààààà 1414141414True Tracking Backup and Playback on grandMA consoles. In this mode, the Slave can not be accessed directly;this is being done via the Master (Offline Editor).




13.3 Specification and Technical Data13.3 Specification and Technical Data13.3 Specification and Technical Data13.3 Specification and Technical Data13.3 Specification and Technical Data

13.3.113.3.113.3.113.3.113.3.1 Integrated Harddisk and DiskdriveIntegrated Harddisk and DiskdriveIntegrated Harddisk and DiskdriveIntegrated Harddisk and DiskdriveIntegrated Harddisk and DiskdriveThe harddisk does not only save a backup for the operating system, but leaves enough space for countlesslightshows with hundreds of cue lists. Programmes can also be saved on disk for archive purposes or transfer ofshows to other consoles. It also enables a fast updating of the software, which can be downloaded from the MAHomepage (www.malighting.de) on the internet.

13.3.213.3.213.3.213.3.213.3.2 Ethernet and other OptionsEthernet and other OptionsEthernet and other OptionsEthernet and other OptionsEthernet and other OptionsIn addition to the 4 DMX output ports the hardware of the grandMA replay unit is designed to transmit biggernumbers of channels via Ethernet. ESTA is currently working on a standard protocol for this form of transmission,which will guarantee a compatibility between units of different manufacturers, similar to the DMX norm. Inaddition to DMX input, Sound, SMPTE timecode, it offers a printer port and a RS232 interface for fastercommunication with any kinds of peripheral units.

13.3.313.3.313.3.313.3.313.3.3 System Maintenance and Software UpdatesSystem Maintenance and Software UpdatesSystem Maintenance and Software UpdatesSystem Maintenance and Software UpdatesSystem Maintenance and Software UpdatesThe software of the grandMA family is in a process of constant expansion and improvement. Due to the controlvia menus and display softkeys it is possible to realise the feedback of our customers and technical advances inour software updates. The hardware is only the basis and offers sufficient capacity to guarantee that its ownerwill always participate in the fascinating technical developments.

13.3.413.3.413.3.413.3.413.3.4 PPPPPeripheralseripheralseripheralseripheralseripheralsIn order not to unnecessarily reduce the speed of the grandMA electronics, we left out the graphic showsimulation on the display on purpose; this effect can be easily realised with all currently available peripherals.Other peripheral units, such as a wireless remote control, are still in the development process.

13.3.5 Capacity:13.3.5 Capacity:13.3.5 Capacity:13.3.5 Capacity:13.3.5 Capacity:� grandMA replay unit controls 2048 channels, 4096 channels as option via ethernet (dimmers and attributes

of 8 or 16 bit) with softpatch to 4096 DMX addresses.� A freely configurable monitor offers flexible operation and precise adaptation to any individual working

mode.� Playback works on the basis of dipless crossfade either in Tracking or Non-Tracking mode.� The internal harddisk stands for virtually unlimited storage capacity of presets, memories, cues and effects.



13.3.6 Front P13.3.6 Front P13.3.6 Front P13.3.6 Front P13.3.6 Front Panel Layoutanel Layoutanel Layoutanel Layoutanel Layout� 5 Faders as Executor-, Effect or Group-Faders, each with 3 directly assigned buttons.� 5 Executor Buttons for direct retrieval of Sequences, Chases and other functions.

13.3.7 Setup Menu and Start Configuration13.3.7 Setup Menu and Start Configuration13.3.7 Setup Menu and Start Configuration13.3.7 Setup Menu and Start Configuration13.3.7 Setup Menu and Start Configuration� Basic configuration available on harddisk.� Lamptype library with more than 280 multifunctional fixtures.� All fixtures and channels can be named individually.� Free Softpatch with MIN, MAX and INVERT to four DMX lines.� Definition of new lamptypes on screen.

13.3.8 Display of output and data entry13.3.8 Display of output and data entry13.3.8 Display of output and data entry13.3.8 Display of output and data entry13.3.8 Display of output and data entry� Numeric dimmer channel listing.� Channel fader symbols.� Fixture parameter spreadsheets for status report on moving lights and dimmers.� Different additional options available.

13.3.9 Selection and Data Input13.3.9 Selection and Data Input13.3.9 Selection and Data Input13.3.9 Selection and Data Input13.3.9 Selection and Data Input� Selection via Group Buttons with Mouse.- Hold and Move Mode with middle mouse button.� Align option for proportional change of any group of values.� Preset softkeys for the scan features.� Buttons can be freely moved within the window.� Presets grouped together for 10 different functions.� Buttons of different preset groups with different colours.� Free assignment of channels to be controlled in which preset.- Direct access even during Playback.

13.3.113.3.113.3.113.3.113.3.10 Automatic effect generator0 Automatic effect generator0 Automatic effect generator0 Automatic effect generator0 Automatic effect generator� A number of complex effects applicable to any channel.� Library of all different movements.

13.3.113.3.113.3.113.3.113.3.11 Store Options1 Store Options1 Store Options1 Store Options1 Store Options� Single cues, chase effects, sequences or effects.� Selective programming for LTP and tracking mode.� Basic fade times for fading channels and basic delay for switching parameters.� Optional individual fade and delay for every single channel.� Overwrite, Merge, Insert and Add-on option.- Cue Lists in Tracking or Non-Tracking Mode.� Optionally insert in Cue Only Mode.

13.3.12 Playback Options13.3.12 Playback Options13.3.12 Playback Options13.3.12 Playback Options13.3.12 Playback Options� Free assignment between Program Pool and Playback faders or Playback buttons.� Playback via fader or GO-button with stored timings.� Chaser effects with Auto Run, Audio or manual X-Fade.� Auto Loop / Single / Reverse / Bounce / Random.� Sequence with individual timings per step.� Go button mode / Auto Timed / Sound.� Steps can include loops with counter or timer.

13.3.13 Executor Faders and Buttons13.3.13 Executor Faders and Buttons13.3.13 Executor Faders and Buttons13.3.13 Executor Faders and Buttons13.3.13 Executor Faders and Buttons� Executor faders and buttons with multiple assignment options.� Working mode of faders and buttons can be freely assigned.- Optionally assignment of several executors for one single cue list.� A block of special function buttons can be applied to any executor.

13.3.14 Fader working modes13.3.14 Fader working modes13.3.14 Fader working modes13.3.14 Fader working modes13.3.14 Fader working modes� Brightness Master in HTP or LTP Mode.� Manual X-Fade.� Speed, Fade Time, Rate for chaser and sequences.

13.3.15 Button working modes13.3.15 Button working modes13.3.15 Button working modes13.3.15 Button working modes13.3.15 Button working modes� ON/OFF, GO+, GO-, Pause, Flash up and Flash down.� Fast GO and GO- (<<< and >>>) without fades.



13.3.16 Output Listings and Cuelist Protocols13.3.16 Output Listings and Cuelist Protocols13.3.16 Output Listings and Cuelist Protocols13.3.16 Output Listings and Cuelist Protocols13.3.16 Output Listings and Cuelist Protocols� Infading or outfading values of main sequence is marked in different colours in the channel list.� Lists of sequences including names of steps and times.- Parameter modifications directly in the spreadsheet.

13.3.17 Overwriting a program sequence13.3.17 Overwriting a program sequence13.3.17 Overwriting a program sequence13.3.17 Overwriting a program sequence13.3.17 Overwriting a program sequence� Constant access to all effects and channels.� CLEAR and RELEASE functions.� UPDATE function for fast correction of programs.� EDIT function for direct modification of playback parameters.

13.3.18 Adjustment of Hardware13.3.18 Adjustment of Hardware13.3.18 Adjustment of Hardware13.3.18 Adjustment of Hardware13.3.18 Adjustment of Hardware� Software Equalizer for Audio Input.� Preselection of certain settings (Defaults).� Free grouping of functions for selective programming.- Preselection of save mode, times and the standard operation of playback functions.

13.3.19 Connectivity13.3.19 Connectivity13.3.19 Connectivity13.3.19 Connectivity13.3.19 Connectivity� 4 DMX 512/1990 Output Lines via 5-pin XLR Sockets.� DMX Input with 5-pin XLR Socket and DMX Thru.� Audio Input Line for Mono Audio Signals >20 mV with 6,3mm socket.� SMPTE Timecode Entry for LTC Timecode >200 mV with 6,3mm socket.� MIDI Interface with IN/OUT/THRU.� External control input for direct voltage signals via 25-pin SUB D socket.� 2 SVGA Output Lines for one colour monitor and a service monitor via 15-pin sockets.� Parallel printer port Centronic via 25-pin SUB-D socket.� Ethernet Interface for networking (Backup), DMX-transmission and Remote Control with RJ45-socket (10Base-

T) according IEEE 802.4.� 2 serial interfaces RS-232C for future extensions (9-pin SUB-D sockets).� Connections for external Keyboard (Mini-D, PS2-Type) and Mouse (Mini-D, PS2-Type).� Power Supply via IEC/CEE 22 Inlet Mains Supply Plug (90 � 230V autoselecting).

13.3.20 Operating system13.3.20 Operating system13.3.20 Operating system13.3.20 Operating system13.3.20 Operating system� Operating system for industrial applications named VXWORKS (no DOS, no WINDOWS).� Fast cold boot time (less than 60 sec).� Software update via download from Internet.� Off-Line Editor available.

13.3.213.3.213.3.213.3.213.3.21 Hardware1 Hardware1 Hardware1 Hardware1 Hardware� Pentium Processor with min. 266 MHz Processor Speed and 64 MByte RAM.� 12 MByte non-volatile Flash Disk for Operating System, System Software and Installation Data.� Built-in Hard Disk for Show Data, Library, etc..� Integrated 3.5" Floppy Drive for easy software updating and external storage of Show Data.� Reset Buttons on front and rear housing.� Built-in UPS (Un-interruptable Power Supply) to withstand main power failures up to 10 minutes.� Professional protection against electromagnetic interference in compliance with all relevant European EMC

regulations.

13.3.22 Weight and Dimensions13.3.22 Weight and Dimensions13.3.22 Weight and Dimensions13.3.22 Weight and Dimensions13.3.22 Weight and Dimensions- Robust Steel Housing (485 x 430 x 130 mm).- Weight: 11 kg


14 True Tracking Backup and Playback on grandMA consoles

14 True Tracking Backup and Playback on 14 True Tracking Backup and Playback on 14 True Tracking Backup and Playback on 14 True Tracking Backup and Playback on 14 True Tracking Backup and Playback on grandMAgrandMAgrandMAgrandMAgrandMA consoles consoles consoles consoles consoles

14.114.114.114.114.1 Why using a backup system?Why using a backup system?Why using a backup system?Why using a backup system?Why using a backup system?Anytime the grandMA or another member of the grandMA family is running a show it already provides amaximum level of stability in operation based on its unique hardware concept and the built-in UPS powersupply. For applications like big theatre shows, live broadcasting or larger touring events even more security isrequired.

On other systems this is very often achieved by a second console loaded with the same show. This second desk(�backup system�) is then manually tracked to take over control whenever the main system fails. Sometimesboth consoles may be linked together via MIDI, MIDI Show Control or any other serial signal to perform a�playback tracking� which keeps both systems on the same cue. In a backup situation only the DMX-outletsneed to be cross-switched.

The grandMA now offers a complete new concept of show backup for moving light controllers.

14.214.214.214.214.2 grandMA with show backupgrandMA with show backupgrandMA with show backupgrandMA with show backupgrandMA with show backupAs the DMX signal distribution via EtherNet has recently been implemented to all grandMA systems the latestsoftware release brings full backup capability via EtherNet.

14.2.114.2.114.2.114.2.114.2.1 Backup capabilities via EtherNetBackup capabilities via EtherNetBackup capabilities via EtherNetBackup capabilities via EtherNetBackup capabilities via EtherNetThe Backup may be used to combine either any of the two grandMA consoles or a grandMA Replay Unit to amaster/slave configuration. The slave console (or replay unit) tracks all operations of the master console (orreplay unit) and may take over control at any time when the master does not respond any more or when theconnection is broken manually.

14.2.214.2.214.2.214.2.214.2.2 Synchronising show filesSynchronising show filesSynchronising show filesSynchronising show filesSynchronising show filesWhen a master/slave connection is established first time the slave (backup system) reloads all show data fromthe master�s harddrive and stores them onto its own internal drive. When for whatever reason the master fails,the slave keeps a copy of the latest show file itself. So there is no need to reload showfiles manually or via floppydisks. If the slave already is holding a showfile of the same name it saves this file as backup file before storingthe show received from the master.

14.2.314.2.314.2.314.2.314.2.3 Tracking the console statusTracking the console statusTracking the console statusTracking the console statusTracking the console statusOnce the grandMA tracking backup is up and running all operations on the master are tracked to the slave forparallel execution. During a valid connection (as long as the synchronisation with the master is established) theslave console follows the master but can not be controlled locally. So all key presses, fader movements andscreen touches on the slave are ignored. Vice versa the slave only executes commands from the master as longthe master (=main system) is up and running. In case of a master being disconnected, crashed by faultyhardware or stuck in a unreported software problem the slave will not get into this invalid condition, too.

Taking all these feature together grandMA performs a real �True Tracking Backup� without any compromise andwith maximum security during all shows.

14.2.414.2.414.2.414.2.414.2.4 When using the True Tracking Backup live?When using the True Tracking Backup live?When using the True Tracking Backup live?When using the True Tracking Backup live?When using the True Tracking Backup live?The grandMA True Tracking Backup system is mainly designed to protect any kind of live coverage and criticalshow conditions. Plotting shows and lighting rehearsals are still better protected by saving show files more often(do this by an enabled �Autosave� or a double-click on the BACKUP key).

One big advantage of a synchronisation via EtherNet is the possible combination with DMX-EtherNet distribution(using the currently installed ArtNet protocol). Both grandMA master and slave console can be connected on thesame network together with an Artistic Licence DMX-Node so there will be no need to change over the DMX-signals from main to backup system in case of an emergency.

As long as a master/slave connection is established within a network only the grandMA master actively transmitsDMX-data via the ArtNet protocol, the slave ignores the ArtNet settings. Once a slave is set to solo mode it willimmediately enable the ArtNet protocol and start transmitting DMX-data.All internal DMX-ports on the consoles are activated at any time.



14.314.314.314.314.3 Setting up a True Tracking Backup systemSetting up a True Tracking Backup systemSetting up a True Tracking Backup systemSetting up a True Tracking Backup systemSetting up a True Tracking Backup systemFor any kind of True Tracking Backup configuration within the grandMA family there is no need to join consolesof the same type or DMX channel count together. The grandMA software is most flexible and will �correct�possible difference in the actual hardware for you.

14.3.114.3.114.3.114.3.114.3.1 Connecting consoles of different typesConnecting consoles of different typesConnecting consoles of different typesConnecting consoles of different typesConnecting consoles of different typesThe master console always demands the slave(s) to behave like the master hardware. This means a �big�grandMA master forces a grandMA light slave to be a �big� grandMA temporarily as well which results inphantom executor faders and buttons as the grandMA light (or grandMA replay unit) only has a reducedhardware. Switching executor pages will then renumber the executors as given by the first executor on themaster console.

When the connection is either manually or automatically (by a user-definable timeout) broken the slaveconsole can be switched to solo mode with maintaining the setup and configuration of the �lost� master. Forexample, a grandMA master connected to a grandMA light slave will force the �light� to operate like a grandMA,even when the connection is lost and the grandMA light is forced to solo mode.

The table shows what master/slave connections are possible and how many and which executor faders andbuttons are available on the slave during Tracking Backup and in solo mode afterwards.

Please note that the slave�s assignment of executor faders and buttons restores to the hardware default after theconsole is once re-booted.

14.3.214.3.214.3.214.3.214.3.2 Connecting consoles with different DMX channel countConnecting consoles with different DMX channel countConnecting consoles with different DMX channel countConnecting consoles with different DMX channel countConnecting consoles with different DMX channel countIn a True Tracking Backup system the DMX channel count of the master console demands a temporary updateor downgrade of the connected grandMA slave automatically. If a 4096 channel master is connected to a 2048channel slave the grandMA slave will take over the 4096 channels and process them in all conditions evenwhen the back connection is broken nevertheless what original channel count is installed.

Rebooting the slave will restore the installed channel count immediately. In a True Tracking Backup situationwhere the master is defective this may cause a loss of show data as only DMX channels 1 to 2048 are processedon �smaller� 2048 channel systems. Therefore please make sure that the channel upgrade is being implementedon the slave.

14.3.314.3.314.3.314.3.314.3.3 Using a PC as master consoleUsing a PC as master consoleUsing a PC as master consoleUsing a PC as master consoleUsing a PC as master consoleThough the grandMA Offline Editor software cannot be used to actively control DMX-channels as the ArtNetprotocol is permanently disabled it still can be used in a master/slave connection with �real� grandMA consoles.

Because of the limitations of the PC hardware in combination with Windows® operation systems the grandMAOffline Editor must be seen as �weakest� part of the EtherNet chain therefore it may only be operated as masterconsole.

You may use this setup with a PC as master to easily transfer show file data to other grandMA consoles(whatever type they are), especially when they are used on a distributed network.


14.414.414.414.414.4 Connecting consoles for a True Tracking Backup systemConnecting consoles for a True Tracking Backup systemConnecting consoles for a True Tracking Backup systemConnecting consoles for a True Tracking Backup systemConnecting consoles for a True Tracking Backup systemAny True Tracking Backup configuration with grandMA components may only be connected via a EtherNetcommunications network. The grandMA consoles currently support two different hardware types of transmissionmedia.

14.4.114.4.114.4.114.4.114.4.1 111110 Base-2 EtherNet0 Base-2 EtherNet0 Base-2 EtherNet0 Base-2 EtherNet0 Base-2 EtherNetEtherNet with 10 Base-2 connection media (also known as �Cheapnet�) has lost its importance in todaysnetworking technology. Nevertheless as 10 Base-2 systems are very easy to configure and they do not requireadditional networking nodes or hubs they might be used to easily link two or more grandMA consoles. As thebuilt-in EtherNet card of the grandMA console autosenses the used connection media there is no need toconfigure the console�s hardware at any time.

The connection cable used for 10 Base-2 EtherNet is a 75 ohm coaxial cable (RG-58U) with male BNC connectorson both ends. The maximum cable run is up to 180 metres from end-to-end.

BNC cable to be used for 10 Base-2BNC cable to be used for 10 Base-2BNC cable to be used for 10 Base-2BNC cable to be used for 10 Base-2BNC cable to be used for 10 Base-2

All connections to any kind of networking units (like consoles, PCs or Hubs) require the use of a �T�-connector�,which has to be connected to the BNC output of the console. Extension cords are not permitted.

�T�-connector to be used with10 Base-2 network nodes

Any connection cable used for 10 Base-2 EtherNet has to be terminated on both ends with 75 ohm resistors. Ifthese resistors are disconnected or of the wrong value no network operation will be possible.

Line termination on 10 Base-2 network

10 Base-2 EtherNet can be used for grandMA master/slave connections when no ArtNet DMX-Nodes or otherdistribution equipment is planned to be used. For longer cable runs or distributed networks 10 Base-2 EtherNetis not recommended any more.

Two grandMA consoles connected on a 10 Base-2 network



14.4.214.4.214.4.214.4.214.4.2 111110 Base-T EtherNet0 Base-T EtherNet0 Base-T EtherNet0 Base-T EtherNet0 Base-T EtherNetThe most common EtherNet connection is the �twisted pair� link using 10 Base-T EtherNet. Hereby a peer-to-peer connection is established by minimum 4-wire cable connection at a maximum length of 100 metres. Thecable is always equipped with 8-pole RJ-45 crimp-connectors.

�Twisted pair� cable to be used for 10 Base-T with RJ-45 connectors

Pin numbers on RJ-45 connector and 10 Base-T standard signal assignment

As 10 Base-T EtherNet always requires an EtherNet hub to distribute the signal (connections from console toconsole go via a hub) a useful application will be any network where more than two consoles or consoles withadditional equipment (such as ArtNet DMX-Nodes) are proposed.

For a simple peer-to-peer connection between two consoles only a �crossed� 4-wire cable may be used.

�Crossed� cable to be used for 10 Base-T peer-to-peer connections



Using a �crossed� 10 Base-T cable will allow a direct console-to-console connection but no additional componentscan be added to this connection type later on.

10 Base-T �crossed� cable

grandMA Master/slave configuration with 10 Base-T �crossed� cable

The console(s) can only work on one transceiver type at a time - when the 10 Base-2 port is in use anythingconnected to the 10 Base-T outlet is ignored and vice versa. If you want to connect more consoles at one time orthe use of a ArtNet DMX-Node is required a 10 Base-T EtherNet-hub must be installed.Also for security reason on longer cable runs or branched wiring a 10 Base-T hub is strongly recommended (like aDMX-booster on larger DMX-networks).

The following example shows a network configuration with two identical consoles and an ArtNet DMX-Node forDMX changeover and distribution. All components are star-wired from a central EtherNet hub using standard 10Base-T cabling.

grandMA Master/slave configuration with 10 Base-T Hub and ArtNet DMX-Node



33333

11111

22222

14.514.514.514.514.5 Console configuration for Console configuration for Console configuration for Console configuration for Console configuration for True Tracking Backup or PlaybackTrue Tracking Backup or PlaybackTrue Tracking Backup or PlaybackTrue Tracking Backup or PlaybackTrue Tracking Backup or PlaybackAll the necessary configuration for the set-up of a master/slave connection is part of the grandMA operationalsoftware and can be done from the console�s surface. No change or adjustment to the hardware is required onany of our consoles.

Please note for True Tracking Backup:Please note for True Tracking Backup:Please note for True Tracking Backup:Please note for True Tracking Backup:Please note for True Tracking Backup: If you have not yet loaded your final show file, now is the timeto do so from the BACKUP menu. It is only required to load the show on the master console, the slave�s show datais reloaded anyway. If your slave console holds show data which has not been saved to the harddrive yet, pleasedo so now.

14.5.114.5.114.5.114.5.114.5.1 Setting the console�s operation modeSetting the console�s operation modeSetting the console�s operation modeSetting the console�s operation modeSetting the console�s operation modeOpen the tools menu with the dedicated function key labelled �TOOLS�.

If you are using ArtNet protocol to transmit DMX-data on a network make sure all the Artistic Licence DMX-Nodes are properly configured and connected to the network now.

You will find all necessary configuration tools in the �DMX-Output Configuration� menu activated by the abovedisplayed softkey. ààààà 2.7 2.7 2.7 2.7 2.7 DMX Output and Ethernet Configuration

14.5.214.5.214.5.214.5.214.5.2 Configuration Configuration Configuration Configuration Configuration of TCP/IPof TCP/IPof TCP/IPof TCP/IPof TCP/IPThe necessary connection set-up for the True Tracking Backup Mode or Playback Mode can be found in the TCP/IP Configuration menu which is activated by the �TCP/IP Configuration� softkey within the Tools menu.

1 You cannot use the same IP-address on different consolesconnected to the network.Change the individual IP-address of each console to aunique value within yournetwork. Make sure that thefirst three numbers (here:192, 168 and 177) are thesame for all consoles.

2 Each console must have a name which could be the same for some consoles (not recommended).

3 You can save your current settings with the SAVE button. CLOSE will close this window.



44444

5555566666

33333

11111

22222

77777

88888


14.5.314.5.314.5.314.5.314.5.3 Configuring Master/Slave-Mode for True Tracking or PlaybackConfiguring Master/Slave-Mode for True Tracking or PlaybackConfiguring Master/Slave-Mode for True Tracking or PlaybackConfiguring Master/Slave-Mode for True Tracking or PlaybackConfiguring Master/Slave-Mode for True Tracking or PlaybackBy pressing the button �Remote Network Configuration� in the TOOLS Menu, the following menu will open.

1 The chart shows all grandMA consoles with names and IP-Addresses, that are available in this network. The columnUNIV provides information for each console, if there are 4 or 8 DMX-outputs available on the respective console.

The �TTB-Status� column indicates the mode (Solo, Master or Slave) of True Tracking Backup, which the console iscurrently using. If you find an asterix in front of the indication, the console can be addressed as either Master orSlave. If there is no asterix, this console is locked. (Unlock; see item 2 - Button ALLOW/REJECT REMOTE LOGIN).

The �PB-Status� column indicates the mode (Solo, Master or Slave) of Playback operation, which the console iscurrently using. If you find an asterix in front of the indication, the console can be addressed as Master or Slave. Ifthere is no asterix, the console is locked (Unlock; see item 4 - Button ALLOW/REJECT REMOTE LOGIN).

True Tracking SetupTrue Tracking SetupTrue Tracking SetupTrue Tracking SetupTrue Tracking Setup2 On the right side of Status indicates, if this console operates in a True Tracking Backup connection as the Master or

the Slave. If SOLO is indicated, the console is working in Stand-Alone mode.

You can either set up or cancel a MASTER-SLAVE connection using the CONNECT/DISCONNECT button. See nextpage.

Switching the button function by shortly pressing on it:Switching the button function by shortly pressing on it:Switching the button function by shortly pressing on it:Switching the button function by shortly pressing on it:Switching the button function by shortly pressing on it:ALLOW REMOTE LOGIN: This console can be used by another console for a True Tracking Backup connection.REJECT REMOTE LOGIN: This console can notnotnotnotnot be used by another console for a True Tracking Backup connection.

3 In a True Tracking Backup connection this chart will show the two connected consoles.

4 In the cell on the right side of �Timeout for Connection�: you find a time indication, after which the consoles will beswitched to Stand-Alone mode, in case the connection between Master and Slave is lost. By clicking into the cell,you can enter a different time or �None�.If an error in the network or on one of the consoles is detected, the NETWORK ERROR window will open (from nowon, the given time starts to run).By pressing the ESCAPE key on the keyboard, you can switch this console to Stand-Alone mode and work with itimmediately.After the given time has elapsed, the console switches to Stand-Alone mode that still has to be confirmed bypressing the OK button. By changing the time to �0�, you can switch to Stand-Alone mode much faster.



Playback Tacking SetupPlayback Tacking SetupPlayback Tacking SetupPlayback Tacking SetupPlayback Tacking Setup5 On the right side of Status indicates, if this console operates in a Playback connection as the Master or the Slave. If

OFF is indicated, the console is working in Stand-Alone mode.

You can either set up or cancel a Playback Tracking MASTER-SLAVE connection using the CONNECT/DISCONNECTbutton. See following pages.

Switching the function of the button by short push:Switching the function of the button by short push:Switching the function of the button by short push:Switching the function of the button by short push:Switching the function of the button by short push:ALLOW REMOTE LOGIN: This console can be used by another console for a Playback connection.REJECT REMOTE LOGIN: This console can notnotnotnotnot be used by another console for a Playback connection.

6 In a Playback connection this chart will show the two connected consoles.

7 In the cell on the right side of �Timeout for Connection�, you find a time indication, after which the consoles will beswitched to Stand-Alone mode, in case the connection between Master and Slave is lost. By clicking into the cell,you can enter a different time or �None�.If an error in the network or on one of the consoles is detected, the NETWORK ERROR window will open (PlaybackSocket).In this window, you see the time frame in which the console will automatically switch to Stand-Alone mode. Afterthe given time has elapsed, the console/s will switch to Stand-Alone mode that still has to be confirmed by pressingthe OK button. By changing the time to �0�, you can switch to Stand-Alone mode much faster.By pressing the �Terminate Connection� button, you can switch this console to Stand-Alone mode and work with itimmediately.

8 Will close the window.



14.5.414.5.414.5.414.5.414.5.4 Setting up a True Tracking Backup ConnectionThis window will open if you go to True Tracking Backup and press the CONNECT button.

Pressing the button MASTER will start this console as the Master and the other one as the Slave. If you press SLAVE,this console will be started as Slave and the other one as Master.

After you have made your choice for MASTER or SLAVE, this window will open, where you can now select theconsole to be connected.

After the console has been selected, both consoles will reboot.

After rebooting, the Master console will start searching for the slave system (just as the slave system will startsearching for the Master). Following that, the current show will be transfered from the Master console to the Slaveconsole.

As soon as the connection has been fully set up, you can start with the normal operation of the Master console. TheSlave console will simultaneously execute all the steps (even fader movements).

The True Tracking Backup Connection remains active, as long as it is not:

manually interrupted by taking off the EtherNet cable (or by deactivation of the EtherNet Hubs). automatically stopped due to a recognised communication problem. canceled due to a hardware problem either at the Master or the Slave.

The slave will ask in any case though for a confirmation (by pushing the �Escape� button on the PC-keyboard), before it will take up its task to work in Stand-Alone mode. For this reason a Tracking BackupSystem should always have a PC-keyboard connected to the Slave.

Disconnecting a True Tracking Backup ConnectionDisconnecting a True Tracking Backup ConnectionDisconnecting a True Tracking Backup ConnectionDisconnecting a True Tracking Backup ConnectionDisconnecting a True Tracking Backup ConnectionIf you go to True Tracking Backup and press the DISCONNECT button in the PROTOCOL-CONFIGURATION menu, theconnection will be terminated. The Master console switches immediately to SOLO mode and can be used the normalway.

On the Slave console you will see a window called TRUE TRACKING BACKUP showing the following message:LOGOUT INITIATED BY MASTER. When pushing the OK button, this console will switch to SOLO mode and can be usedthe normal way.

Using consoles in external networksUsing consoles in external networksUsing consoles in external networksUsing consoles in external networksUsing consoles in external networksDo not try to connect Tracking Backup consoles with computers such as office PCs or network printers, as this wouldslow down the connection and the Tracking Backup might lose the synchronisation.


14.5.714.5.714.5.714.5.714.5.7 Setting up a Playback ConnectionIf during a Playback connection the Master console executes Playback commands, the slave console will do the sameexecutor button- or fader movements as the master. The active Executors will only be displayed on the currently active pageof the Slave console (but will be executed on all other pages). Using GO commands, not only GO+ and GO- are called up, butalso GOTO CUE X (Number of the Cue). All Playback commands (FIX, SELECT, OFF, TEMP, TOP, ON, <<<, LEARN, >>>, GO-,Pause and GO) will be executed. The switching over of pages will notnotnotnotnot be executed on the Slave console. If on the Masterconsole, executors are assigned via the ASSIGN menu, this will also happen on the Slave console.

This window will open if you go to Playback and press the CONNECT button.

By pressing the MASTER button, this console will be started as Master and the other one as Slave. By pressing theSLAVE button, this console will be started as Slave and the other one as Master.

After you have made your choice for either MASTER or SLAVE, this window will open where you can now select theconsole to be connected.

As soon as you have selected the console, the connection will be set up and can be used.

As soon as the connection has been fully set up, you can start with the normal operation of the Masterconsole. The Slave console will simultaneously do all the executor movements (even fader movements).

The Playback Connection remains active as long as it is not:The Playback Connection remains active as long as it is not:The Playback Connection remains active as long as it is not:The Playback Connection remains active as long as it is not:The Playback Connection remains active as long as it is not:

manually interrupted by taking off the EtherNet cable (or by deactivation of the EtherNet Hubs). automatically stopped due to a recognised communication problem. canceled due to a hardware problem at either the Master or the slave console.

If the connection is interrupted, the �NETWORK ERROR� window will open. The given time (Timeout forConnection), in which the connection can be verified, will run. After this time has elapsed, the connectionwill be terminated automatically. By pressing the �Terminate Connection� button, the connection can beterminated immediately.

While the connection is interrupted, you can work with both consoles in the normal way.

Disconnecting a Playback ConnectionDisconnecting a Playback ConnectionDisconnecting a Playback ConnectionDisconnecting a Playback ConnectionDisconnecting a Playback ConnectionIf you go to Playback in the PROTOCOL-CONFIGURATION menu and press the DISCONNECT button, a windowwill open, where you can terminate the connection by clicking on the other console. Both consoles will switchto Solo mode and can be used again the normal way.

Using consoles in external networksUsing consoles in external networksUsing consoles in external networksUsing consoles in external networksUsing consoles in external networksDo not try to connect Playback systems of grandMA consoles with other computers such as office PCs ornetwork printers, as this would slow down the connection and the Playback might lose the synchronisation.

True Tracking and Playback simultaneouslyTrue Tracking and Playback simultaneouslyTrue Tracking and Playback simultaneouslyTrue Tracking and Playback simultaneouslyTrue Tracking and Playback simultaneouslyTo make a True Tracking Backup of a Playback connection, you have to set up the Playback connection to theMaster console first. After that you can install the True Tracking Backup connection from the Master resp.from the Slave Playback consoles to the corresponding True Tracking Backup Slaves..

We recommend you to get more informtions by the MA Hotline before construction of complex networks(see below).


15 Fixture Library

15 Fixture Library15 Fixture Library15 Fixture Library15 Fixture Library15 Fixture LibraryManufacturer Fixture Name No. of Channels

DIMMER 8 BIT 1DIMMER 16 BIT 2DIMMER 16 BIT FIne first 2SCRxx-01 1SCDxx-01 2SRDxx-02 2

A B S T R A C TA B S T R A C TA B S T R A C TA B S T R A C TA B S T R A C T Galactic Moon 2Futurescan 4Scenesettece 2

ADB (BBA)ADB (BBA)ADB (BBA)ADB (BBA)ADB (BBA) Ingenio COLOUR Ch. 11

A M P T O W NA M P T O W NA M P T O W NA M P T O W NA M P T O W N ACC Posi Spot 4Contr.PML MK2 12Contr.PML ZOOM 23Contr.WL HX 7Contr.WL HX TV 10Contr.WL HX Sq 15Contr.WL HP 10Contr.WL HP TV 12Contr.WL HP Sq 16

B + KB + KB + KB + KB + K Varytec 5

CAMELEONCAMELEONCAMELEONCAMELEONCAMELEON TELESCAN MARK I 8TELESCAN MARK IV 19

CLAY PAKYCLAY PAKYCLAY PAKYCLAY PAKYCLAY PAKY Miniscan 300 4Miniscan HPE 7Goldenscan2 6Goldenscan3 6ch 6Goldenscan3 8ch 8Goldenscan HPE 12Superscan 12ch 12Superscan MRG 12Superscan Zoom 12ch 12Superscan Zoom 16ch 16Stage Scan 17ch 17Stage Light 300 10Stage Color 300 10Stage Color 575 14Stage Color 1000 11Stage Color 1200 14Stage Zoom 19ch 19Shadow 4Tigerscan 6Pinscan 3Bazuka 6Polycolor 6Tiger MRG 4Tiger COLOUR Changer 3Combicolor 4Tornado 8

COEFCOEFCOEFCOEFCOEF Performance 200 6Performance1-3 6Ch. 6Performance3 9Ch. 9Performance4 10Ch. 10Coef 1200 Disco 8COLOR SHOW 200 5MP 250 Optic HR+ 9MP 250 FRESNEL HR+ 9

C O E M A RC O E M A RC O E M A RC O E M A RC O E M A R Microscan 3 8Samurai 8MINI ULTRA 200/250 6MINI ULTRA 2 8NAT MM 1200 DX 10NAT MM 1200 PR 13Ch 13NAT MM 1200 ZOOM 20C 20MM 2500 Zoom 20Nat TM 1200 DX 12Nat TM 1200 DXP 14Nat TM 1200 20ch 20

C O E M A RC O E M A RC O E M A RC O E M A RC O E M A R Nat TM 1200 Power 20Nat TM 4000 20Nat TM 2500 21Ch 21CF 1200 Hard Edge 20CF 1200 Spot 13PC 1000 CC 8Pchmi 9CF6 (TAS) 12CF7 Hard Edge 20CF7 Zoom Wash 13

D H AD H AD H AD H AD H A DHA Light Curtain 2DHA P Light Curtain 3DHA Network 1

F A LF A LF A LF A LF A L FAL 2000 7FAL 2500 XL/XLD 11FAL 2500 XLDX 14Roulette 575/1200 8Proscan II HR 14Proscan X HR 13Promo 2/3 6Three-Sixty 8Three-Sixty2 10

F L YF L YF L YF L YF L Y FOS 3 12FOS 4 12Palette 5

FUTURE-L IGHTFUTURE-L IGHTFUTURE-L IGHTFUTURE-L IGHTFUTURE-L IGHT Miracle 4CC-200 4RT-150 4SC-330/370 4H-150 4Future H250 4Promotion Scan HR 11Genesis 8Voyager 8Duke 1200 8Advert Scan HR 11SC-250 6SC-530/570 10SC-740 13SC-780 16SC-940/980 16MH-640 15MH-840 16MH 660 Spot 16MH 860 Spot 16

G E N I U SG E N I U SG E N I U SG E N I U SG E N I U S Omega2 10

G L PG L PG L PG L PG L P Mini Star Tec 6Ch. 6Mighty Scan 6MAX 8Startec 2000 9Ch. 9Startec 1200 12Ch. 12Joy 300 11Patend 575 PAN_coars 13Patend 575 PAN_FINE 13Patend 1200 17

HIGH ENDHIGH ENDHIGH ENDHIGH ENDHIGH END Xspot 38Trackspot 7Technobeam HR 18ch 18Technobeam IrisHR 18Intellabeam 8ch 8Intellabeam HR 13ch 13Cyber CX M3 litho 15Cyber CX M3 15Cyber m1 Litho 20Cyberlight m1 20Cyberlight m2 20Cyber m2 Litho 20Studiocolor 16


15 Fixture Library

J E MJ E MJ E MJ E MJ E M JEM Hydrosonic 2000 2

L A M P OL A M P OL A M P OL A M P OL A M P O Sintesi+Super 6Columbus 1200 AF 10

LE MAITRELE MAITRELE MAITRELE MAITRELE MAITRE G300 Smoke 2

L ICHTTECHNIKL ICHTTECHNIKL ICHTTECHNIKL ICHTTECHNIKL ICHTTECHNIK Motor Yoke 300,330 17

L I T E B E A ML I T E B E A ML I T E B E A ML I T E B E A ML I T E B E A M SWING I 6Chandra I 7SWING II HR 14Chandra II HR 14

L S DL S DL S DL S DL S D Colormag 1Molemag 1

LYTE QUESTLYTE QUESTLYTE QUESTLYTE QUESTLYTE QUEST MotorHead 5

MAD LIGHTINGMAD LIGHTINGMAD LIGHTINGMAD LIGHTINGMAD LIGHTING Qstar 4Star511 5Scan411 4IMP407 4Qscan 5Scan611 6

M A R T I NM A R T I NM A R T I NM A R T I NM A R T I N Roboscan 218 m3 HR 9Roboscan 518 m3 HR 9Roboscan 812 7ch 7Robo 918 m4 16Robo 1020 12Robo 1220 16Imagescan m2 9Robo 1220 XR m4 HR 15Robo 1220 cmyr m4 19Robo 1220 rpr m4 17Pal 1200 m4 26Pal FX 1200 m4 20Mac2000Prof 24Mac 1200 m4 14Mac 600 m4 14Mac 600 NT m4 15Mac 500 m4 16Mac 300 m4 13Mac 250 m4 13MiniMac Pr m4 10MiniMac WS m4 8MX-1 6MX-4 7ch 7QFX 150 5CX-2 4Robocolor MSD EX 7Robocolor pro4 5ch 5Exterior 9ch 9Exterior 7ch 7Exterior 5ch 5

M O R P H E U SM O R P H E U SM O R P H E U SM O R P H E U SM O R P H E U S PANa Beam 4COLOUR Fader CMY 3COLOUR Fader DIMMER 4

MOV I TECMOV I TECMOV I TECMOV I TECMOV I TEC SL250 15WL250 16

O B I E SO B I E SO B I E SO B I E SO B I E S Xescan 10

OMICRONOMICRONOMICRONOMICRONOMICRON Omicron Laser 16

OPT IK INET ICSOPT IK INET ICSOPT IK INET ICSOPT IK INET ICSOPT IK INET ICS Solar System 7

R A I N B O WR A I N B O WR A I N B O WR A I N B O WR A I N B O W PRO Color Changer 4

S A G I T T E RS A G I T T E RS A G I T T E RS A G I T T E RS A G I T T E R MW-575z 16MS-575 16Prince 6ch 6SuperPrince 10ch 10Infinity HR 12ch. 12Infinity MSZ HR 14Infinity Live 20ch 20Tracer 5MASK COLOR ZOOM 10Digiflash 2

S G MS G MS G MS G MS G M Galileo 1 6Galileo 2 HR 12Galileo 3 HR 14Galileo 4 HR 18Giotto 13Giotto+Doors 18Giotto Spot 250 22Giotto Spot 400 22Giotto Spot 1200 18Giotto Wash 1200 13Victory 250 7Victory2 250 10Newton 5COLOUR Lab 250 6

S H O W P R OS H O W P R OS H O W P R OS H O W P R OS H O W P R O Cyberscan HR 13Ch. 13

S L SS L SS L SS L SS L S Panscan 3 Junior 5Panscan4 HR 15

SPACE CANNONSPACE CANNONSPACE CANNONSPACE CANNONSPACE CANNON IreosPro+art+ibi 15Easy 10Focus 8Target + Devil 8

S T A R L I T ES T A R L I T ES T A R L I T ES T A R L I T ES T A R L I T E Starlite 2G HR 9Starlite Mk5 19

S T R O N GS T R O N GS T R O N GS T R O N GS T R O N G Mini Scan Rotax 6Big Scan 3 12

STUDIO DUESTUDIO DUESTUDIO DUESTUDIO DUESTUDIO DUE Varybeam 7CityColor 7Live Pro 1200 CMY 20Live Pro 1200 PRISM 16Live Pro 1200 FROST 16Stratos HR 15Stratos CMY R.Gobo 14Stratos CMY Iris 14Minibeam 6Giant HR 9ch 9Light Reflector 7Predator 6

SUMMA USASUMMA USASUMMA USASUMMA USASUMMA USA Summa hti 9

SYSTEMI LUCESYSTEMI LUCESYSTEMI LUCESYSTEMI LUCESYSTEMI LUCE COLOUR Plus 3

T A ST A ST A ST A ST A S Mini Ultrascan2 7Crono 9

THEATRE PROJECTSTHEATRE PROJECTSTHEATRE PROJECTSTHEATRE PROJECTSTHEATRE PROJECTS Sky Art 7

HIGH ENDHIGH ENDHIGH ENDHIGH ENDHIGH END Studiocolor 250 15Studio Spot 575 24Studio Spot CMY 24Studio Beam PC V1.0 16Studio Spot 250 18Color Pro Std+HX 6Color Pro Enh+HX 9Technopro HR 12ch 12Trackspot mainlight 5Technoray hR 14ch 14Dataflash 3

J . B .J . B .J . B .J . B .J . B . Varyscan 3 SP+ 6CH. 6Varyscan 3 SP+ 8CH. 8Varyscan 3 700 13Varyscan 4 8Varyscan 4 EV 11Varyscan 5 MV 22Varyscan 6 spot 12Varycolor 6 wash 12Varycolor 6

MA Lighting Technology GmbH . Dachdeckerstr. 16 . D-97297 Waldbüttelbrunn . www.malighting.de eMail: [email protected]

Declaration of ConformityDeclaration of ConformityDeclaration of ConformityDeclaration of ConformityDeclaration of Conformityaccording to directives 89/336 EWG and 92/3according to directives 89/336 EWG and 92/3according to directives 89/336 EWG and 92/3according to directives 89/336 EWG and 92/3according to directives 89/336 EWG and 92/31 EWG1 EWG1 EWG1 EWG1 EWG

Manufacturer�s name:Manufacturer�s name:Manufacturer�s name:Manufacturer�s name:Manufacturer�s name: MA Lighting Technology GmbH

Manufacturer�s address:Manufacturer�s address:Manufacturer�s address:Manufacturer�s address:Manufacturer�s address: Dachdeckerstraße 16D-97297 WaldbüttelbrunnGermany

declares that the product

Name of product:Name of product:Name of product:Name of product:Name of product: MA grandMA, grandMA light, grandMA ultra-light, grandMA RPU

Type:Type:Type:Type:Type: MA GM

complies with the following product specifications:

Safety:Safety:Safety:Safety:Safety: EN60065, EN60950

EMV (EMC):EMV (EMC):EMV (EMC):EMV (EMC):EMV (EMC): EN55103-1 (E1), EN50081-1

EN55103-2 (E2), EN50082-1

Additional information:Additional information:Additional information:Additional information:Additional information: DMX512 and analogue inputs and outputs must be shielded and the shieldingmust be connected to the earthing resp. to the housing of the correspondingplug.

Dipl. Ing. Michael Adenau

Declaration of Conformity according to directives 89/336 EWG and 92/31 EWG

VAR I * L I TEVAR I * L I TEVAR I * L I TEVAR I * L I TEVAR I * L I TE Vlm m3 V5.1 10Vlm m4 v5.1 13Vl5/Vl5B m3 v5.1 11Vl5 m4 v5.1 14Vl5 Arc m3 v5.1 10Vl5 Arc m4 v5.1 14Vl6 m3 v5.1 10Vl6 m4 v5.1 14Vl6 m5 v5.1 11Vl6 m6 v5.1 15Vl6B m5 v5.1 14Vl6B m6 v5.1 18Vl7 m7 v5.1 17Vl7 m8 v5.1 20Vl7B m9 v5.1 24Vl7B m10 v5.1 27Vl2201 8bit Std. 12Vl2201 16bit Std. 14Vl2201 8bit Enhc 15Vl2201 16bit Enhc 17Vl24xx 8bit Std. 10Vl24xx 16bit Std. 12Vl24xx 8bit Enhc 13Vl24xx 16bit Enhc 15Irideon AR5 HR 8Ch 8Irideon AR500 4

X & YX & YX & YX & YX & Y Yoke XL 7MN 400 Wash 12MN 400 Spot 13MN 600 Wash 14MN 600 Spot 14Bim 1200 14

Phone: + 49 9 31 49 79 4- 0 Fax: -29 . Hotline: +49 5251 688865-99Hotline: +49 5251 688865-99Hotline: +49 5251 688865-99Hotline: +49 5251 688865-99Hotline: +49 5251 688865-99 . User�s Manual grandMA Version 3.0 203203203203203

Index

IndexIndexIndexIndexIndexCHASER, triggering a 46CHASES OFF 112CLEAR 10, 17, 63, 143, 157� LED 63CLOCK 56CLOSE 104Colours, rainbow color-blending

113� used in the FIXTURE,

CHANNEL and FADERwindow 77

Columns 29, 74COMBINED WITH COMMAND

LINE COMMANDS135, 137, 139

COMMANDLINE 56, 65, 146Command Overview 148� Reference 150Complete Loss of Data 8CONFIRM 124COPY 61, 90, 143, 158COS 113CREATE GROUPS 36� PRESETS 36Creating Effects

automatically 41� Groups automatically 41� Presets automatically 41Crossfade 45Cue 82, 158�, copying a 90�, deleting a 81, 92� Destinations 97�, executing a 997�, including a 85�, merging a 84�, moving a 91� Only 45, 109�, overwriting a 84�, removing a 84�, renumbering a 92� Timing 44� Update 98�, updating a 97CURRENT PAGE OFF 112� Settings 101, 103CURVE 38

DDDDDate 21DEC 68DEF_GO 159DEFAULT 32, 38, 44, 63� Printer 25, 27� Sequence 10, 86, 107� Menu, Settings in the 44Defining DMX Addresses for

Fixtures 56DELAY 17, 68, 143, 160� time 107� times in the CHANNEL

window 73�� in the FIXTURE window 65DELETE 57, 143, 160Desk Lamp 43�, Locking the 52� STATUS 57DIMMER CHANNELS, accessing

directly 70��, patching 28��, selecting the Number of

22�, creating a 19�, editing a 19� Group, calling up a 60, 104��, creating a 60, 104� Option 75� PATCH 26�, patching a 19� Values 68Dir (direction) 115Direction 74Display Panel, Adjusting the

Viewing of the 8

DMX 7, 68� Addresses 67�� for Dimmers 26�� for Fixtures 24� Channels, 4096 57��, assigning 137� hub 31� IN, Remote Control by 136� Input, using the 137� LINES 56DMX LIST 32� OUTPUT CONFIGURATION

30�� A to H 24, 26�� Window 28� ports A to H (Universe) 30� -XLR sockets 28DMX_BTN 161Dongle 30DOUBLE SPEED 95DUMMY Function 40

EEEEEDIT 143, 161� EFFECT 113, 114� FIXTURE 23, 39, 40� FORMS 113, 122, 123, 124� menu 88Editing Macros 141EFFECT 56, 162�, creating an � automatically

36�, deleting individual an 117�, editing an 114� Group, assigning a 99��, customizing an 119��, editing a 114��, executing an 118�� in Cues 120��, switched off 121� Pool 113, 114� run backwards 118� Speed 44EFFECTS 89, 95, 107� OFF 112Elimination, Dropout 127Emergency Backup 8� Switch 42Empty 100, 101ENCODER 10, 78� (Attribute) Grouping 49�, Sensitivity of the 42� SPEED 143END LINE 92ENTER 143Enumerate Names 25EQUALIZE DOTS 123Equalizer 46ESC 163ESCAPE 17, 143Ethernet 30, 195EVEN 143, 163EVERYTHING OFF 112Exchange Fixtures 21EXCLUDED 108EXEC 163EXECUTOR 18, 56, 94�, Assignment to 99� BUTTON 82, 101�� Page 110�, copying an 105� Defaults 44�, deleting an 81, 105� FADER 42, 88, 101, 110�� Window 106�, moving an 105� pages 102� SETTINGS 44, 102� Window 107extra fine 42

FFFFF (Fade) 89, 95F9 42FADE 17, 68, 89, 95, 100, 143,

164� Time 107��, individual 65�� in the CHANNEL window

73�� in the FIXTURE window

65FADER 56, 164�, changing a 100FADER Page 110� window, Colours used in the

77� OFF 112FEATURE 48, 165Figures, red 63Filter 114FIRMWARE 182FIX 108, 165FIXTURE 56, 165FIXTURE, accessing directly 62�, calling up a 60, 104�, creating a 19, 40, 60, 104�, Defining DMX Addresses 56�, deleting a 21�, editing a 19�, editing a (create new) 40�, editing a (modify) 38� Library 200�, odd-numbered or even-

numbered 114� OPTION 67�, patching a 19, 28� SCHEDULE 20�, selected 65�, selecting a 19�, selecting Type and Numbers

of a 20� window 62��, Colours used in the 77��, Options in the 68FIXTURES PATCH 24Flash 101FLASH_DOWN 166Flashdisc 6Flightcase 8FLIP 143Floppy 21, 23, 39, 181Folders 34FOLLOW 90FONT SIZE 68, 107FORM 166FORWARD 95FREEZE 10, 90From 116FULL 167Functions 32�, mathematical 124

GGGGGAIN 46Go 90, 95, 101, 167� fast backwards 155�� forward 155grandMA light

12, 14, 106, 183� replay unit 12, 184� ultra-light

8, 12, 13, 52, 106, 183

GRANDMASTER18, 25, 27, 45, 67, 75, 82

GROUP 168� Button, creating a �

automatically 36�, calling up a 61�, copying a 61�, deleting a 81� Functions 38� Master, assigning a 104�, moving a 61

S y m b o l sS y m b o l sS y m b o l sS y m b o l sS y m b o l s% + 68<<<: 101

AAAAACTION 89, 95Activating 17Active Values 45, 68, 83ACTUAL SHOW 22Additive 43ADMIN 53After Roll 127ALIGN 115, 116� Function 63, 72� OFF 143ALL 17, 45, 83, 143, 155� for Selected Devices 45, 83� FULL 104� OFF 121� SCREENS 58ALWAYS 117ANGLE 123ARC 123Archives of Fixtures 39ARROW 123Artistic Licence 30ARTNET 30AS (Adaptive Speed) 117ASCII format 37ASSIGN 18, 89, 143, 156� menu 17, 99Assignments, deleting

135, 137, 139ATTRIBUTE GROUPING 47, 66Attributes 48AUTO 68� FIX 102� GAIN 46� LOOP 95� PrePos 103� SCROLL 89, 107, 109� STOP 46� WRAP 74� SORT-Function 74

BBBBBackground Illumination 43BACKUP 143BASE 116� VALUE 116BASIC FADE 17, 83, 90Battery 8BEEPS ON 199BLACKOUT 10, 46BLIND 10, 89BLOCK 109Booting 16BOUNCE 95, 119BPM 44, 46, 95, 119Button, changing a 100� Page 110BUTTONS OFF 112

CCCCCalculator 15Calibrating Button 42CHANNEL 56, 157� Expansion to 4096 24� FADER 42, 71� Mode 71� Page 96� -specific Adjustments for the

Current Show 32� VALUES 41� window, Colours used in the

77CHASE 113� INFADE 96� OUTFADE 96� SPEED 96CHASER 106�, calling a (Playback) 87�, editing a 94�, executing a 99� SPEED 44, 105

MA Lighting Technology GmbH . Dachdeckerstr. 16 . D-97297 Waldbüttelbrunn . www.malighting.de eMail: [email protected]

GROUP Name, changing a 104� Overview 104GROUPS 56Grp (Group) 116

HHHHHALF SPEED 95Hard Disk 6, 180HARD EDIT 35HARDDISK LIBRARY 23Hardware 7� Protection ààààà DongleHEX 68HIDE 74HIGHLIGHT 32, 38HIGHLITE 25History 90, 91, 147HOLD-OFF 46HOTLINE 16HZ 44

IIIII DELAY 89, 95I.FADE 89, 95Id Executor 68Id Sequence 68IF 168IFOUTPUT 168Illumination 43INCLUDED 108Incremental 43IND. DELAYTIME 65, 83IND. FADETIME 83INSERT 169Installation 7INTENS 89, 95INTENSITY 118INVERS 38INVERT 143, 169

KKKKKEYBOARD GERMAN/ENGLISH45

Keyword 148

LLLLLABEL 169Lasso Function 109Latest Takes Precedence 17LAYER TO DISPLAY 68, 74LEARN 101, 170LI. DEL 89, 95Library 19, 21, 23, 39, 182�, Fixture 200LIN 113LINK 89, 92, 95� DEFAULT 106� Fader-Function in the

CHANNEL window 74LIST 13, 110LOAD 170Locking the Desk 52LOOP 89, 95� (COUNT) 92� (TIMED) 92�, drawing a 24, 26LOOPDELAY 89, 92, 95LOOPS 92, 107Loss of Data 8LTP Dimmer 103LTP principle 17, 82, 102

MMMMMACRO 170�, activating a 140� button 10�, creating a 140�, deleting a 81�, editing a 141�, inserting a � in a Cue 92� OPTIONS 140� Pool 140� TIMED 141MACROS 56, 105, 140MAIN PROGRAM 182Manual Fade 80MANUFACTURER LIBRARY 22MASTER 100� Sequence 86� START 102� STOP 102

Mathematical Functions 124MIDI_BTN 170MIDI Channel, selecting the

139� IN 138� Input 139� note 138�, Remote Control by 138� Show Control 138� Timecode 126MIRROR 123MODIFY CUE 89Modulator 116Monitor, external 42Motorfader 42Mouse Button, middle 70, 78� Function 42MOVE 91, 143, 171MSC (Midi Show Control) 138MTC (Midi Timecode) 126MULTI PATCH 26

NNNNNAME 89, 95� Field 74�/MANUFACTURER 38Names 68�, enumerate 25NEW ENTRY 22� START 92� Timecode 125NEXT 10, 61, 143, 171NO MASTER 25, 75� SWAP 67� WRAP 74No. 89, 95NON TRACKING 17Numbers 68

OOOOODD 143, 171OFF 18, 101, 171� -EXECUTOR 112� menu (RUNNING

PROGRAMS) 112� On Overwritten 119� -PAGE 112� Time 44OFFSET 116On 101, 172One Shot 119OOPS 14, 43, 172Out 101OUTFADE 89, 95� TIME 83Output Window, DMX 28Overview, Command 148

PPPPPAGE 102, 110, 172� Administration 110�, copying a 111�, deleting a 81, 111�, moving a 9111� Name 111PAN 25� NORMAL 67� /TILT MAX 39�/� -Trackball-Orientation 25Panel, mechanical parts

of the 8Param (Parameter) 114Parc Function 64, 72Part (Partly) 117Patching Dimmer channels 28� Fixtures 28PAUSE 101, 118, 173PHASE1/PHASE2/PHASE3 113Pitch, assigning the 139Playback Buttons, assigning

134, 138� Timing 44�, True Tracking 195, 196Plug-In Card 30POSITIVE ENABLE 104Power Failure 8Pre Roll 127PREDEFINES 122

PRESET 173�, calling up a 78, 80� Control Bar 62�, copying a 80�, creating a 39, 78�, creating a � automatically

36�, deleting a 39, 81� FILTER 45� Group 48�, moving a 79�, updating a 98� Values 59PRESETS 41PRESS OK TO REBOOT 126PREV 10, 61PREVIEW 87, 174PREVIOUS 143, 174Printer 25, 27PROFILE 32, 34, 38�, assigning a 34�, creating a 34�, customizing a 34�, deleting a 34Prop.� 43pulldown menu 14PULSE WIDTH 115PUSH 42PWM 113

QQQQQuick Reference 16QUIKEY 56, 140, 143�, activating a 143, 186�, assigning a 143, 186

RRRRRainbow Color-Blending 113RANDOM 113RANDOMLY 95Rate 100, 116� FACTOR 107REACT AS STORED ONLY

135, 137, 139READOUT 68Reference, Command 150Remote Control 125�� by DMX IN 136�� by by MIDI 138�� via Touchboard 134Renumbering Cues 92replay unit

ààààà grandMA replay unitRESET 21REVERS 95Roll, after 127�, pre 127ROTATION 123RUN 95RUNNING EFFECTS 121

SSSSSafety Instructions 9SAVE PRESET REFERENCE 36SEARCH/MOVE 114SEC 42SELECT 10, 174Selected Devices 68Selecting 17Selection 114Separate Memories 82SEQU 174SEQUENCE 56, 106�, assigning a 99�, calling a (Playback) 87�, copying a 85�, deleting a 81�, editing a 88�, executing a 99� Names, changing 99�, programming a 84�, triggering a 46SEQUENCES 82� OFF 112Service Work 9SET 61Settings, current 101, 103� in the Setup Menu 42

SETUP 19, 143� Menu, Settings in the 42Sheet 45Shortcut 148Show, deleting from harddisk

181� Import 37�, loading an empty 181�, loading from floppy disk

181�, loading from harddisk 180�, saving on floppy disk 181�, saving the current on

harddisk 180SIN 113Size 115� of EXECUTOR buttons 101SMPTE 125SNAP 32, 89, 95� DELAY 17, 83, 90, 96SOFT 89, 95� EDIT 35Soft Keyboard 13, 15SOFTNESS 118Software Crash 9� Update 182, 183� Version 57SORT Ascending 68� BY 68� by Names 20� Desending 68SOUND 46, 95� Signal 90��, Setting of a 46Special Masters, assigning 105SPEED 89, 95, 100, 118, 119� Group 105, 119� INDV. 95SPEED SCALE 96, 119START LINE 92� Speed 119Status Copy 90STORE 17, 143, 175� LED 58SUB NET addresses 31Summer Time 51SWAP 25, 100SWOP 101, 175SWOP_OFF 175Sync Start 119

TTTTTable 115TEMP 101, 175TEST OUT 26THRU 176TILT 25� NORMAL 67� OFFSET 39TIME 17, 65, 73, 86�, automatically according to

set 90�, summer 51TIMECODE 57, 125, 176� , Midi 126�, new 125� Show 105TOGGLE 101, 176TOOLS 143� menu 30TOP 101, 177TOUCH_BTN 177Touchboard, Remote Control

vial 134Touchscreen 8, 42, 88TRACKBALL 14, 62, 78�, Sensitivity of the 42� SPEED 143TRACKING 17, 56, 86� mode 102� Window 108TRACKINGSHEET OPTIONS 108TRIANGLE 113TRIGGER 83, 89, 95�, changing the 90

Index

Phone: + 49 9 31 49 79 4- 0 Fax: -29 . Hotline: +49 5251 688865-99Hotline: +49 5251 688865-99Hotline: +49 5251 688865-99Hotline: +49 5251 688865-99Hotline: +49 5251 688865-99 . User�s Manual grandMA Version 3.0 205205205205205

Index

Triggermonitor 46True Tracking 195, 196�� Playback 195, 196TYPE OF FIXTURE 39

UUUUUltra-lightààààà grandMA ultra-light

Unblock 109UNDO 33Universe ààààà DMX ports A to HUNPRESS 177UPDATE 120, 143, 177� Cue 98� LIBRARY 21, 23

UPDATE Presets 98�, Software 182, 183USER DEFINED 113, 115� LIBRARY 22� Management 52� Profiles 53Utility menu 16

VVVVVALUE 177VALUES 143� Only 68�, selecting individual 66Ventilation 8

VIEW 177� ALL RUNNING EFFECTS menu

121�, assigning a 59� button 10, 58�, deleting a 81� Macro Button 6� Pool 59�, saving a 58VIEWBTN 178VIEWS 56Virtual Form, creating a 122��, modifying a 123��, self-created two-

dimensional 115

Virtual Form, two-dimensional122

VISUALIZE FORMS 115VL 5 25

WWWWWeights and Dimensions 7Wheel 43, 62, 78Window, creating a 56�, deleting a 57�, enlarge a 57Wing 116WINZip 182

XXXXXF A/B 100XFADE 100

user™s manual · hotline: +49 5251 688865-99 . user™s manual grandma version 3.0 5 contents /...

Documents